Trio Q Data Radio

User Manual

Date: 02/2022

www.se.com
Legal Information
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions
and/or technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained
herein. This documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be
used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user
applications. It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the
appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products
with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof. Neither
Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible
or liable for misuse of the information contained herein. If you have any
suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this
publication, please notify us.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, without express written
permission of Schneider Electric.
All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when
installing and using this product. For reasons of safety and to help ensure
compliance with documented system data, only the manufacturer should
perform repairs to components.
This document contains standardized industry terms that some customers might
find insensitive or offensive. These terms do not reflect the official policy or
position of Schneider Electric.

Trademarks
Schneider Electric, ChannelShare, ClearSCADA, EcoStruxure, Modbus, Trio
and TVIEW+ are trademarks and the property of Schneider Electric SE, its
subsidiaries and affiliated companies. All other trademarks are the property of
their respective owners.

Address
Schneider Electric Systems USA

Process Automation, Remote Operations

38 Neponset Avenue, Foxboro, Massachusetts 02035 USA

Email: [email protected]

www.se.com

© 2014 - 2022 Schneider Electric Systems USA Inc.

All rights reserved.
Table of Contents
1 Part A -...................................................................................................................11
Preface
1.1 Technical
................................................................................................................................11
Support
1.2 Safety Information
................................................................................................................................12
1.3 Cybersecurity
................................................................................................................................16
1.4 Revision................................................................................................................................18
History
1.5 Important
................................................................................................................................18
Information
1.6 Compliance
................................................................................................................................19
Information
1.7 Typical Antenna
................................................................................................................................19
Installation Exclusion Zone
1.8 IEEE1613
................................................................................................................................23
and IEC61850-3 Compliance
2 Part B -...................................................................................................................24
Introduction
2.1 Introduction
................................................................................................................................24
to the Trio Q Family
2.2 Product ................................................................................................................................24
Features
2.3 Trio Q Data
................................................................................................................................26
Radio Offer
3 Part C -...................................................................................................................30
System Topologies & Operating Modes
3.1 System Topologies
................................................................................................................................30
3.1.1 Point-to-Point
...................................................................................................................31
(PTP)
3.1.2 Point-to-Multipoint
...................................................................................................................31
(PTMP)
3.1.3 Point-to-Multipoint
...................................................................................................................32
via Repeater (PTMP/R)
3.1.4 Point-to-Multipoint
...................................................................................................................32
via Multiple Repeater (PTMP/MR)
3.1.5 Multipoint-to-Multipoint
...................................................................................................................33
(MPTMP)
3.2 Operating
................................................................................................................................33
Modes
3.2.1 Transparent
...................................................................................................................33
Bridge Mode
3.2.2 IP Routing
...................................................................................................................34
Mode
3.2.3 Mixed Bridge/Router
...................................................................................................................35
Mode
4 Part D -...................................................................................................................37
Feature Overview
4.1 Hardware
................................................................................................................................37
4.2 Efficiency
................................................................................................................................38
and Bandwidth
4.2.1 Over the ...................................................................................................................38
Air RF Data Rates and Modulation Types
4.2.2 Forward Error
...................................................................................................................39
Correction (FEC)
4.2.3 Dynamic ...................................................................................................................39
Speed Selection (DSS)

3
 4.2.4 Channel Management
...................................................................................................................40
4.2.4.1 Token Grant Channel Management
................................................................................................................41
(TGCM)
4.2.4.2 Carrier
................................................................................................................42
Detect
4.2.4.3 Digital
................................................................................................................42
4.2.5 Automatic...................................................................................................................42
Repeat reQuests (ARQs)
4.2.6 Robust Header
...................................................................................................................43
(RoHC) and Payload Compression
4.2.7 Quality of...................................................................................................................43
Service (QoS)
4.2.8 E-Series ...................................................................................................................44
Emulation Mode
4.3 Connectivity
................................................................................................................................44
4.3.1 User Data...................................................................................................................45
Interfaces
4.3.2 Serial Device
...................................................................................................................45
Server
4.3.3 Modbus Protocol
...................................................................................................................46
Gateway
4.3.4 Network Address
...................................................................................................................46
Translation (NAT)
4.3.5 TCP/UDP...................................................................................................................46
Gateway
4.4 Ease of ................................................................................................................................47
Use
4.4.1 Web User...................................................................................................................47
Interface (WUI)
4.4.2 Text Terminal
...................................................................................................................48
4.4.3 Configuration
...................................................................................................................49
4.4.3.1 Zero Touch USB Automatic
................................................................................................................49
Configuration Activation
4.4.4 Diagnostics
...................................................................................................................50
4.4.4.1 Radio
................................................................................................................50
Diagnostics
4.4.4.2 EcoStruxure Geo SCADA Expert
................................................................................................................53
(ClearSCADA)
4.4.4.3 TVIEW+
................................................................................................................54
Diagnostics
4.4.4.4 SNMP
................................................................................................................54
Diagnostics
4.4.4.5 Syslog
................................................................................................................54
4.4.5 Management
...................................................................................................................55
Tools
4.4.5.1 Network
................................................................................................................55
Time
4.4.5.2 Packet
................................................................................................................55
Transmission Testing
4.4.5.3 Wireshark™
................................................................................................................55
Packet Capture
4.4.5.4 Firmware
................................................................................................................56
Upgrade
4.5 Security................................................................................................................................56
4.5.1 Radio Access
...................................................................................................................56
Control

4
 4.5.2 256-bit AES-GCM
...................................................................................................................57
Encryption
4.5.3 Zero Touch
...................................................................................................................57
Secure Configuration
4.5.4 Virtual LAN
...................................................................................................................58
(VLAN)
4.5.5 Centralized
...................................................................................................................58
User Access Control
4.5.6 Packet Filtering
...................................................................................................................59
Firewall
4.5.7 Ethernet Filtering
...................................................................................................................59
4.5.8 Achilles Cyber
...................................................................................................................60
Security Compliant (Level 2)
4.6 Low Power
................................................................................................................................60
Mode
5 Part E -...................................................................................................................61
Radio Planning and Design
5.1 Radio Path
................................................................................................................................61
Analysis
5.2 BER and................................................................................................................................64
Fade Margin
5.3 Radio Accessories
................................................................................................................................65
5.3.1 Antennas...................................................................................................................66
5.3.2 RF Adaptors
...................................................................................................................68
5.3.3 RF Coaxial
...................................................................................................................68
Cable
5.3.4 Feeder Tail
...................................................................................................................69
Cables
5.3.5 Antenna Feedline
...................................................................................................................69
Cables
5.3.6 Lightning...................................................................................................................70
Arrestors
6 Part F -...................................................................................................................72
Quick Reference Guide
6.1 QR - Half-Duplex/Simplex
................................................................................................................................72
Radio
6.1.1 Mounting...................................................................................................................73
Instructions
6.1.2 Physical Dimensions
...................................................................................................................74
6.1.3 DIN Rail Mounting
...................................................................................................................75
6.1.4 Power Supply
...................................................................................................................79
Requirements
6.1.5 Physical Interfaces
...................................................................................................................80
6.2 QB - Base
................................................................................................................................81
Radio
6.2.1 Mounting...................................................................................................................81
6.2.2 Physical Dimensions
...................................................................................................................83
6.2.3 Power Supply
...................................................................................................................83
Requirements
6.2.4 Physical Interfaces
...................................................................................................................85
6.3 QP - Hot-Standby
................................................................................................................................85
Half-Duplex Radio
6.3.1 Operational
...................................................................................................................86
Description
6.3.2 Mounting...................................................................................................................86
Guidelines

5
 6.3.3 Physical Dimensions
...................................................................................................................87
6.3.4 Power Supply
...................................................................................................................87
Requirements
6.3.5 IP Allocation
...................................................................................................................88
6.3.6 Physical Interfaces
...................................................................................................................89
6.4 QH - Hot-Standby
................................................................................................................................90
Hot-Swap Radio Kit
6.4.1 Operational
...................................................................................................................92
Description
6.4.2 Mounting...................................................................................................................92
and Environmental Considerations
6.4.3 Power Supply
...................................................................................................................93
Requirements
6.4.4 Physical Dimensions
...................................................................................................................93
6.4.5 Radio Position
...................................................................................................................94
Allocation
6.4.6 Communication
...................................................................................................................95
Ports
6.4.7 Power Supply
...................................................................................................................96
and Protection
6.4.8 Antennas...................................................................................................................96
and RF Feeders
6.4.9 Physical Interfaces
...................................................................................................................98
6.5 LED Indicators
................................................................................................................................100
6.6 Connecting
................................................................................................................................109
Antennas
6.7 Communication
................................................................................................................................109
Ports
6.8 Activating
................................................................................................................................112
Transmitter
6.9 Factory................................................................................................................................113
Default
6.10 Digital ................................................................................................................................114
I/O
6.11 Connecting
................................................................................................................................116
to the Web User Interface (WUI)
6.12 Resolving
................................................................................................................................118
Ethernet Connection Issues
7 Part G...................................................................................................................120
- Quick Start Guide
7.1 QR Point
................................................................................................................................120
to Point Bench Test Setup
7.2 QH Hot................................................................................................................................125
Standby Quick Start Guide
7.3 Setting................................................................................................................................128
up eDiags
7.4 USB Automatic
................................................................................................................................130
Configuration Activation
7.5 Radio Access
................................................................................................................................132
Control
8 Part H...................................................................................................................152
- Feature Detail
8.1 System................................................................................................................................152
Topologies and Operating Modes
8.1.1 Network...................................................................................................................152
Modes
8.2 Efficiency
................................................................................................................................161
and Bandwidth
8.2.1 Dynamic...................................................................................................................162
Speed Selection (DSS)

6
 8.2.2 Channel...................................................................................................................168
Management
8.2.2.1 Token Grant Channel Management
................................................................................................................168
(TGCM)
8.2.2.2 Carrier
................................................................................................................173
Detect Channel Management
8.2.2.3 Digital
................................................................................................................173
Channel Management
8.2.3 Automatic
...................................................................................................................176
Repeat reQuests (ARQs)
8.2.4 Robust Header
...................................................................................................................178
Compression (RoHC)
8.2.5 Quality of
...................................................................................................................180
Service
8.2.6 E-Series...................................................................................................................186
Emulation Mode
8.3 Connectivity
................................................................................................................................188
8.3.1 Serial Device
...................................................................................................................189
Server
8.3.1.1 Point to Point Serial Device Server
................................................................................................................189
Configuration
8.3.1.2 Point to Multipoint Serial Device
................................................................................................................191
Server Configuration
8.3.2 Modbus...................................................................................................................192
Gateway
8.3.3 Network...................................................................................................................194
Address Translation (NAT)
8.3.4 TCP/UDP
...................................................................................................................201
Gateway
8.4 Ease of................................................................................................................................202
Use
8.4.1 Web User
...................................................................................................................203
Interface (WUI)
8.4.1.1 HTTP
................................................................................................................203
Secure (HTTPS)
8.4.2 Text Terminal
...................................................................................................................209
8.4.2.1 Command-Line
................................................................................................................215
Interface (CLI)
8.4.2.2 Text
................................................................................................................216
User Interface (TUI)
8.4.3 Configuration
...................................................................................................................218
8.4.3.1 Configuration
................................................................................................................219
(WUI)
8.4.3.2 Configuration
................................................................................................................220
(CLI)
8.4.3.2.1 CLI
...................................................................................................227
Configuration Commands
8.4.3.3 Configuration
................................................................................................................246
(TUI)
8.4.3.4 Automatic
................................................................................................................248
Configuration Save
8.4.3.5 USB Automatic Configuration
................................................................................................................248
Activation
8.4.4 Diagnostics
...................................................................................................................250
8.4.4.1 Summary
................................................................................................................250
Page
8.4.4.2 Network
................................................................................................................251
List

7
 8.4.4.3 Syslog
................................................................................................................255
8.4.5 Alarms ...................................................................................................................258
8.4.5.1 Alarm
................................................................................................................261
Specifications
8.4.5.2 QB and Hot Standby Specific Alarm
................................................................................................................265
Specifications
8.4.5.3 Alarm
................................................................................................................266
Subscription
8.4.5.4 Alarm
................................................................................................................268
Output
8.4.5.5 Hot
................................................................................................................268
Standby Alarm Status
8.4.6 Events ...................................................................................................................270
8.4.7 SNMP ...................................................................................................................276
8.4.7.1 SNMP
................................................................................................................276
Configuration
8.4.7.2 SNMP - Diagnostic Objects and
................................................................................................................280
Notifications
8.4.7.3 SNMP - Critical Alarm Object
................................................................................................................296
Specifications
8.4.7.4 SNMP
................................................................................................................297
- Notifications-Advanced
8.4.7.5 SNMP - Remote Specific
................................................................................................................303
Notifications
8.4.7.6 SNMP - QB, QP, & QH Specific
................................................................................................................304
Notifications
8.4.7.7 Remote General Purpose Digital I/O
................................................................................................................306
(GPIO)
8.4.8 Network...................................................................................................................307
Time
8.4.9 Base Station
...................................................................................................................308
Advanced Configuration
8.4.10 Trio E-Series
...................................................................................................................310
Emulation Mode
8.5 Security
................................................................................................................................311
8.5.1 Centralized
...................................................................................................................312
User Access Control
8.5.2 Radio Access
...................................................................................................................316
Control
8.5.3 USB Port
...................................................................................................................332
8.5.4 Secure Shell
...................................................................................................................332
(SSH)
8.5.5 HTTP Secure
...................................................................................................................333
(HTTPS)
8.5.6 Packet Filtering
...................................................................................................................334
Firewall
8.5.7 Virtual LAN
...................................................................................................................351
(VLAN)
8.6 Low Power
................................................................................................................................355
Mode
9 Part I ...................................................................................................................357
- Installation and Commissioning
9.1 Antenna
................................................................................................................................359
Installation

8
 9.2 Optimizing
................................................................................................................................362
the Antenna for Rx Signal
9.3 Commissioning
................................................................................................................................363
9.4 WUI Diagnostics
................................................................................................................................363
10 Part J...................................................................................................................368
- Firmware Updating and Maintenance
10.1 Firmware
................................................................................................................................368
Updating
10.2 Firmware
................................................................................................................................369
Updating and Factory Default Information LEDs
10.3 Global ................................................................................................................................372
Firmware Updating
10.3.1 Global Firmware
...................................................................................................................373
Update Procedure
10.4 Packet................................................................................................................................383
Capture Session
10.5 Fuse Replacement
................................................................................................................................388
- QR
10.6 Fuse Replacement
................................................................................................................................391
- QP and QB
11 Part K...................................................................................................................394
- Open Source License Acknowledgements

12 Part L...................................................................................................................397
- Support Options

13 Appendix - Specifications
...................................................................................................................398
13.1 Radio Specifications
................................................................................................................................398
13.2 Transmitter
................................................................................................................................399
Specifications
13.3 Receiver
................................................................................................................................399
Specifications
13.4 Connections
................................................................................................................................402
Specifications
13.5 Ethernet
................................................................................................................................403
Specifications
13.6 Modem................................................................................................................................403
Specifications
13.7 Security
................................................................................................................................407
Specifications
13.8 Diagnostics
................................................................................................................................408
Specifications
13.9 General
................................................................................................................................408
Specifications
13.10 Compliance
................................................................................................................................410
Specifications
13.11 Footnotes
................................................................................................................................410

9
 Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

10 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part A - Preface

1 Part A - Preface

· Technical Support 11

· Safety Information 12

· Cybersecurity 16

· Revision History 18

· Important Information 18

· Compliance Information 19

· Typical Antenna Installation Exclusion Zone 19

· IEEE1613 and IEC6185-3 Compliance 23

1.1 Technical Support

Questions and requests related to any part of this documentation can be directed to one of the
following support centers.

Technical support: Americas, Europe, Middle East, Asia

Available Monday to Friday 8:00 am – 6:30 pm Eastern Time

Check our Explore our extensive knowledge database and FAQ videos to
FAQs find answers quickly:
https://se.com/faq

Email us Save time by emailing us your inquiry and an expert will

contact you:
[email protected]
Send us an email anytime.

Call us Need someone to provide some technical support?

· Toll free within North America: 1-888-226-6876

· Direct Worldwide: +1-613-591-1943

02/2022 11
Part A - Preface Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Technical support: Australia/New Zealand (Pacific)

Available Monday to Friday 8:00 am - 5:00 pm Australian Eastern Standard Time

Check our Explore our extensive knowledge database and FAQ videos to
FAQs find answers quickly:
https://se.com/faq

Email us Save time by emailing us your inquiry and an expert will

contact you:
[email protected]
Send us an email anytime.

Call us Need someone to provide some technical support?

· Inside Australia: 13 73 28 (13 SEAU)

· Inside New Zealand: 0800 652 999

1.2 Safety Information

Important information

Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the
device before trying to install, operate, or maintain it. The following special messages
may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential
hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates that
an electrical hazard exists, which will result in personal injury if the
instructions are not followed.

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to a potential personal
injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid
possible injury or death.

DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.

12 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part A - Preface

WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury.

CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor
or moderate injury.

NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury.

Please note

Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified
personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising
out of the use of this material.

A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction, installation,
and operation of electrical equipment and has received safety training to recognize and avoid
the hazards involved.

For the definition of a restricted access location, refer to the IEC 62368 standard.

WARNING
HAZARD OF THERMAL BURNS
High operating temperature.
· Avoid direct contact with device while in operation.
· Install the QR, QB, and QP device in a restricted access location to avoid unintentional
contact.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
HAZARD OF RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) BURNS
Ensure that a matching load or antenna is attached to the RF port prior to applying power to
the device.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.

02/2022 13
Part A - Preface Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

WARNING
HAZARD OF EXPLOSION
Ensure that all connected equipment is grounded to the power source ground termination.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
HAZARD OF EXPLOSION
· Do not use USB ports in hazardous applications or hazardous locations.
· Use USB ports only for non-hazardous applications in locations that are known to be in a
non-hazardous state.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.

Before using this product, read the Safety Information, Compliance information and all
recommendations related to the purchased wireless communications equipment found within the
Installation and Commissioning section found within the product user manual.

WARNING
UNACCEPTABLE USE
Do not use Trio Data Radios as an integral part of a safety system. These devices are not
safety products.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
· The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control
paths and, for certain critical control functions, provide a means to achieve a safe state
during and after a path failure. Examples of critical control functions are emergency stop
and over travel stop.
· Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control functions.
· System control paths may include communication links. Consideration must be given to the
implications of anticipated transmission delays or failures of the link1
· Each implementation of equipment utilizing communication links must be individually and
thoroughly tested for proper operation before being placed into service.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.

1For additional information about transmission delays or failures of the link, refer to NEMA ICS
1.1 (latest edition). Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid
State Control or its equivalent in your specific country, language, and/or location.

14 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part A - Preface

Environment

This environment is ‘ enclosed‘. It can be installed without any specific protection in areas with
restricted access and low pollution levels (not exceeding 2), for example; stations or control
rooms which have neither machines nor any activity generating metallic dust or other metallic
particles. In other environments, it is recommended to follow rules as defined in the user
manual. For the definition of a restricted access location, refer to the IEC 62368 standard.

WARNING
HAZARD OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY
· The QR, QB, and QP must be installed in a restricted access location
· Ensure that the operating temperature (air surrounding equipment) never exceeds 70 °C
(158 °F)
· Ensure that all radio equipment is installed with a lightning arrestor
· Ensure that all connected equipment is grounded to the power source ground termination
· Where an internal fuse is to be replaced, the replacement fuse must be of the specified
type and current rating. Refer to the fuse replacement instructions within the Product User
Manual before servicing.
· Ensure that a matching load or antenna is attached to the RF port prior to applying power to
the device
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.

Wiring

To improve the security of the installation, follow the rules below:

02/2022 15
Part A - Preface Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

NOTICE
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
· The radio modem can be damaged if there is any potential difference between the chassis-
ground, RS-232 signal ground, power (-) input, or antenna coaxial shield. Before
connecting any wiring, ensure that all components are earthed to a common ground point.
· The QR (part number TBURQRxxx-xxxx2xxx), with separate Rx antenna port, can be
damaged if the isolation between the Tx and Rx antenna is less than 20 dB. Before
connecting the QR to an antenna system, ensure that the isolation between the Tx and Rx
antennas is greater than 20 dB.
· The QB, when operating with the same transmit and receive frequencies, can be damaged
if the isolation between the Tx and Rx antenna is less than 47 dB. Before connecting the QB
to an antenna system, ensure that the isolation between the Tx and Rx is greater than 47 dB.
· The QP type D (part number TBURQPxxx-xxxxxxxD), can be damaged if the isolation
between the Tx and Rx antenna is less than 20 dB. Before connecting the QP to an antenna
system, ensure that the isolation between the Tx and Rx is greater than 20 dB.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

1.3 Cybersecurity

Cybersecurity is a branch of network administration that addresses attacks on or by computer

systems and through computer networks that can result in accidental or intentional disruptions.
The objective of cybersecurity is to help provide increased levels of protection for information
and physical assets from theft, corruption, misuse, or accidents while maintaining access for
intended users.

No single cybersecurity approach is adequate. Schneider Electric recommends a defense-in-

depth approach. This approach layers the network with security features, appliances, and
processes. The basic components of this approach are:

· Risk assessment: A systematic security analysis of the environment and related systems.
· A security plan built on the results of the risk assessment.
· A multi-phase training campaign.
· Network separation and segmentation: Physical separation of the control network from other
networks, and the division of the control network itself into segments and security zones.
· System Access Control: Controlling access to the system with firewalls, authentication,
authorization, and other software means, and traditional physical security measures such as
video surveillance, fences, locked doors and gates, and locked equipment cabinets.
· Device hardening: The process of configuring a device against communication-based
threats. Device hardening measures include disabling unused network ports, password
management, access control, and disabling unnecessary protocols and services.
· Network monitoring and maintenance: An effective defense-in-depth campaign requires
continual monitoring and system maintenance to meet the challenge of new threats as they
develop.

16 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part A - Preface

Data Privacy

This device is not designed or intended for the collection and storage of personal data. Data
stored on the device can be deleted by performing a factory reset.

Contact us

For more information, refer to the Schneider Electric Cybersecurity Support Portal at:
http://www.se.com/b2b/en/support/cybersecurity/overview.jsp

Additional Resources

Industrial Control Systems Cyber Emergency Response Team (ICS-CERT)

https://ics-cert.us-cert.gov

ICS-CERT Recommended Practices

https://ics-cert.us-cert.gov/Recommended-Practices

Center for Internet Security (CIS) Top 20 Critical Security Controls

https://www.cisecurity.org/cybersecurity-best-practices

FBI Cyber Crime

https://www.fbi.gov/investigate/cyber

Guide to Industrial Control Systems (ICS) Security

https://www.nist.gov/publications/guide-industrial-control-systems-ics-security

WaterISAC Water Security Network

https://www.waterisac.org

02/2022 17
Part A - Preface Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

1.4 Revision History

Release Date Updates

Version

Issue: 11-15 November 2015 Updates to support new features in firmware release
1.4.0.

Issue: 06-16 June 2016 Updates to support new features in firmware release
1.5.0.

Issue: 12-16 December 2016 Support for VHF Q variant.

Issue: 08-17 August 2017 Updated Compliance Information.

Issue: 01-18 January 2018 Updates to support new features in firmware release
2.1.0.

Issue: 03-19 March 2019 Updates to clarify router mode, and SCADA VLAN
default gateway.

Issue: 12-19 December 2019 Updates to support new features in firmware release
2.2.0.

Issue: 08-20 August 2020 New features in firmware release 2.4.0

Issue: 05-21 May 2021 Updates to support changes to repeating of multicast

packets in release 2.4.1 and new features in firmware
2.5.0

Issue: 02-22 February 2022 Updates to support new features and improvements in
firmware 2.6.0

1.5 Important Information

This manual covers the operation of the Trio Q Data Radio range. Specifications described are
typical only and are subject to normal manufacturing and service tolerances.

Schneider Electric reserves the right to modify the equipment, its specification or this manual
without prior notification, in the interest of improving performance, reliability or servicing. At the
time of publication all data is correct for the operation of the equipment at the voltage and/or
temperature referred to. Performance data indicates typical values related to the particular
product.

This manual is copyright by Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. No part of the
documentation or the information supplied may be divulged to any third party without the
express written permission of Schneider Electric.

The manual is also proprietary to Schneider Electric and are supplied for the purposes referred
to in the accompanying documentation and must not be used for any other purpose. All such
information remains the property of Schneider Electric and may not be reproduced, copied,

18 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part A - Preface

stored on or transferred to any other media or used or distributed in any way save for the
express purposes for which it is supplied.

Products offered may contain software which is proprietary to Schneider Electric. However, the
offer of supply of these products and services does not include or infer any transfer of
ownership of such proprietary information and as such reproduction or reuse without the
express permission in writing from Schneider Electric is forbidden. Permission may be applied
for by contacting Schneider Electric in writing.

1.6 Compliance Information

WARNING
HAZARD TO HEALTH DUE TO RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) EXPOSURE
· The radio equipment described in this user manual emits low level radio frequency energy.
The concentrated energy may pose a health hazard depending on the type of antenna
used.
· To satisfy EU, FCC and Industry Canada requirements a minimum separation distance
should be maintained between the antenna of this device and persons during operation as
per the table below.

Range of Minimum Minimum

Antenna System Separation Separation from
Gains (dBd) from Antenna Antenna
(Meters) (Feet Decimal)

0...4 2.6 8.6

4...8 4.1 13.5

8...12 6.5 21.4

12...16 10.3 33.8

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.

1.7 Typical Antenna Installation Exclusion Zone

The diagram below shows the exclusion zone for a typical antenna installation. The details of
this typical system are as follows:
· Trio Q Data Radio - 40 dBm (10 W)
· Antenna - Yagi 14 dBd / 16.15 dBi gain
· Lightning Arrestor - 0.5 dB loss
· Cable Run - 1.5 dB loss

02/2022 19
Part A - Preface Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Collocating the QR remote (Europe)

The QR is a remote radio and should not be collocated with other transmitting equipment.

FCC compliance

· This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
· The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized
modifications to this equipment. Such modifications could void the user’
s authority to operate
the equipment.

WARNING
HAZARD TO HEALTH DUE TO RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) EXPOSURE
When antennas are co-located on a community (shared) site the correct site engineering
must be performed to ensure that RF exposure limits are met. FCC requirements can be found
in 47 CFR 1.1307(b)(3)
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.

20 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part A - Preface

FCC compliance (Hot standby controller only)

NOTICE
RISK OF RF INTERFERENCE
· This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction, equipment may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
o Re-orient to relocate the receiving antenna.
o Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
o Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different to that which the receiver is
connected.
o Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for assistance.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in RF interference with other devices.

Site grounding

NOTICE
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Ensure that the chassis mounting plate, power supply (-) Ground, RTU terminal device, and
lightning arrestor, are all securely connected to the ground in the building installation or a
common ground point to which an earth/ground stake is attached.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

02/2022 21
Part A - Preface Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

R&TTE directive

Applies to models TBURQRxxx-E00x1xxx

WARNING
HAZARD TO HEALTH DUE TO ELECTRIC SHOCK
· To comply with the R&TTE (Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment) directive
1999/5/EC, all radio modem installations must include an external in-line lightning arrestor or
equivalent device that complies with the following specifications:
o DC Blocking Capability - 1.5 kV impulse (Rise Time 10 mS, Fall Time 700 mS) (Repetition
10 Times) or 1.0 kV rms 50 Hz sine wave for 1 minute.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.

Radio equipment directive

Applies to models TBURQxxxx-E00xxxxx

WARNING
HAZARD TO HEALTH DUE TO ELECTRIC SHOCK
· To comply with the RED (Radio Equipment Directive) 2014/53/EU, all radio modem
installations must include an external in-line lightning arrestor or equivalent device that
complies with the following specifications:
o DC Blocking Capability - 1.5 kV impulse (Rise Time 10 mS, Fall Time 700 mS) (Repetition
10 Times) or 1.0 kV rms 50 Hz sine wave for 1 minute
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.

Note the following for ETSI RED compliance:

· QR150 and QR450 - Half Duplex Radio, TBURQRxxx-E00x2xxx: Ensure the Channel
Bandwidth is configured to 12.5 kHz ETSI RED or 25 kHz ETSI RED.

· QR450 - Half Duplex Radio, TBURQRxxx-E00x1xxx: Ensure the Channel Bandwidth is

configured to 25 kHz ETSI RED.

· Hot Standby Controller, TBURQH1xx-E00xxxxA: Connect 4 dB N-type attenuators to the Rx

[Base A] and Rx [Base B] ports.

· Hot Standby Controller, TBURQH4xx-E00xxxxA: Connect 2 dB N-type attenuators to the Rx

[Base A] and Rx [Base B] ports.

22 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part A - Preface

EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

Hereby, Schneider Electric, declares that the radio equipment type QR150, QR450, QB150,
QB450, QP150, QP450 and QHHSC is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of
the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
www.se.com/en/download

WEEE Regulation (Europe)

This symbol on the product or its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of
with other waste.

Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a

designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The
separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help
conserve natural resources and help ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human
health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste
equipment for recycling, contact the dealer from whom you originally purchased the product.

Dieses Symbol auf dem Produkt oder seinem Verpacken zeigt an, daß dieses Produkt nicht mit
anderer Vergeudung entledigt werden darf. Stattdessen ist es Ihre Verantwortlichkeit, sich Ihre
überschüssige Ausrüstung zu entledigen, indem es rüber sie zu einem gekennzeichneten
Ansammlungspunkt für die Abfallverwertung elektrische und elektronische Ausrüstung übergibt.
Die unterschiedliche Ansammlung und die Wiederverwertung Ihrer überschüssigen Ausrüstung
zu der Zeit der Beseitigung helfen, Naturresourcen zu konservieren und sicherzugehen, daß es
in gewissem Sinne aufbereitet wird, daß menschliche Gesundheit und das Klima schützt. Zu
mehr Information ungefähr, wo Sie weg von Ihrer überschüssigen Ausrüstung für die
Wiederverwertung fallen können, treten Sie bitte mit dem Händler in Verbindung, von dem Sie
ursprünglich das Produkt kauften.

1.8 IEEE1613 and IEC61850-3 Compliance

QR Radios

For IEEE1613-2009 Class 2 and IEC61850-3 compliance, braid shielded cables are required to
be used on the serial port and Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) cables are required to be used on
the Ethernet ports.

QB/QP Radios

For IEC61850-3 compliance, braid shielded cables are recommended to be used on the serial
port and Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) cables are recommended to be used on the Ethernet
ports."

02/2022 23
Part B - Introduction Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

2 Part B - Introduction
· Introduction to the Trio Q Family 24

· Product Features 24

· Trio Q Data Radio Offer 26

2.1 Introduction to the Trio Q Family

Trio Q Data Radios are advanced, high-speed, licensed digital data radios, providing both
Ethernet and serial communications for complex and demanding applications in Point-to-Point
and Point-to-Multipoint (Multiple Address Radio) Telemetry and remote SCADA systems.

Features such as advanced channel access management and web-based user configuration,
together with powerful remote diagnostics and network management, make Trio Q Data Radios
the complete licensed radio solution that works with leading host systems and remote
equipment.

Combining both Ethernet and serial connectivity, Trio Q Data Radios are suitable for use with
the latest SCADA technology and protocols for providing a smooth transition from serial-based
infrastructure to IP/Ethernet.

Ideal for deployment at remote sites, the Trio QR Half-Duplex radio supports Half-Duplex or
Simplex operation. Completing the Trio Q radio system, there are a variety of dedicated base
stations available.

Trio QH radio kit: Ideal for deployment at base and repeater sites in systems using single or
two-frequency operation where 1+1 hot-swap capability is required

Trio QB radio: Ideal where Full-Duplex operation is required

Trio QP radio: Ideal where Simplex or Half-Duplex 1+1 reliability is required

All base station formats (QH, QB, and QP) operate in very-high duty cycle applications,
delivering maximum-rated transmitter power in ambient temperatures up to +70 °C (158 °F).

A typical Trio Q Data Radio Point-to-Multipoint (PTMP) system permits a central manager /
control application, e.g., SCADA Host system (i.e. EcoStruxure Geo SCADA Expert, Advanced
Distribution Management System) to communicate with process application controllers such as
the RTUs at various locations, using single or two-frequency licensed radio channels. The
remote sites communicate either directly with base stations, or via repeater stations when direct
communication with the base stations is not possible.

Schneider Electric Trio Q Series Data Radios offer the fastest reliable data throughput for wide-
area mission-critical SCADA and telemetry applications.

2.2 Product Features

Radio

· VHF and UHF Frequency Bands: 135...175 MHz/400...450 MHz/450...518 MHz

· 12.5 kHz and 25 kHz channel operation in one radio model
· User configurable transmitter output power up to 10 Watts

24 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part B - Introduction

· Coverage of common international frequency bands

· Designed to meet international FCC and ETSI radio regulatory requirements
· VSWR and over temperature protection
· Operation over full -40...70 °C (-40...158 °F) ambient temperature range
· Automatic frequency offset compensation for years of service/calibration free operation

Modem

· Up to 160 kbps in 25 kHz channels using QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM, and 256-QAM
quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM)
o Note: 256-QAM is not compatible with firmware versions prior to 2.6.x, you need to set the
maximum dynamic speed to 64-QAM or less
o Note: 256-QAM is available only in dynamic speed mode for ETSI models
· Dynamic Forward Error Correction (FEC) with truncated interleaved BCH encoding
· Dynamic Speed Selection
· Base, remote, repeater, or store-and-forward operating modes
· ChannelShare Token Grant channel management system
· Backward compatible with the Trio E-Series radios

Ethernet

· Transport of Ethernet/IP based protocols (including UDP, TCP, DHCP, ARP, ICMP, STP,
IGMP, SNTP, and TFPT)
· Layer-2 Ethernet Bridge Mode and Layer-3 IP Routing mode
· Network Address Translation for static NAT port and 1:1 address forwarding
· VLAN 802.1Q capable
· Quality of Service (QoS) with eight priority lanes, Min-Max bandwidth limiters and flexible user
defined matches
· Ethernet/IP/TCP/UDP/ESP Header (ROHC RFC-3095) and Advanced Payload Compression
· Legacy RS-232 serial support via embedded terminal servers (UDP/TCP)
· Embedded TCP to UDP gateway with Unicast/Multicast support
· SNMP v1, v2c, and v3, RFC 1213-compliant and radio diagnostics parameters (with
notifications)
· Embedded NTP Time Client/Server

Security

· Encryption: 256-bit AES / AES-GCM with automatic rotating keys as per NIST SP 800-38D
· HTML Interface: Password-protected HTTP and HTTPS configuration and management
interface

02/2022 25
Part B - Introduction Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

· Console Interface: Password-protected Telnet, SSHv2, and Serial console interface

· User Access Control: Multi-user password-protected access control (read only, read/write,
read/write with security, and unrestricted)
· Centralized user access control: RADIUS (RFC2865) based user authentication for remote or
local logins with local user access control fall-back
· Radio Access Control: Certificate based radio authentication using DTLS and X509
· Packet Filtering Firewall: Advanced and basic mode packet filtering firewall with user
configurable Layer 2 and Layer 3 rules for radio and Ethernet ports

Diagnostics and Configuration

· Compatible with the Trio Data Radio TVIEW+ Diagnostics Network Management Software
· Embedded error rate testing facilities
· Diagnostics parameters available for Tx Power, RSSI, DC Supply Volts, Frequency Offset,
Temperature, and VSWR
· Embedded event and performance logs including time-stamped data statistics and channel
occupancy
· Manual Configuration via embedded HTTP, HTTPS web interface and/or Telnet/SSHv2/Serial
console with optional TFTP/SCH
· Automatic Zero-Touch configuration-load via USB
· Automatic configuration-save via TFTP/SCP server
· Local and over-the-air global firmware upgrades

Compliance

· Europe (ETSI): EN 300 113 V2.2.1, EN 302 561, EN 301 489, EN 62368-1, EN 50385,
EN 50383, and EN 300 019-2-3
· United States (FCC): 47CFR PART 2, PART 15 A & B, PART 90, IEC 62368-1
· Canada (ISED): RSS-Gen, RSS-102, RSS-119, IEC 62368-1
· Australia: AS/NZS 4295-2004, AS/NZ 62368.1
· Hazardous: CSA Class I, Division II, Groups (A, B, C, D) for Hazardous Locations ANSI/UL
equivalent (QR Only)
· Substation: Substation hardened to IEEE 1633 Class 2 (QR Only) and IEC 61850-3

2.3 Trio Q Data Radio Offer

· QR - Half-Duplex/Simplex radio 27

· QB - Base radio 27

· QP - Hot-Standby Half-Duplex radio 28

· QH - Hot-Standby Hot-Swap radio kit 29

26 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part B - Introduction

QR - Half-Duplex/Simplex radio

The QR Half-Duplex/Simplex Radio is ideal for remote applications as it has a smaller form
factor, allowing the product to be installed in space-restricted cabinets/enclosures. The QR can
also be deployed as an Entry Point (Base/Manager Station) or repeater. Available in UHF
(QR450) and VHF (QR150) models.

· Half-Duplex/Simplex
· 10...30 Vdc supply voltage
· Rugged die-cast housing
· 115 x 56 x 164 mm (4.52 x 2.20 x 6.45 in.)
· DIN Rail Mounting Kit Option
· Digital Inputs and Outputs

QB - Base radio

The QB base radio is ideal for deployment at base and repeater sites. The QB is available in
Full-Duplex and Half-Duplex/Simplex models. In high duty cycle applications, the QB delivers
maximum rated transmitter power in ambient temperatures up to 70 °C (158 °F). Where hot-
standby redundancy is required, the QP and the QH (Hot Swap) radios are also available.
Available in UHF (QB450) and VHF (QB150) models.

02/2022 27
Part B - Introduction Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

· Full-Duplex or Half-Duplex/Simplex models

· 19" 1RU rack mount
· 11… 30 Vdc power supply operation
· Duplicated DC power supply inputs for use with redundant external DC power supplies

QP - Hot-Standby Half-Duplex radio

The QP Half-Duplex/Simplex base radio is ideal for deployment at base and repeater sites. In
high duty cycle applications, the QP delivers maximum rated transmitter power in ambient
temperatures up to 70 °C (158 °F) with Hot Standby redundancy. Available in UHF (QP450) and
VHF (QP150) models.

· Half-Duplex/Simplex operation
· Duplicated redundant hot standby transceiver configuration
· Automatic change-over facility
· 19" 1RU rack mount
· 11… 30 Vdc power supply operation
· Duplicate DC power supply inputs for use with redundant external DC power supplies

28 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part B - Introduction

QH - Hot-Standby Hot-Swap radio kit

The QH Hot-Standby Hot-Swap radio kit is ideal for deployment at base and repeater sites
requiring 1+1 Hot-Standby Hot-Swap redundancy. In high duty cycle applications, the QH
delivers maximum rated transmitter power in ambient temperatures up to 70 °C (158 °F). The
QH is available in Full-Duplex and Half-Duplex/Simplex models. Available in UHF (QH450) and
VHF (QH150) models.

· Full-Duplex or Half-Duplex/Simplex models

· Fully duplicated hot standby redundant configuration
· Hot swap radio replacement
· Automatic change-over facility
· 19" 3RU rack mount
· 10… 30 Vdc power supply operation
· Duplicate DC power supply inputs for use with redundant external DC power supplies
· 1+1 Hot-Swap capability

02/2022 29
Part C - System Topologies & Operating Modes Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

3 Part C - System Topologies & Operating Modes

· System Topologies 30

· Operating Modes 33

3.1 System Topologies

Trio Q Data Radios can operate in many system topologies including:

Point-to-Point (PTP) 31

o Two radios, one Entry Point, and one Remote

Point-to-Multipoint (PTMP) 31

o Three or more radios, one Entry Point that directly communicates to two or more Remotes
Point-to-Multipoint via Repeater (PTMP/R) 32

o Three or more radios, one Entry Point that communicates via a repeater to two or more
Remotes
Point-to-Multipoint via Multiple Repeater (PTMP/MR) 32

o Four or more radios, one Entry Point that communicates via multiple cascaded repeaters to
one or more Remotes. Only available in TGCM channel management.
Multipoint-to-Multipoint (MPTMP) 33

o One Entry Point and one or more Remotes, and no repeaters, where Remotes can
communicate directly to the Entry Point or to each other. Only available in Simplex with
Carrier Detect channel management.

System topology functions

Entry Point
o The radio where user data enters the systems. Typically connected (directly or indirectly)
to the Manager RTU or SCADA Host.
Repeater
o A radio which repeats data from an Entry point to Remote, or Remote to Remote, or
Repeater to Repeater
Remote
o A radio which is the endpoint or perimeter of the system topology

30 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part C - System Topologies & Operating Modes

3.1.1 Point-to-Point (PTP)

A Point to Point (PTP) network has one Entry Point and one Remote radio. PTP networks can
be deployed with full-duplex or half-duplex radios. Full-duplex radios enable simultaneous
transmission and reception of data. Half-duplex radios should be configured to operate in TGCM
mode to prevent data collisions.

3.1.2 Point-to-Multipoint (PTMP)

A PTMP network is normally chosen when a central site (i.e. The Host application) needs to
communicate with multiple Remote sites. PTMP operation requires the Entry Point site to have
adequate RF coverage of all Remote sites. This type of system topology provides the highest
level of performance, since no data needs to be repeated.

02/2022 31
Part C - System Topologies & Operating Modes Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

3.1.3 Point-to-Multipoint via Repeater (PTMP/R)

A PTMP/R network is a variation of the PTMP network. It is normally chosen when the site
where the Host application (i.e. Entry Point) does not have adequate RF coverage of Remote
sites in the network.

This network topology consists of a radio configured as a Repeater, an Entry Point radio and
several remotes. The repeater should be located at a site with adequate RF coverage to each of
the remotes.

3.1.4 Point-to-Multipoint via Multiple Repeater (PTMP/MR)

A PTMP/MR system is a variation of the PTMP/R system. It is normally chosen when the site
where the Host application (i.e. Entry Point), together with the first repeater, have inadequate
RF coverage of remote sites in the network.

In this system topology, there are multiple radios configured as repeaters. The PTMP/MR
system topology is only possible when using IP-routing mode and Token Grant Channel
Management. Each repeater is configured to repeat traffic based on the destination IP
address.

32 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part C - System Topologies & Operating Modes

3.1.5 Multipoint-to-Multipoint (MPTMP)

A PTMP/MR system is a variation of the PTMP/R system. One Entry Point and one or more
remotes, and no repeaters, can communicate directly to the Entry Point or to each other. Only
available in Simplex with Carrier Detect channel management.

3.2 Operating Modes

See the following topics:

· Transparent Bridge Mode 33

· IP Routing Mode 34

· Mixed Bridge/Router Mode 35

3.2.1 Transparent Bridge Mode

The Trio Q Data Radios can be configured to operate in a transparent bridge mode. This mode
transports all data as layer 2 Ethernet traffic over the radio network. Each radio will behave like
a layer 2 Ethernet switch, transparently forwarding traffic, based on rules, dynamically
determined from device MAC addresses. Traffic can also be repeated in any one single radio in
the network using a peer to peer repeat function (an enable/disable function, typically enabled
in repeaters). The example below shows a typical PTMP/R topology, with all radios operating in
bridge mode.

02/2022 33
Part C - System Topologies & Operating Modes Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

From an IP network perspective, each radio within the topology above, effectively looks like an
Ethernet switch. See the example below.

3.2.2 IP Routing Mode

The Trio Q Data Radios can also be configured to operate in IP routing mode. IP routing mode
provides the radio the ability to route IP data, based on user configurable network routing rules
(OSI model layer 3), between devices on different subnets.

The benefits of IP routing mode include:

· Faster poll times

· Higher throughput
· Improved management of IP addresses

Each radio behaves as a network gateway for its corresponding subnet. This allows a network
designer to segment a wide area IP network (WAN) into smaller subnets, which minimizes the
amount of over the air radio traffic. Since each radio behaves as a router, traffic will be routed
(and repeated) based on user defined IP routing rules.

The example below shows how router mode segments an IP radio network into smaller subnets.
Each radio has its own subnet, represented in the example by dashed colored boxes.

34 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part C - System Topologies & Operating Modes

3.2.3 Mixed Bridge/Router Mode

Trio Q Data radios in a network can also be configured as a mix of bridge and router mode to
provide ease of use along with the features provided by IP routing mode.

All radios can be reached via its primary IP (bridge mode) or WAN IP (router mode) without
static routes, while network segmentation remains for devices behind a radio in router mode.

The example below shows how a bridged entry point connected to a router allows a host to
reach all radios on the network without additional routes on the router.

02/2022 35
Part C - System Topologies & Operating Modes Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

36 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part D - Feature Overview

4 Part D - Feature Overview

· Hardware 37

· Efficiency and Bandwidth 38

· Connectivity 44

· Ease of Use 47

· Security 56

· Low Power Mode 60

4.1 Hardware

Radio Architecture

The Trio Q radio is built on a software defined superheterodyne architecture that provides a
high degree of radio receiver robustness, meeting the stringent needs of ETSI 300 113 v2.2.1
RED while offering industry leading RF sensitivity to provide maximum serviceable coverage
area. The maximum RF level for decoding of data is -10 dBm into the receiver with a blocking
level of 91 dB.

For more details, see Appendix - Specifications 398 .

QR - Half-Duplex radio

02/2022 37
Part D - Feature Overview Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

QB - Base radio

4.2 Efficiency and Bandwidth

See the following topics:

· Over the Air RF Data Rates and Modulation Types 38

· Forward Error Correction (FEC) 39

· Dynamic Speed Selection (DSS) 39

· Channel Management 40

· Automatic Repeat reQuests (ARQs) 42

· Robust Header (RoHC) and Payload Compression 43

· Quality of Service (QoS) 43

· E-Series Emulation Mode 44

4.2.1 Over the Air RF Data Rates and Modulation Types

Trio Q Data Radios support:

· QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM, and 256-QAM quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM) with data
transmission rates up to 80 kbps in 12.5 kHz ETSI channels and up to 160 kbps in 25 kHz
ETSI channels with up to 5 Watts (37 dBm) of transmit power (average) at QPSK. Forward
Error Correction (FEC) is available in conjunction with QAM, providing greater control
between RF data rate and sensitivity. It is recommended to use QAM modulation for all new
RF system designs as more features and functionality are supported in QAM mode.
· 2-level, 4-level, 8-level, and 16-level continuous phase modulation (CPM) with data
transmission rates up to 32 kbps as standard in 12.5 kHz ETSI channels and up to 56 kbps in

38 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part D - Feature Overview

25 kHz ETSI channels with up to 10 Watts (40 dBm) transmit power (average) for all RF
speeds.
· Trio E and Trio M backward compatible modulation types

Trio Q Data Radios support software selectable channel bandwidth (12.5 kHz or 25 kHz) and
configurable Dynamic Speed Selection (DSS) or fixed RF data rate modes. The actual RF data
and sensitivity varies across models, channel bandwidth, and regulatory regions.

For more details, see Appendix - Specifications 398 .

4.2.2 Forward Error Correction (FEC)

Forward error correction (FEC) improves the reliability of successfully decoding received data
packets. This improves performance of the radio channel by minimizing lost polls and the need
for retries at the SCADA protocol level.

FEC is implemented using truncated interleaved BCH encoding with 0.52/0.72/0.83 coding rates
and is only available in QAM mode of operation. FEC has been optimized for correction of data
errors caused by electrical noise (RF Interference) as found in electrical substations and next
to electrical distribution switchgear.

When enabled, FEC can improve the reliability of reception of data when the receiving radio is
subject to local interference. Gains of up to 22 dB are possible. FEC adds overhead to the
transmitted data stream, and therefore the gross throughput is reduced from nominal. The
actual available gross throughput is dependent on the Mode of operation (QPSK,16-QAM,64-
QAM, 256-QAM) and the level of FEC gain. FEC can be enabled or disabled on a per radio
basis. Radios with FEC enabled can still communicate with radios that have FEC disabled.

For more details, see Appendix - Specifications 398 .

4.2.3 Dynamic Speed Selection (DSS)

Trio Q Data Radios support Dynamic Speed Selection (DSS), which is a feature that selects the
fastest possible over the air RF data rate while maintaining reliable decoding of received data
packets. This improves performance of the radio channel by minimizing lost polls and the need
for retries at the SCADA protocol level. By reducing the RF data rate, the sensitivity of the radio
is increased by up to 18 dB to overcome challenging propagation environments, noise or
interference.

Dynamic Speed Selection has the following characteristics:

· It is applied between any two radios for unicast transmitted data packets
· It is applied to transmissions in both entry point to remote, and remote to entry point
transmissions
o Note: A reduction in RF data rate for the entry point to remote transmission does not result
in a reduction of RF data rate in the remote to base transmission (or vice versa).
· It can be configured to use a variety of metrics for selection of RF data rate (ARQ retries,
SNR (signal to noise ratio), or RSSI)
· It can be bound by user configurable minimum and maximum RF data rates
· It will operate with forward error correction (FEC), when enabled
o Note: Broadcast and Multicast packets are transmitted at the Minimum configured RF data
rate

02/2022 39
Part D - Feature Overview Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Consequently, each radio in the system can use the fasted possible RF data rate. This
eliminates the need to reduce the RF data rate for the entire system due to a small number of
remote sites which have a poor received signal level. In addition, if between any two radios the
quality of the radio channel or the radio path deteriorates, the transmitting radio detects an
increase in decoding errors of the data packets in the receiving radio and adapt the RF data
rate automatically to ensure reliable data delivery. When conditions improve, the transmitting
radio will again adapt and increase the RF data rate. Trio Q Data Radios implement independent
Dynamic Speed Selection choices for each remote radio and in both directions of
transmission.

The above diagram demonstrates how DSS reacts to reduced signal strength and degraded
reliability. In the event of a reduced signal strength, DSS will decrease the RF data rate until
decoding of received data packets at the remote radio is reliable. Overall reliability is always
bound by the design target of 20 dB fade margin at the slowest RF data rate. If reliability of
decoding received data packets improves, DSS will increase the RF data rate.

For more details, see Dynamic Speed Selection (DSS) 162 in Part H - Feature Detail.

4.2.4 Channel Management

In many SCADA and Telemetry applications, there exists the potential for over-the-air data
collisions between multiple remote radios. This can occur when an exception reporting type of
protocol is used (such as DNP3 or IEC 60870-5) or when multiple applications are being
transported over the radio network at the same time (such as Modbus polling, DNP3 polling, and
report by exception, SNMP, etc).

In both scenarios, the possibility exists for two or more remote radios attempting to access the
channel (i.e. sending data to the SCADA host) at the same time. If this occurs, both remote
radios are unaware of the other trying to access the radio channel and both will attempt to
transmit their data at the same time. As such, the entry point receives a corrupted message due
to the “collision”between two remote radios and a re-try will be required. Channel management
mitigates these collisions by coordinating access on the radio channel. The Trio Q Data Radios
offer several channel management modes applicable to different situations.

See the following topics:

· Token Grant Channel Management (TGCM) 41

40 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part D - Feature Overview

· Carrier Detect 42

· Digital 42

4.2.4.1 Token Grant Channel Management (TGCM)

Token Grant Channel Management (TGCM) is available in half-duplex/simplex radio types only.
With TGCM, one radio is configured as the TGCM manager and is responsible for granting
permission for each remote to transmit, with only one remote radio granted permission to
transmit at any one time.

TGCM prevents over-the-air data collisions between remote radios using the concept of a token.
When a remote radio has data to transmit, the remote radio requests a token from the TGCM
manager. Once the token is granted by the TGCM manager, the remote has permission to
transmit. Within the TGCM channel management protocol, a specific time slot is allocated for
remotes to request tokens. Outside of this time slot, the TGCM manager may transmit data to
remotes, or a remote with a token may transmit data to the manager. Remotes and Repeaters
obtain timing and other information from a regular transmitted TGCM beacon from the Manager
radio.

Remote radios may be configured to gain permission in either Random Access or Subscribed
Access modes.

For more details, see Channel Management 168 in Part H - Feature Detail.

Random Access

In Random Access mode, the Remote first sends a Token Request to the TGCM manager when
the Remote has user data to transmit. The Token Request is a small data packet transmission
that requests permission from the TGCM Manager to transmit the full user data packet. Upon the
TGCM Manager receiving a Token Request, the TGCM Manager replies with a Token Grant (i.e.
the token). The Token defines who (which Remote), when and how long that Remote radio can
transmit, and this prevents collisions between Remote radios wanting to transmit user data.
TGCM allocates specific time slots for Token Requests, and this prevents collisions between
Token Requests and user data transmissions.

Dynamic Polling is a feature of TGCM in Random Access mode. Dynamic polling uses machine
learning algorithms in the TGCM manager to predict when a remote radio has a high probability
of having user data to transmit. The TGCM elevates (Prioritizes) these remote radios in a
Dynamic Polling list. This gives them priority over other remotes not in the Dynamic Polling list,
which results in lower latency and faster transactional traffic times (Poll-Response). The
algorithm also detects when Remote radios in the Dynamic Polling list no longer have user data
to transmit, after which the radio is removed from the Dynamic Polling list. The algorithm
balances the elevation of Remote radio priority based on fair rules and makes decisions based
on real time traffic demands.

Subscribed Access

With Subscribed Access mode, the Manager radio regularly grants exclusive channel access to
each Subscribed Remote in turn, regardless of current demand. This mode is recommended in
cases where outstations regularly generate data packets concurrently and without solicitation. In
some cases, the time to deliver many unsolicited messages is lower in Subscribed Access
mode compared to Random Access mode.

02/2022 41
Part D - Feature Overview Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

4.2.4.2 Carrier Detect

Remote radios in a Carrier Detect channel management system listen for a transmission
(carrier) in progress before beginning a new transmission. If the channel is busy, a random
backoff time period is waited before attempting to access the channel again.

This mode is suitable for both single frequency and two frequency systems.

For two-frequency systems, to facilitate efficient data communication, it is recommended that

the Entry Point radio be a full duplex radio (QB/QH) and configured as a channel access
manager. When the channel access manager receives a transmission from a remote, it
activates its own transmitter, indicating to all other remotes that the channel is busy, thereby
mitigating collisions between remote radios, which cannot detect each other’ s transmission.

4.2.4.3 Digital

Remote radios in a Digital channel management system, monitor a channel busy flag in the
digital data stream transmitted from the channel access manager to determine if the channel
access manager is currently busy receiving a transmission from another remote. When the
channel access manager receives a transmission from a remote, it activates its own transmitter
and sets the channel busy flag, indicating to all other remote the channel is busy. However,
unlike carrier detect mode, if the channel access manager needs to transmit data to remotes, it
can do so, facilitating full duplex communication.

In this mode of operation, remote radios can distinguish between the channel access manager
transmitting data and the channel access manager indicating the channel is busy. Even if the
channel access manager is transmitting data, a remote radio can transmit data back to the
channel access manager. In this way the radio system can fully use the full duplex capabilities
of the Entry Point or the Repeater (channel access manager). The channel busy flag consumes
a small amount of bandwidth in the channel access manager to remote direction. However, as
this direction is one to many, it has negligible impact on radio network capacity.

Digital channel management can be used in two frequency, PTMP, and PTMP/R system
topologies where the Entry Point or Repeater is full duplex. It is not available in simplex systems,
or where the Entry Point/Repeater is half duplex or in PTMP via multiple Repeaters system
topologies.

4.2.5 Automatic Repeat reQuests (ARQs)

When enabled, Automatic Repeat reQuests (ARQs) confirm successful reception of data
transmitted over the air. Each time a radio (originator) transmits data, the receiving radio replies
with an acknowledgment back to the originator, confirming successful reception of the data. If
an acknowledgment is not received by the originator within an acceptable time frame, the
originator declares the data lost and retransmits the data. The number of retransmit attempts is
user configurable (i.e. when ARQ = 2, there are a maximum of two retransmit attempts per
message).

When Ethernet data is not successfully transmitted over a radio network (i.e. due to a data
collision), Ethernet devices can interpret this as network congestion, resulting in unnecessary
slowdown of SCADA polling. ARQs increase the probability of successful transportation of data
over the radio link. As only one device can generate an acknowledgment for received data,
ARQs are not applicable to broadcast or multicast traffic.

The example below shows the ARQ behavior between a pair of radios during a typical data
transaction.

42 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part D - Feature Overview

For more details, see Automatic Repeat reQuests (ARQs) 176 in Part H - Feature Detail.

4.2.6 Robust Header (RoHC) and Payload Compression

Trio Q Data Radios support Ethernet/IP/TCP/UDP/ESP Header (ROHC RFC-3095) and

Advanced Payload Compression. RoHC is implemented in the radio by applying RFC3095 rules
to data being transmitted over the air. In effect, this results in a compression of Ethernet, IP,
ESP, UDP, and TCP headers.

Through compression of the header information, the data size (bytes) of each over-the-air
packet is reduced, reducing the channel occupancy and increasing the effective data
throughput, which also helps to decrease over-the-air data collisions. In addition to RoHC
compression, the IP payload is also compressed using z-Standard compression. Average
compression of DNP 3.0 SCADA traffic can achieve approximately 40% compression and the
radio provides a diagnostics parameter that measures the average compression achieved for
data packets transmitted.

For more details, see Robust Header Compression (RoHC) 178 in Part H - Feature Detail.

4.2.7 Quality of Service (QoS)

Quality of Service (QoS) is a feature that gives transmit-priority to specific types of traffic
transmitted by the radio. By classifying traffic into different types (SCADA, Diagnostics, etc),
different levels of transmit priority can be applied. Traffic of a specific class is given a defined
priority level, and a minimum and maximum average bandwidth allocation. This is known as
applying a QoS policy.

Classification of traffic applies to all traffic that is transmitted by the radio. This includes user
traffic from external devices (Ethernet 1 and 2), serial traffic (data) from the internal serial
device servers, and other traffic from the internal services of the radio (eDiags, SNMP, Telnet,
web, etc).

Using QoS, important traffic classes can be prioritized for transmission over less important
classes. When traffic is classified into a class and then tagged with a priority level, the radio will

02/2022 43
Part D - Feature Overview Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

order (for subsequent transmission) the traffic according to the priority level. If there is no other
traffic in the queue waiting for transmission, prioritization has no effect.

Traffic shaping follows the Hierarchical Token Bucket methodology. Effectively, average
bandwidth use is measured over time, and shaping of traffic will be applied if the maximum
bandwidth is exceeded. Shaping occurs by inserting a time gap (wait) period between traffic of
the class being shaped, during which time traffic of other classes may be sent.

For traffic of a specific class, a minimum allocated bandwidth can be specified by configuring
the minimum bandwidth parameter. If more bandwidth is required than specified by Minimum
Bandwidth, and other classes are not using their minimum allocated bandwidth, traffic in the
class can use additional bandwidth until the Maximum Bandwidth is reached. After this point,
traffic shaping will be applied.

For more details on QoS, see Quality of Service 180 in Part G - Quick Start Guide.

4.2.8 E-Series Emulation Mode

The Trio Q Data Radios can be configured to operate in E-Series emulation mode. This can
allow the replacement of existing E-Series radio networks to be upgraded to Trio Q Data Radio
systems at a pace the user defines.

E-Series Emulation Mode can provide:

· A cost-effective upgrade to a Trio Q Data Radio network
· Minimize SCADA connectivity downtime during an upgrade
· A greater subset of features once the radio network is fully upgraded, as E-Series emulation
mode is a user configurable feature.
The diagram below shows how an existing E-Series radio system can be progressively
upgraded to a Trio Q Data Radio system by replacing E-Series radios ‘
One by One’with Trio Q
Data Radios operating in E-Series emulation mode.

Once all E-Series have been replaced, the Trio Q Data Radios may be re-configured to operate
in Q mode, to provide the advanced features and functionality of the Trio Q Data Radios.

4.3 Connectivity

· User Data Interfaces 45

· Serial Device Server 45

44 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part D - Feature Overview

· Modbus Protocol Gateway 46

· Network Address Translation (NAT) 46

· TCP/UDP Gateway 46

4.3.1 User Data Interfaces

Trio Q Data Radios support serial and Ethernet user data interfaces.

Serial RS-232/485 interfaces

Trio Q Data Radios support one DB9 socket connector, which provides 2 x RS-232 3-wire serial
ports or 1 x RS-485 serial port. Serial interface speeds of 300 to 115,200 bps are supported
with configurable hardware flow control. A DCD output pin can be configured to provide an
active signal on RF carrier detected or user-data output to satisfy legacy serial devices. The
serial data ports are supported by a serial device server interface that encapsulates the serial
data into UDP or TCP datagrams for transmission by the radio.

Serial ports can be enabled or disabled in the radio device configuration. One serial port can be
configured as a local console interface providing a backup method of radio configuration
access should the IP address be unknown. The serial programming interface console is
protected by username/password as defined in the radio configuration and compatible with
common terminal programs like HyperTerminal.

Ethernet interfaces

Trio Q Data Radios support dual Ethernet ports. The Ethernet ports are IEEE 802.3 auto
sensing 10/100 Mbps MDIX. For security purposes, Ethernet ports can be enabled or disabled
in the radio device configuration.

4.3.2 Serial Device Server

Trio Q Data Radios support serial device servers for each serial port enabled. The serial device
server encapsulates serial data within IP headers to allow transportation of the serial data over a
LAN/WAN.

The Device Server mode provides an easily configurable mechanism for transporting serial
traffic.

Features of the embedded serial device server include:

· Support for two independent fully configurable serial device servers
· Support for three transport protocols: TCP, UDP, and PPP
· Support for three modes of TCP operation: Client mode, Server mode, and Client/Server
mode
· User-configurable port numbers
· Support for up to 4 simultaneous TCP connections (sockets) when operating in server mode

For more details, see Serial Device Server 189 in Part H - Feature Detail.

02/2022 45
Part D - Feature Overview Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

4.3.3 Modbus Protocol Gateway

Trio Q Data Radios support a Modbus Gateway feature that can be enabled to function like an
external Modbus gateway. The Modbus gateway is a protocol converter between Modbus/TCP
and Modbus RTU protocols. The gateway is an addition to the Device Server feature on the
legacy serial port. When operating in Modbus Gateway mode, the remote radio provides the
same functionality as if there were an external Modbus gateway at each remote site of the
system.

Features of the embedded Modbus gateway include:

· Support for two independent fully configurable Modbus gateways

· Support for two transport protocols: TCP and UDP
· Support for two modes of TCP operation: Client mode and Server mode
· User-configurable port numbers
· Support for up to 16 simultaneous TCP connections (sockets) when operating in server mode

For more details, see Modbus Gateway 192 in Part H - Feature Detail.

4.3.4 Network Address Translation (NAT)

Trio Q Data Radios support Network Address Translation (NAT), which provides the ability to
perform local port and address forwarding. Port forwarding can be beneficial in a network
where:
· An IP network has limited availability of IP addresses (or wants to limit the number of IP
addresses in use).
· Multiple devices which co-exist on an IP network while sharing the same IP address (allowing
common RTU configurations as all remote LANs use same IP addresses)
· It is desirable to provide a single external IP address for each site on a wide area network.

Address forwarding can be beneficial additionally in a network where:

· A device such as an RTU requiring multiple ports to be forwarded (using less rules than port
forwarding)
· It is desirable to expose specific devices behind the LAN to the network
· A network subnet on the LAN is to be accessed through the wide area network

NAT eliminates the requirement for unique addressing within the LAN subnets by translating the
source address of messages sent from a device residing on the LAN with:

· The address allocated to the radio IP Routing’

s WAN network, or
· The address allocated using 1:1 address forwarding

For more details, see Network Address Translation (NAT) 194 in Part H - Feature Detail.

4.3.5 TCP/UDP Gateway

The TCP/UDP Gateway provides a mechanism to translate data between TCP and UDP, or UDP
unicast and multicast protocols. There are several common requirements for this feature:

46 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part D - Feature Overview

· Where a legacy host application cannot support individual TCP connections (or UDP IPs) for
each remote device in the network
· Where TCP protocol is a mandatory requirement over a backbone communication network to
the radio entry point
· Where a host application cannot support the lower bandwidth UDP protocol

In these scenarios, the TCP/UDP gateway can provide a solution where the TCP protocol
provides transport to the Entry Point radio, which then translates the user data payload of the
TCP message into a UDP unicast or multicast stream.

For more details, see TCP/UDP Gateway 201 in Part H - Feature Detail.

4.4 Ease of Use

· Web User Interface (WUI) 47

· Text Terminal 48

· Configuration 49

· Diagnostics 50

· Management Tools 55

4.4.1 Web User Interface (WUI)

Trio Q Data Radios provide a graphical Web User Interface (WUI) which can be accessed
locally or over the RF interface by HTTP/HTTPS standard web browsers like IE11, Edge, and
Chrome to perform configuration changes, monitor diagnostics, perform maintenance, and
access test tools. The WUI eliminates the requirement for stand-alone configuration software to
be installed on a PC. When in a factory default configuration state, the WUI can be accessed
at 192.168.2.15. An example of the WUI is shown in the image below.

For more details, see Web User Interface (WUI) 203 in Part H - Feature Detail.

02/2022 47
Part D - Feature Overview Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

4.4.2 Text Terminal

Trio Q Data Radios provide a text terminal which can be accessed locally or over the RF
interface by Telnet or SSH with tools like PuTTY to perform configuration changes, monitor
diagnostics, perform maintenance, and access test tools. The text terminal eliminates the
requirement for stand-alone configuration software to be installed on a PC. When in a factory
default configuration state, the text terminal can be accessed at 192.168.2.15. Alternatively, the
text terminal can be accessed via serial port COM1 using 19200bps, N,8,1. This may be useful
if the IP address of the radio is not known. When connected to the text terminal there are two
menu interfaces, a Command-Line Interface (CLI) and a Text User Interface (TUI).

For more details, see Text Terminal 209 in Part H - Feature Detail.

As of firmware 2.6.0, the first menu displayed is the CLI.

An example of the CLI menu is shown in the image below.

To start the TUI, connect to the Command-Line Interface (CLI) and then enter the command
menu.

An example of the TUI menu is shown in the image below.

48 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part D - Feature Overview

4.4.3 Configuration

Trio Q Data Radios provide multiple ways to manage device configuration. These include:
· Viewing, creating, and editing radio configurations using the WUI/TUI/CLI
· Loading or saving configurations using the WUI/TUI
· Automatic configuration activation using the USB port
· Zero Touch configuration using the USB port (see Zero Touch USB Automatic Configuration
Activation 49 )

Configuration changes in a radio can be uploaded (i.e. synchronized) over-the-air to a TFTP or

SCP server to facilitate management (archiving) of radio configurations in a central location.
After a user initiates a configuration activation in the radio, the radio automatically saves the
configuration file to the server.

For more details, see Configuration 218 in Part H - Feature Detail.

4.4.3.1 Zero Touch USB Automatic Configuration Activation

You can activate a new radio configuration in a radio via the USB host port without the need for
a computer or a HTTP connection. The configuration file to be activated needs to be located on
a USB drive that is inserted into the USB host port of the radio. Activation of the radio
configuration occurs only when the radio is in a factory default state and the radio is power-
cycled with the USB drive inserted.

Trio Q Data Radios support secure radio onboarding when radio authentication is enabled
including Zero Touch USB onboarding without requiring a laptop or computer. Using a One
Time Password process, an administrator generates an onboarding configuration using an
embedded facility in the authenticator radio.

02/2022 49
Part D - Feature Overview Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

This onboarding configuration does not contain sensitive information and can be safely
distributed to contractors or other non-trusted parties for onboarding of a remote radio in the
field. Once onboarded, the administrator can use secure interface protocols including HTTPS
and SSHv2 for access to web and terminal based interfaces to complete the radio configuration
as required. The radio allows the user to install self-signed certificates for HTTPS, if required.
When using SSHv2, the user can save or load configuration files using the secure SCP
protocol.

4.4.4 Diagnostics

Trio Q Data Radios support multiple methods to monitor and access diagnostics information.

These include accessing diagnostics information:

· on the radios WUI or TUI interfaces (see Radio Diagnostics 50 )
· with EcoStruxure Geo SCADA Expert (ClearSCADA) (see EcoStruxure Geo SCADA Expert
(ClearSCADA) 53 )

· with TVIEW+ Diagnostics PC Software (see TVIEW+ Diagnostics 54 )

· with SNMP v1/v2/v3 (see SNMP Diagnostics 54 )

· with Syslog (see Syslog 54 )

For more details, see Diagnostics 250 in Part H - Feature Detail.

4.4.4.1 Radio Diagnostics

Trio Q Data Radios provide access to diagnostics information in multiple different ways, each
with a specific purpose. These include:

· Summary: A single page view of the current radio diagnostics

50 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part D - Feature Overview

· Statistics Log: A tabular view of time sampled radio diagnostics. Available in once per 5
minutes, once per hour, once per day, and once per week intervals. Can be saved as a CSV
for archiving and further analysis.

02/2022 51
Part D - Feature Overview Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

· Alarms: A single page view of the current state of alarms in the radio together with current
values and alarm limits.

· Events: A date and time stamped log of events in the radio.

· Network List: A tabular view of radio diagnostics for all radios that have been received in the
last 28 days.

· NTP: Diagnostics specific to the NTP time service.

52 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part D - Feature Overview

· Hot Standby Status: Diagnostics specific to the Hot Standby Base Stations.

For more details, see Diagnostics 250 in Part H - Feature Detail.

4.4.4.2 EcoStruxure Geo SCADA Expert (ClearSCADA)

Trio Q Data Radios are integrated into ClearSCADA 2017 R1, which provides enhanced
integration and improved platforming. A few key highlights of using Trio Q Data Radios with
ClearSCADA 2017 include:

· A scalable database structure and object-based management interface that can support large
radio networks.
· The database uses an object-based architecture, allowing reusable object templates to be
developed. This makes the creation of a database efficient, along with any future expansion.
· The use of an object-based database also makes it easy to display trends, alarms, generate
reports, and filter based on: Type of radio, Network of radios, Base Station/Geography.
· Integration with a proprietary Trio Q Data Radio diagnostics protocol driver. This driver is the
most efficient method of monitoring Trio Q Data Radios over the air (which can be critical in a
narrow-band radio network). This driver offers direct access to radio diagnostics via polling
key operating parameters, including: Temperature, DC volts, Frequency Offset, Received
Signal Strength, Tx power, and VSWR. Mimic templates are also available, representing the
user interface provided by TVIEW+ Diagnostics.
· In addition to diagnostics mimics, radio network mimics can be created to help provide radio
system/network visualization for SCADA operators.

02/2022 53
Part D - Feature Overview Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

· Support of multiple open industry standard interfaces such as OPC, ODBC, and .NET to allow
integration with existing Network management systems.
o For example, the use of a 3rd-party ODBC to SNMP interface can provide easy integration
of data with SolarWinds.

4.4.4.3 TVIEW+ Diagnostics

Trio Q Data Radios are fully integrated into the TVIEW+ Diagnostics software suite, which is
available free of charge for diagnostics and remote management of Trio Q Data Radios.
TVIEW+ Diagnostics supports Windows-based operating systems and provides full diagnostics
monitoring, alarm management, and polling facilities.

With the software running on a Windows PC, any radio unit(s) within the system can be
interrogated from any location in the wireless network. The PC running the TVIEW+
Diagnostics software can interface to any spare serial or Ethernet port in the system. The
user’ s host computer application or remote device connected to their respective ports continues
to run simultaneously with the diagnostics data stream.

TVIEW+ Diagnostics provides the user with the ability to interrogate and display important
operating parameters of each radio modem such as Tx Power, RSSI, DC Voltage,
Temperature, Rx Freq Error, and VSWR in a full graphical presentation (HMI). TVIEW+
Diagnostics is ideal for the radio communication workshop or for field technicians.

4.4.4.4 SNMP Diagnostics

Trio Q Data Radios can provide SNMP diagnostic data via an internal SNMP agent. The radio
supports SNMP v1, v2c, and v3 along with notifications which includes traps and informs. SNMP
facilities include RFC1213, Ethernet diagnostics, and radio diagnostics.

The features and benefits of SNMP diagnostics include:

· SNMP messages/notifications that can be sent to Geo SCADA Expert or SNMP management
software.
· SNMP notifications that provide real-time alarm detection reporting.
· Reducing the frequency of polling the radio for diagnostics.
· Radios that can send diagnostic information via SNMP periodically (diagnostics heartbeat).
· Secure SNMP data through user authentication and encryption of SNMP
messages/notifications using SNMP v3
MIB files made available by Schneider Electric may be imported into most major SNMP
Management consoles. These .MIB files define the contents of the SNMP parameters including
a description for each parameter. The parameters are sorted into six distinct groups: General,
Radio, Security, LAN, Error, and Notification.

4.4.4.5 Syslog

Trio Q Data Radios support event logging to a remote syslog server. The radio uses RFC-5424
format of the Syslog Protocol. All user events can be forwarded to a remote syslog server. The
radio supports the configuration of the facility of events and a maximum severity level which
controls the events that get sent to the syslog server. For more details, see Syslog 255 in Part H
- Feature Detail.

54 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part D - Feature Overview

4.4.5 Management Tools

See:
· Network Time 55

· Packet Transmission Testing 55

· Wireshark™ Packet Capture 55

· Firmware Upgrade 56

4.4.5.1 Network Time

The Trio Q Data Radio’

s time can be synchronized to a network time server allowing for
synchronized event and statistical log entries.

The Trio Q Data Radio can also provide time service to allow for other clients, such as other
connected radios, to synchronize their time without connecting to an external time server.

4.4.5.2 Packet Transmission Testing

When commissioning a radio link, it is useful to generate Ethernet traffic to test the link for
functional performance. One method of generating traffic is using the “ping”utility provided on
MS Windows based operating systems. Another method is to perform a packet transmission
test. This can be done using the Packet Transmission Test facility provided in the radio.

To perform the test, you specify the destination radio or Ethernet device IP address, number of
packets to send, time between packets (in milliseconds), packet length (in bytes), timeout, and
time between page refreshing. The test facility then executes the test and provides the results,
which can then form part of the commissioning process.

4.4.5.3 Wireshark™ Packet Capture

Trio Q Data Radios provide the ability to capture radio data traffic (received and transmitted)
into a Wireshark™ compatible format. This can be useful for diagnosing traffic related
problems.

For more details, see Packet Capture Session 383 in Part J - Firmware Updating and
Maintenance.

02/2022 55
Part D - Feature Overview Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

4.4.5.4 Firmware Upgrade

Trio Q Data Radios support local and global over-the-air firmware updating where all radios can
be updated simultaneously. Global firmware updating is performed using the TVIEW+
Management Suite.

Global firmware updating has user configurable data transmission speeds to help prevent RF
channel congestion and can broadcast to all of the remotes within a Trio Q Data Radio system.
Broadcasting to all remotes has the benefit of upgrading the alternative firmware pack in many
radios simultaneously, without the need to send firmware to each remote radio individually. Due
to the speed-limiting of the firmware upgrade process, SCADA data is not blocked or interfered
with while firmware packs are being transferred.

Each radio stores two sets of firmware. The current firmware pack is the firmware the radio is
running from. The alternative firmware pack is a secondary (optional) area where alternative
firmware can be stored. When the alternative firmware pack has been updated, it can then be
activated which moves the alternative firmware into the current firmware pack area and causes
the radio to reboot using the new firmware.

The global firmware upgrade tool also provides the capability of individual activation or group
activation, depending on user preference. Firmware upgrades are typically done using “patch”
files where only the difference between the current and target firmware is sent. This reduces
the over-the-air transmission of firmware data by up to 90%.

For more details, see Firmware Updating 368 in Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance.

4.5 Security
· Radio Access Control 56

· 256-bit AES-GCM Encryption 57

· Zero Touch Secure Configuration 57

· Virtual LAN (VLAN) 58

· Centralized User Access Control 58

· Packet Filtering Firewall 59

· Ethernet Filtering 59

· Achilles Cyber Security Compliant (Level 2) 60

4.5.1 Radio Access Control

Trio Q Data Radios support certificate-based authentication using a secure DTLS channel and
X509 certificates together with FIPS 140-2 NIST SP 800-38D, Authenticated Encryption (AES-
GCM) providing both secrecy and assurance that data packets arrive from authorized sources.

Radio authentication allows an administrator to manage which radios can access the radio
network. Radios which are authorized to access the radio network protect user data with 256-bit
AES-GCM encryption and 64-bit authentication tags. Encryption keys are automatically rotated.

One radio in the network is designated the role of Authenticator. This radio should be the entry
point to the network. The Authenticator is responsible for generating and distributing the
required encryption keys to the radios which the administrator has chosen to allow access to

56 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part D - Feature Overview

the network. The administrator manages a list within the Authenticator to control which radio can
have access to the network.

All other radios in the network are designated the role of Supplicant. These radios are required
to authenticate themselves to the Authenticator to receive the required encryption keys before
they can send or receive user data over the radio network.

The Authenticator and Supplicants mutually authenticate each other using the DTLS protocol
combined with their X509 certificates. Certificates must be shared initially between supplicant
and Authenticator using one of the various onboarding procedures available. Encryption keys
are distributed securely over the DTLS channel, while the encryption keys are used to protect
the user data. Once authorized, certificates are valid indefinitely until revoked by the
Administrator.

The administrator may suspend or disable the Authorization of any radio using a Radio Access
Control List. The Network Encryption Key is seamlessly rotated to ensures network access is
revoked from radios which have been suspended. Disabled radios will automatically return to
factory default configuration if they attempt to authorize with the authenticator.

For more details, see Radio Access Control 316 in Part H - Feature Detail.

4.5.2 256-bit AES-GCM Encryption

Trio Q Data Radios support two methods of 256-bit AES encryption to prevent unauthorized
eavesdropping. When radio authentication is enabled, over the air data is encrypted using 256-
bit AES-GCM where the data is encrypted with a network key that is distributed to radios that
have authorized certificates. The AES-GCM key rotates on a regular basis, and automatically
updates the key in all authorized radios. This method of encryption is compliant to NIST SP
800-38D and has the same overhead as 256-bit encryption

In addition to AES-GCM encryption, when radio authentication is not enabled, 256-bit AES
encryption is available, where all data transmitted over the air is encrypted with a static key.

For more details, see Radio Access Control 316 in Part H - Feature Detail.

4.5.3 Zero Touch Secure Configuration

Trio Q Data Radios support secure radio onboarding when radio authentication is enabled
including Zero Touch USB onboarding without requiring a laptop or computer. Using a One
Time Password process, an administrator generates an onboarding configuration using an
embedded facility in the authenticator radio.

This onboarding configuration does not contain sensitive information and can be safely
distributed to contractors or other non-trusted parties for onboarding of a remote radio in the
field. Once onboarded, the administrator can use secure interface protocols including HTTPS
and SSHv2 for access to web and terminal based interfaces to complete the radio configuration
as required. The radio allows the user to install self-signed certificates for HTTPS, if required.

02/2022 57
Part D - Feature Overview Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

When using SSHv2, the user can save or load configuration files using the secure SCP
protocol.

For more details, see Security 311 in Part H - Feature Detail.

4.5.4 Virtual LAN (VLAN)

VLAN can help provide isolation between separate entities who share a single network.

For example, Department A may require access to radio configuration/Diagnostics, while

Department B may only requires access to SCADA information. By implementing VLAN, a
virtual network segregation can be implemented to help isolate each of the departments from
one another.

The following diagram shows managed switches placing separate hosts onto unique VLANs.
Each remote has been configured to use VLAN 1 on the ETH1 interface, which provides
access to radio services, and VLAN 2 for the ETH2 interface for SCADA control access.

Trio Q Data Radios support 802.1Q VLAN, which can help provide isolation between separate
entities who share a single radio network. VLAN capability can be applied to segregate radio
management from operational SCADA traffic on the Trio Q Data Radio serial and Ethernet ports
using access or trunk modes.

For more details about advanced security information, see Virtual LAN (VLAN) 351 in Part H -
Feature Detail.

4.5.5 Centralized User Access Control

Trio Q Data Radios support RADIUS (RFC2865) based user authentication for remote or local
logins with local user access control fall-back. Users may be defined centrally in a RADIUS
server and/or the Entry Point Radio. The IP address of up to four RADIUS servers may be
defined for redundancy.

Role Based Access Controls are defined in the RADIUS server and the RADIUS servers must
be reachable at time of logon. The Entry Point Radio synchronizes its Local User Access
Controls into each Remote Radio. Local user accounts are stored on radios and are, therefore,
available offline.

Trio Q Data Radios provide the following user configurable sequence for validating role-based
access:

58 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part D - Feature Overview

· RADIUS Only
· RADIUS first, then Local
· Local first, then RADIUS
· Local Only

Trio Q Data Radios support multiple user accounts that can be created and managed with
different configuration privilege / access levels. The different privilege access levels include:
Unrestricted, Read/Write/Security, Read/Write, and Read Only.

For more details, see Centralized User Access Control 312 in Part H - Feature Detail.

4.5.6 Packet Filtering Firewall

Trio Q Data Radios support a packet filtering firewall that provides a mechanism to allow or drop
traffic on the radio or Ethernet ports. As per the QoS feature, traffic is classified by matches
(rules) that can be defined for Layer 2/ Layer 3 and Layer 4 traffic.

In addition to acting as a security firewall, the packet filtering firewall provides an easy to use
mechanism to prevent unnecessary Ethernet traffic from being transmitted over the air and
increasing channel loading.

For more details about advanced security information, see Packet Filtering Firewall 334 in Part H
- Feature Detail.

4.5.7 Ethernet Filtering

Ethernet filtering provides an easy-to-configure filtering mechanism that can help to prevent
unnecessary Ethernet traffic and increased channel loading while operating in layer-2 bridge
mode. There are various different addressing methodologies that can be filtered, which include:

02/2022 59
Part D - Feature Overview Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Unicast:
Unicast is an addressing methodology that delivers messages
to a single network destination identified by a unique address.

Multicast:
Multicast is an addressing methodology that delivers messages
to a group of destination addresses simultaneously in a single
transmission. Spanning tree messages are an example of
multicast messages.

Broadcast:
Broadcast is an addressing methodology that delivers
messages to every device on a network. The broadcast
address of a device is calculated from the subnet mask. If all
devices within a network use a common network mask, the
broadcast address will also be common.

Although typical SCADA applications only require unicast & ARP data, the filtering mechanism
provides the option to allow:
· All Ethernet traffic
· ARP + unicast + multicast (Although Spanning tree messages are multicast messages, they
are also filtered out unless the user is allowing all Ethernet traffic to pass. This also helps to
prevent unnecessary channel loading.)
· ARP + unicast (ARP is primarily used by networks to identify which physical devices own
which IP addresses, Enabled by default).
· Unicast only (Only used when a MAC address table is statically assigned).
· Or allow traffic from a single MAC address only.

4.5.8 Achilles Cyber Security Compliant (Level 2)

The purpose of Achilles® Cyber Security tests is to confirm the robustness of Trio Q Data
Radios against a variety of Ethernet and TCP/IP cyber-attacks. The Achilles tests identified no
vulnerabilities in the Trio Q Data Radio. The device meets the conformance requirements as
defined in “Achilles Level 2 Conformance Requirements for Embedded Devices”.

4.6 Low Power Mode

Low Power Mode allows an external device to put the Trio Q Series Data Radio into a low power
mode by pulling pin 9 of the COM1/2 connector to Gnd.

60 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part E - Radio Planning and Design

5 Part E - Radio Planning and Design

· Radio Path Analysis 61

· BER and Fade Margin 64

· Radio Accessories 65

5.1 Radio Path Analysis

· Clear line of sight 61

· Obstructed radio path 62

· Understanding RF path requirements 62

· Effect of earth curvature on long paths 63

Clear line of sight

Radio path with good signal levels, attenuated only by free space loss.

02/2022 61
Part E - Radio Planning and Design Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Obstructed radio path

This path has an obstruction that will reduce the signal arriving at the field site.

Understanding RF path requirements

A radio modem needs a minimum number of received RF signal to operate reliably and provide
adequate data throughput.

In most cases, spectrum regulatory authorities will also define or limit the amount of signal that
can be transmitted, and the transmitted power will decay with distance and other factors, as it
moves away from the transmitting antenna.

It follows, therefore, that for a given transmission level, there will be a finite distance at which a
receiver can operate reliably with respect to the transmitter.

Apart from signal strength reduction due to distance, other factors that will decay a signal
include obstructions (hills, buildings, foliage), horizon (effectively the bulge between two points
on the earth), and factors such as fog, heavy rain-bursts, dust storms, etc.

To ascertain the available RF coverage from a transmitting station, it will be necessary to

consider these factors. This can be done in a number of ways, including

· Using basic formulas to calculate the theoretically available signal - allowing only for free
space loss due to distance,
· Using sophisticated software to build earth terrain models and apply other correction factors
such as earth curvature and the effects of obstructions, and
· By actual field strength testing.

It is good design practice to consider the results of at least two of these models to design a
radio path.

62 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part E - Radio Planning and Design

Effect of earth curvature on long paths

This path requires greater mast height to offset the earth curvature experienced at such a
distance (73 km).

02/2022 63
Part E - Radio Planning and Design Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

5.2 BER and Fade Margin

The BER specification used by the Trio Q Data Radios shows ‘ 1 x 10E -6 BER’
. This means
one bit of data in a million will error at the BER threshold level. The BER threshold values can
vary depending on the over the air data rate (RF data rate).

Fade Margin is the amount by which a received signal level may be reduced without causing
system performance to fall below a specified threshold value, in this case, the specified
threshold value is defined by the radio’
s Bit Error Rate (BER).

20...30 dB fade margins are typical design targets, however, 15 dB may still be acceptable if
this is all that is possible.

Fade margin is required to maintain the radio link quality if the signal fades, factors that can
influence signal fading include:
· Reflections
· Rain
· Maintenance issues

64 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part E - Radio Planning and Design

When a Trio Q Data Radio system is configured for Dynamic mode, the 20 dB (typical) fade
margin calculation may be performed using the lowest data rate, for optimal receiver sensitivity.
(8 kbps in a 12.5 kHz channel or 14 kbps in a 25 kHz channel) This helps to ensure a strong
and reliable path when conditions are poor.

The amount of fade margin a radio link has can be calculated by performing a theoretical
system gain calculation.

Factors that can influence system gain include: Tx power of Transmitting Radio, Coaxial Cable,
Antenna Gains, Free Space Loss, Rx sensitivity of receiving radio. See the example below.

The example is showing the factors within a radio link that can influence the signal strength of
the transmitting radio at the receiving radio (total system gain). Once the total system gain is
calculated, the result is -88 dB. This means the received signal strength (RSSI) at the receiving
radio should be -88 dBm.

As the BER threshold of the receiving radio is at -113 dBm, with an RSSI value of -88, the fade
margin, before one bit of data in a million becomes lost, is 25 dB. In other words, the RSSI level
at the receiving radio can fluctuate up to -25 dB before data loss may start to occur in over the
air transmissions.

5.3 Radio Accessories

· Antennas 66

· RF Adaptors 68

· RF Coaxial Cable 68

· Feeder Tail Cables 69

· Antenna Feedline Cables 69

· Lightning Arrestors 70

02/2022 65
Part E - Radio Planning and Design Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

5.3.1 Antennas

There are basically two types of antennas – omnidirectional and directional.

Omnidirectional antennas are designed to radiate signal in a 360 degrees segment around the
antenna. Basic short range antennas such as folded dipoles and ground independent whips are
used to radiate the signal in a ‘
ball‘shaped pattern. High gain Omni antennas such as the ‘ co-
linear‘compress the sphere of energy into the horizontal plane, providing a relatively flat ‘
disc‘
shaped pattern which goes further because all of the energy is radiated in the horizontal plane.

Directional antennas are designed to concentrate the signal into a ‘ beam‘of energy for
transmission in a single direction (i.e. For point-to-point or remote to base applications).

Beamwidths vary according to the antenna type, and so can be selected to suit design
requirements. The most common directional antenna is the Yagi, which offers usable beam
widths of 15-40 degrees. Higher ‘
gain‘is available using parabolic ‘
dish‘type antennas such as
gridpacks.

Schneider Electric offers a variety of directional and omni-directional antennas. For more
information, refer to the wireless accessories data sheet.

Antenna gain

By compressing the transmission energy into a disc or beam, the antenna provides more
energy (a stronger signal) in that direction, and thus is said to have a performance ‘ gain‘over a
basic Omni antenna. Gain is usually expressed in dBd, which is referenced to a standard folded
dipole. Gain can also be expressed in dBi, which is referenced to a theoretical ‘ isotropic‘
radiator. Either way, if you intend to send and receive signals from a single direction, there is
advantage in using a directional antenna - due to the increased signal in the wanted direction,
and the relatively decreased signal in the unwanted direction (i.e. ‘Interference rejection‘
properties).

66 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part E - Radio Planning and Design

Alignment of directional antennas

This is generally performed by altering the alignment of the antenna while measuring the
received signal strength. If the signal is weak, it may be necessary to pre-align the antenna
using a compass, GPS, visual or map guidance to ‘ find‘the wanted signal. Yagi antennas have
a number of lower gain ‘ lobes‘centered around the primary lobe. When aligning for optimal
signal strength, the antenna should be scanned through at least 90 degrees, to help ensure that
the center (strongest) lobe is identified.

When aligning a directional antenna, avoid placing hands or body in the vicinity of the radiating
element or the forward beam pattern, as this will affect the performance of the antenna.

Antenna placement

When mounting the antenna, it is necessary to consider the following criteria:

· The mounting structure will need to be solid enough to withstand additional loading on the
antenna mount due to extreme wind, ice or snow (and in some cases, large birds).
· For Omni directional antennas, it is necessary to consider the effect of the mounting structure
(tower mast or building) on the radiation pattern. Close-in structures, particularly steel
structures, can alter the radiation pattern of the antenna. Where possible, Omni antennas
should be mounted on the top of the mast or pole to minimize this effect. If this is not possible,
mount the antenna on a horizontal outrigger to get it at least 1...2 m (3...6 ft) away from the
structure. When mounting on buildings, a small mast or pole, 2...4 m (6...12 ft) can
significantly improve the radiation pattern by providing clearance from the building structure.
· For directional antennas, it is generally only necessary to consider the structure in relation to
the forward radiation pattern of the antenna, unless the structure is metallic, and of a solid
nature. In this case it is also prudent to position the antenna as far away from the structure as
is practical. With directional antennas, it is also necessary to ensure that the antenna cannot
move in such a way that the directional beamwidth will be affected. For long Yagi antennas, it
is often necessary to install a fiberglass strut to stabilize the antenna under windy conditions.

Connecting antennas and RF feeders

The RF antenna system should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’ s notes.
Consider the antenna gain when setting transmit power on the radio. EIRP limits will vary
depending on your geographic location. Check with your local authority to ensure that you are
abiding to the local laws.

WARNING
HAZARD OF RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) BURNS
Ensure that a matching load or antenna is attached to the RF port prior to applying power to
the device.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.

02/2022 67
Part E - Radio Planning and Design Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

5.3.2 RF Adaptors

RF adaptors can be useful where, two connectors are not of the same type, however, need to
be connected (i.e. an antenna port of a radio and an RF lead which interconnects the antenna)

Schneider Electric offers a variety of RF adaptors:

RF Adaptors

Order Code Notes

TBUMRFAPT-TNCF-NM Trio RF Adapter TNC-Socket to N-Plug

TBUMRFAPT-TNCF-SMM Trio RF Adapter TNC-Socket to SMA-Plug

TBUMRFAPT-NF-NF Trio RF Adapter N-Socket to N-Socket - Flange Mount

5.3.3 RF Coaxial Cable

There are many types of RF coaxial cables available, but it is sometimes difficult to know which
type of cable to use.

There are two main aspects of a cable to consider when selecting the right cable for the job.

Bend radius

The bend radius of a cable is a specification given to a cable to define how flexible the cable is.
Exceeding the bend radius specification can change characteristics within the cable and lead to
reduced RF performance. The thicker the cable is, the wider its bend radius will be, however,
the thicker the cable, the lower its electrical resistance will be, providing less impact on the radio
system gain.

The cable connected from the radio to the lightning arrestor is typically quite short. This allows a
thin, flexible cable to be used. Thin flexible cables have a higher electrical resistance
characteristic than thick rigid cables, but as there is only a short length being used, the impact
on radio system gain is negligible. The thick rigid cable is typically connected from the hut to
the top of an antenna mast connected to an antenna.

68 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part E - Radio Planning and Design

Antenna feedline cable loss

The antenna feedline cable supplies the connection between the radio and the antenna. When
long lengths of cable are required, it is important to factor in the cable loss associated with
length and type of cable being used.

5.3.4 Feeder Tail Cables

Typical installations use a thin, flexible RF cable, to interconnect the radio, to the outside of a
hut/cabinet, these cables are called Feeder Tail Cables.

Schneider Electric offers a variety of Feeder Tail Cables:

Feed Tail Cables

Order Code Notes

TBUMRFJP-TNC-N-05M Trio RF Cable Feeder Tail 1.5Ft/0.5m - TNC-Plug to N-Plug

TBUMRFJP-TNC-N-1M Trio RF Cable Feeder Tail 3Ft/1m - TNC-Plug to N-Plug

TBUMRFJP-N-N-1M Trio RF Cable Feeder Tail 3Ft/1m - N-Plug to N-Plug

TBUMRFJP-SMA-N-1M Trio RF Cable Feeder Tail 3Ft/1m - SMA-Plug to N-Plug

TBUMRFJP-DUPLX-BP Trio Band Pass Duplexer Cable Kit 3Ft/1m - Double-Screened

RF223/U with N-Plug to N-Plug.
(QTY of 2) For use with TBUMDUPLXBPxxx

5.3.5 Antenna Feedline Cables

As the antenna needs to be mounted up high, a longer length of RF cable needs to run from the
outside of the hut/cabinet, to the antenna, this cable is called ‘
Antenna Feedline Cable’
.

Schneider Electric offers a variety of Antenna Feedline Cables:

02/2022 69
Part E - Radio Planning and Design Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Antenna Feedline Cables

Order Code Notes

TBUMRFANT-99F30M-B Trio RF Cable Antenna Feedline 99Ft/30m, 0.5in/13mm Heliax

N-Plug To N-Plug (LDF4-50A or equivalent)

TBUMRFANT-75F22M-B Trio RF Cable Antenna Feedline 75Ft/22m, 0.5in/13mm Heliax

N-Plug To N-Plug (LDF4-50A or equivalent)

TBUMRFANT-75F22M-A Trio RF Cable Antenna Feedline 75Ft/22m, 0.4in/10mm N-Plug

To N-Plug (LMR-400 or equivalent)

TBUMRFANT-50F15M-A Trio RF Cable Antenna Feedline 50Ft/15m, 0.4in/10mm N-Plug

To N-Plug (LMR-400 or equivalent)

TBUMRFANT-25F7M-A Trio RF Cable Antenna Feedline 25Ft/7m, 0.4in/10mm N-Plug To

N-Plug (LMR-400 or equivalent)

TBUMRFANT-10F3M-A Trio RF Cable Antenna Feedline 10Ft/3m, 0.4in/10mm N-Plug To

N-Plug (LMR-400 or equivalent

As typical installations using antenna feedline cables use long lengths, it is important to consider
the loss characteristics of the cable being used, see the loss characteristics table below.

Antennas Feedline Cable Loss characteristics

Cable 150 MHz 450 MHz 900 MHz 2500 MHz

Diameter
[order code dB/100 dB/100 dB/100 dB/10 dB/100 dB/100 dB/10 dB/100
reference] ft m ft 0 ft ft m 0 ft m

10 mm (0.4 1.5 5.0 2.7 8.9 3.9 12.8 6.8 22.2

in.)
[TBUMRFANT-
xxxxxx-A]

13 mm (0.5 0.8 2.7 1.5 4.8 2.1 6.9 3.6 12.0

in.) Heliax
[TBUMRFANT-
xxxxxx-B]

5.3.6 Lightning Arrestors

A lightning arrestor is used to help minimize lightning damage to radio devices. Lightning
arrestors are made to bleed off electrostatic build-up to help prevent a direct lightning strike
from hitting the antenna system. Also, if a lightning strike happens nearby, the arrestor helps to
route the energy to ground.

70 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part E - Radio Planning and Design

The lightning arrestor is typically installed on the inside of a radio hut, between a coaxial feeder
tail lead the antenna feedline cable. The lightning arrestor comes with an N-Type socket
connector on each end.

Schneider Electric offers a variety of Lightning Arrestors:

Lightning Arrestors

Order Frequency Protected Surge Side Mounting VSWR Notes

Code range Side Connector Style
Connector

TBUMLT- 125 MHz ... N-Socket N-Socket Bulkhead 1.1:1 Turn-on: 600
ARRES- 1 GHz with right Vdc ±20%
TYPEA angle
bracket

TBUMLT- 2...GHz N-Socket N-Socket Bulkhead 1.3:1 Surge: 10 kA

ARRES- inline (no IEC 61000- 4-
TYPEB bracket) 5 8/20 µs
waveform

02/2022 71
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

6 Part F - Quick Reference Guide

This guide provides general information on the physical attributes of the Trio Q Data Radios
including, physical dimensions, mounting guides, LED indications, and physical interface
connections.
· QR - Half-Duplex/Simplex Radio 72

· QB - Base Radio 81

· QP - Hot-Standby Half-Duplex Radio 85

· QH - Hot-Standby Hot-Swap Radio Kit 90

· LED Indicators 100

· Connecting Antennas 109

· Communication Ports 109

· Activating Transmitter 112

· Factory Default 113

· Digital I/O 114

· Connecting to the Web User Interface (WUI) 116

· Resolving Ethernet Connection Issues 118

6.1 QR - Half-Duplex/Simplex Radio

Typical radio setup

72 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

Schneider Electric offers a variety of wireless accessories, for more information, refer to the
wireless accessories data sheet.

See the following topics:

· Mounting Instructions 73

· Physical Dimensions 74

· DIN Rail Mounting 75

· Power Supply Requirements 79

· Physical Interfaces 80

6.1.1 Mounting Instructions

Mount the radio in a clean and dry location, protected from water, excessive dust, corrosive
fumes, extremes of temperature and direct sunlight. In high power or high temperature
applications, allow sufficient passive or active ventilation. To help minimize moisture ingress it is
suggested to mount the radio with the connectors facing downwards.

When mounting the equipment, consider the environmental aspects of the site. Position the
cabinet so that it is shaded from potential high temperature of the afternoon sun, or icy cold
wind. Although the radios are designed for harsh temperature extremes, they will give a longer
service life if operated in a more stable temperature environment.

In an industrial environment, the radio modems should be isolated from excessive vibration,
which can destroy electronic components, joints, and crystals. The cabinet should provide full
protection from moisture, dust, corrosive atmospheres, and residue from ants and small vermin
(which can be corrosive or conductive). The radio modem will radiate heat from the in-built heat
sink, and the higher the transmitter duty cycle, the more heat will be radiated. Provide sufficient
ventilation in the form of passive or forced air circulation to help ensure that the radio is able to
maintain quoted temperature limits.

The QR is designed with four mounting holes to allow a flat mount of the radio. Each QR comes
standard with four 16 mm x 40 mm self-drilling screws. The heads of these screws are low-
profile wafer heads with a no. 2 Phillips recess.

02/2022 73
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

6.1.2 Physical Dimensions

QR with Integrated I/O and separate Rx port - TBURQRxxx-xxxx2xxx

QR with no Integrated I/O and separate Rx port - TBURQRxxx-xxxx1xxx

74 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

6.1.3 DIN Rail Mounting

DIN rail mounting kit

An optional DIN rail mounting kit is available for the QR. The mount is screwed onto the bottom
of the QR giving the unit the ability to be ‘
clipped’and locked onto a 7.5 mm by 35 mm (0.3 in.
by 1.4 in.) DIN rail.

Each DIN rail kit supplies:

· x1 DIN rail mounting bracket
· x1 DIN rail clip
· x4 Countersunk M4X8 screws (to mount DIN rail clip to bracket)
· x4 M4 nuts (to mount DIN rail clip to bracket)
· x4 Pan head M3X6 screws (to mount spread-spectrum radio to bracket)
· x4 Pan head M4X2.5 screws (to mount M-Series to bracket)
· x4 Pan head M4X8 screws (to mount QR150/QR450 to bracket)

DIN rail mounting bracket

Drawings not to scale.

02/2022 75
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

76 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

DIN rail clip

The DIN rail clip has a spring-loaded latch to allow easy installation/removal of the radio device
being installed.

The DIN rail clip can be fitted to the DIN rail mounting bracket x5 different ways to allow as
much installation flexibility as possible.

Rear mount DIN rail clip

The DIN rail clip can be fitted on the rear of the DIN rail mounting bracket two ways shown
below.

02/2022 77
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Examples of rear-fitted DIN clips

Bottom mount DIN rail clip

The DIN rail clip can be fitted on the bottom of the DIN rail mounting bracket three different
ways shown below.

78 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

Examples of bottom-fitted DIN clips

6.1.4 Power Supply Requirements

Rated Operating Voltage: 12...24 Vdc

Maximum Operating Voltage: 10...30 Vdc

Nominal Operating Voltage: 12 Vdc and 24 Vdc

Input Power (Rx typical): 5 Watts

Input Power (Tx typical): See the table below

Typical Input
Tx Power (dBm)
Power (Watts)

30 18

37 28

40 39

02/2022 79
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Typical receive/standby input power is 5 Watts. The input power will vary in transmit mode
according to RF output power level.

The QR is supplied with a lock-in mating DC power connector (Schneider Electric Part Number
TBUMPWR-PLUG-QR-A), which should be installed with the locking screws tightened to
0.5...0.6 N•m (4.4...5.3 lb-in) torque.

The radio is designed to limit damage if the voltage exceeds 30 Vdc or if reverse polarity is
applied. The field-replaceable internal fuse has a 7 Amp rating. Fuse replacement instructions
can be found within this user manual. Fuses are available from Schneider Electric, part number
TBUMPWR-FUSE-QR.

NOTICE
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
The radio modem can be damaged if there is any potential difference between the chassis-
ground, RS232 signal ground, power (-) input, or antenna coaxial shield. Before connecting
any wiring, ensure that all components are earthed to a common ground point.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Connect and secure the antenna, Ethernet and serial connectors BEFORE applying power to
the unit. Lastly, before inserting the power connector, re-check that the polarity and voltage is
correct using a multimeter and check the power cable against the +/- label printed on the front
panel of the radio.

6.1.5 Physical Interfaces

80 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

6.2 QB - Base Radio

Typical Radio Setup

Schneider Electric offers a variety of wireless accessories, for more information, refer to the
wireless accessories data sheet.

See the following topics:

· Mounting 81

· Physical Dimensions 83

· Power Supply Requirements 83

· Physical Interfaces 85

6.2.1 Mounting

The QB Full Duplex Radio is housed in a 1RU 19”rack enclosure. The radio is supplied with 2 x
1RU mounting brackets, which should be fitted to each side of the radio before it can be
installed into a 19”rack. The mounting brackets can be fitted to the side of the radio in 3
different locations to provide different mounting capabilities: Front Mount, Proud Mount or
Center Mount.

Front mount

Fixing the mounting brackets for a front mount, allows the front of the radio to be flush with the
front of a 19”rack.

02/2022 81
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Proud mount

Fixing the mounting brackets for a proud mount, allows the front of the radio to slightly hang
over the front of a 19”rack.

Center mount

Fixing the mounting brackets for a center mount, allows the radio to be mounted into a 19”rack
which contains center pillars.

The radio should be mounted in a clean and dry location, protected from water, excessive dust,
corrosive fumes, extremes of temperature and direct sunlight. Allow sufficient passive or active
ventilation to allow the radio modem’
s heat sink to operate efficiently.

Antenna connections, Power connections and Digital I/O are all made at the rear of the unit.

82 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

All User ports, including Serial Com ports, Ethernet ports, USB, and Aux port are located on the
front panel to provide easy access.

6.2.2 Physical Dimensions

19”(483 mm) 1 RU rack mount.

Without mounting brackets, D:424 x H:44.45 x W:436.5 mm (D:16.7”x H:1.75”x W:17.18”)

6.2.3 Power Supply Requirements

Operating Voltage: 11...30 Vdc (Dual Input)

Input Power (Rx typical): 14 Watts

Input Power (Tx typical): See the table below

02/2022 83
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Typical Input
Power (Watts)
Tx Power (dBm)
QB150 QB450

30 26 34

37 38 46

40 46 59

In high ambient temperature situations, the internal fans may operate, resulting in an increase
of input power of up to 28 Watts.

Typical receive/standby input power is 14 Watts. The input power will vary in transmit mode
according to RF output power level.

The QB is supplied with a lock-in mating DC power connector (Schneider Electric Part Number
TBUMPWR-PLUG-QB), which should be installed with the locking screws tightened to 0.5...0.6
N•m (4.4...5.3 lb-in) torque.

The radio is designed to limit damage if the voltage exceeds the operating voltage or if reverse
polarity is applied. The field replaceable internal fuse has a 12 Amp rating.

Replacement fuses available from Schneider Electric, part number TBUMPWR-FUSE-QB.

NOTICE
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
The radio modem can be damaged if there is any potential difference between the chassis-
ground, RS232 signal ground, power (-) input, or antenna coaxial shield. Before connecting
any wiring, ensure that all components are earthed to a common ground point.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Connect and secure the antenna, Ethernet and serial connectors BEFORE applying power to
the unit. Lastly, before inserting the power connector, re-check that the polarity and voltage is
correct using a multimeter and check the power cable against the +/- label printed on the rear
panel of the radio.

84 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

6.2.4 Physical Interfaces

Front panel

Rear panel

6.3 QP - Hot-Standby Half-Duplex Radio

Typical Radio Setup

02/2022 85
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Schneider Electric offers a variety of wireless accessories, for more information, refer to the
wireless accessories data sheet.

See the following topics:

· Operational Description 86

· Mounting Guidelines 86

· Physical Dimensions 87

· Power Supply Requirements 87

· IP Allocation 88

· Physical Interfaces 89

6.3.1 Operational Description

The QP hot standby half duplex radio, is a 1RU rack mounted module which operates with two
internal highly reliable half duplex radios, which can be switched between to provide
redundancy.

The two half duplex radios (Radio A & Radio B) operate simultaneously and depending on the
QP antenna option, there are different antenna arrangements available:

· Option B: Duplicate Ports - This option provides a separate antenna port for each of the
internal radios.
· Option D: Separate Switched Ports - This option provides a separate antenna port for the
receiver, and the transmitter. Ownership of the ports will belong to the online remote,
controlled by internal switching.
· Option E: Common Port - This option will connect the internal radio’
s antenna ports through
an RF relay, providing a single antenna port on the QP.
Only data received by the ‘ online‘radio is directed to the user equipment. The online radio is
also the only unit transmitting at any time. The QP can perform the following functions:

· Monitor the alarm output from both radio A and radio B and change over the online radio if
required.
· Switch all user data through to the online radio.
· Switch the antenna via internal coaxial relay to the online radio transmitter (Requires QP Kit
Option E).
Digital switching in the QP directs user data to and from the user ports on the front panel
directly to the user ports of the online radio.

6.3.2 Mounting Guidelines

The QP hot standby half duplex radio is housed as a 1RU 19”rack mounted unit. There are
mounting brackets included for the front panel, which can be used to secure the unit to the
rack. The mounting brackets can be fitted to the side of each unit in 3 different locations to
provide different mounting capabilities: Front Mount, Proud Mount or Center Mount. Refer to the
QB Mounting guide for a graphical representation of the different mounting positions.

86 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

The unit should be mounted in a clean and dry location, protected from water, excessive dust,
corrosive fumes, extremes of temperature and direct sunlight. Allow sufficient passive or active
ventilation to allow the radio fans to pass air through the internal heat sink efficiently.

All RF, power and digital I/O connections are made at the rear of the unit.

All User ports, including Serial Com ports, Ethernet ports, USB, and Aux port are located on the
front panel to provide easy access.

6.3.3 Physical Dimensions

19”(483 mm) 1 RU rack mount.

Without mounting brackets, D:424 x H:44.45 x W:436.5 mm (D:16.7”x H:1.75”x W:17.18”)

6.3.4 Power Supply Requirements

Operating Voltage: 11...30 Vdc (Dual Input)

Input Power (Rx typical): 14 Watts

Input Power (Tx typical): See the table below

02/2022 87
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Typical Input
Power (Watts)
Tx Power (dBm)
QP150 QP450

30 26 34

37 38 46

40 46 59

In high ambient temperature situations, the internal fans may operate, resulting in an increase
of input power of up to 28 Watts.

Typical receive/standby input power is 14 Watts. The input power will vary in transmit mode
according to RF output power level.

The QP is supplied with a lock-in mating DC power connector (Schneider part number
TBUMPWR-PLUG-QB), which should be installed with the locking screws tightened to 0.5...0.6
N•m (4.4...5.3 lb-in) torque.

The radio is designed to limit damage if the voltage exceeds the operating voltage or if reverse
polarity is applied. The field-replaceable internal fuse has a 12 Amp rating. Replacement fuses
available from Schneider Electric, part number TBUMPWR-FUSE-QB.

NOTICE
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
The radio modem can be damaged if there is any potential difference between the chassis-
ground, RS232 signal ground, power (-) input, or antenna coaxial shield. Before connecting
any wiring, ensure that all components are earthed to a common ground point.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Connect and secure the Antenna, Ethernet and Serial connectors BEFORE applying power to
the unit. Lastly, before inserting the power connector, re-check that the polarity and voltage is
correct using a multimeter and check the power cable against the +/- label printed on the rear
panel of the radio.

6.3.5 IP Allocation

The internal half duplex radios have unique factory default IP addresses:

· Default IP Radio A: 192.168.2.15

· Default IP Radio B: 192.168.2.16

When configuring the QP, ensure that Radio A and Radio B have unique IP addresses to avoid
IP conflicts.

88 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

6.3.6 Physical Interfaces

Front panel

Radio select switch

The 3-position switch (A / Auto / B) on the front panel provides the following functionality:
· Position A: Radio A is forced online
· Position Auto: changeover hardware will select the online radio
· Position B: Radio B is forced online

Adjacent to the select switch are two LEDs. These LEDs indicate the current online radio.

Select
Indicated State
LEDs

Auto Mode

Local Force

Remote Force

Rear panel (Hot Standby Option B)

02/2022 89
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Rear panel (Hot Standby Option D) - QP150 Only

Rear panel (Hot Standby Option E)

6.4 QH - Hot-Standby Hot-Swap Radio Kit

This section provides additional installation considerations, wiring diagrams and operational
descriptions. This document should be read in conjunction with the QB full duplex radio Quick
Start Guide.

The QH is a fully redundant, hot standby, full duplex radio providing automatic changeover
facilities.

The QH is designed as a modular solution, comprising of two identical QB full duplex radios
(standard) linked to a central monitoring and changeover controller (Hot Standby Controller).
Either QB may be taken out of service for maintenance without the need for system downtime.
The automatic changeover can be triggered by the online out-of-tolerance (alarm) conditions
based on either RF and/or user data throughput parameters.

90 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

Typical radio setup

See the following topics:

· Operational Description 92

· Mounting and Environmental Considerations 92

· Power Supply Requirements 93

02/2022 91
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

· Physical Dimensions 93

· Radio Position Allocation 94

· Communication Ports 95

· Power Supply and Protection 96

· Antennas and RF Feeders 96

· Physical Interfaces 98

6.4.1 Operational Description

The QH Hot Standby Controller (QHHSC) unit is a 1RU rack-mounted module that interfaces to
two independent full duplex radios (each 1RU rack mounted modules) via a number of RF and
data cables.

Both full duplex radios (Radio A & Radio B) operate simultaneously, constantly receiving radio
signals. However, only data from one radio (the ‘ online‘radio) is directed to the user equipment.
The online radio is also the only unit transmitting at any time. The Hot Standby Controller
provides the following functions:
· Amplify and split the incoming signal in order that both Radio A and Radio B receive
simultaneously.
· Monitor the alarm output from both Radio A and Radio B and change over the online radio if
required.
· Switch all user data through to the online radio.
· Switch the antenna, via internal coaxial relay, to the online radio transmitter (Requires
QHHSC Kit Option A).
Digital switching in the QHHSC directs data to and from the user ports on the front panel
directly to the user ports of the online radio.

The QHHSC and the two full duplex radios pass operational/alarm detection status between one
another via the AUX interface. Any alarm detection indicated from the online radio can cause
the QHHSC to change over the online radio.

6.4.2 Mounting and Environmental Considerations

The QH hot standby full duplex radio is housed as a 3RU 19”rack mounted set, encompassing
two x 1RU QB full duplex radios and one x 1RU QH Hot Standby Controller. The Controller and
full duplex radios are each supplied with two x 1RU mounting brackets, which are to be fitted to
either side of each unit before being installed into the 19”rack. The mounting brackets can be
fitted to the side of each unit in 3 different locations to provide different mounting possibilities:
Front Mount, Proud Mount or Center Mount. Refer to the QB Mounting guide within the Q user
manual for a graphical representation of the different mounting positions.

Mount the radio in a clean and dry location, protected from water, excessive dust, corrosive
fumes, extremes of temperature and direct sunlight. Provide sufficient passive or active
ventilation to allow the full duplex radio fans to pass air through the internal heat sink efficiently.

All RF, power and digital I/O connections are made at the rear of the unit.

All User ports, including Serial Com ports, Ethernet ports, USB, and Aux port are located on the
front panel to provide easy access.

92 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

6.4.3 Power Supply Requirements

Operating Voltage: 11...30 Vdc (Dual Input)

Input Power (Rx typical): 35 W

Input Power (Tx typical): See the table below

Typical Input
Power (Watts)
Tx Power (dBm)
QH150 QH450

30 48 55

37 59 67

40 68 80

In high ambient temperature situations, the internal fans may operate, resulting in an increase
of input power of up to 56 Watts [x2 QBs].

Typical receive/standby input power is 35 Watts. The input power will vary in transmit mode
according to RF output power level.

Each QH within the hot standby arrangement is supplied with a lock-in mating DC power
connector (Schneider Electric part number TBUMPWR-PLUG-QB), which should be installed
with the locking screws tightened to 0.5...0.6 N•m (4.4...5.3 lb-in) torque.

The radios are designed to limit damage if the voltage exceeds the operating voltage or if
reverse polarity is applied. Each QB has a field-replaceable internal fuse with a 12 Amp rating.
Replacement fuses available from Schneider Electric, part number TBUMPWR-FUSE-QB.

6.4.4 Physical Dimensions

Hot Standby is configured using 2 x QB full duplex radios + 1 x Hot Standby Controller (19 in. 1
RU each) for a total of 19 in. (483 mm) 3 RU rack mount.

Without mounting brackets, D:424 x H:133.3 x W:436.5 mm (D:16.7 x H:5.25 x W:17.18 in.)

02/2022 93
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

6.4.5 Radio Position Allocation

The QH is made up of three separate devices, a single QH hot standby controller and two
separate QB full duplex radios. Within a hot standby arrangement, the two full duplex radios
must be allocated a QH position, either Radio A or Radio B. The diagrams on the following
pages use the radio position allocation shown below.

94 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

6.4.6 Communication Ports

There are multiple connections required between the front panel interfaces of the QH:
· COM 1/2 (Both Radios to QHHSC)
· AUX (Both Radios to QHHSC)
· ETH 1 (Both Radios to QHHSC)
· ETH 3 (Between Radios A & B)

02/2022 95
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

6.4.7 Power Supply and Protection

To provide power to this redundant, hot standby radio system, the QH supports dual power
supplies. A separate power supply is used for each of the full duplex radios. To help increase
reliability, the power supplies are crossed-over to each of the secondary supply inputs of the full
duplex radios as shown in the diagram below.

Each full duplex radio has diode-ORed supply inputs, making a redundant power supply pair for
each full duplex radio possible.

The Hot Standby Controller has connections for dual power supplies and is powered from the
12 Vdc output of the full duplex radios as shown in the diagram below.

6.4.8 Antennas and RF Feeders

There are two primary antenna connection options. All connectors are standard N-Type
sockets. See the diagrams below.

Note the following for ETSI RED compliance (option A only):

· Hot Standby Controller, TBURQH1xx-E00xxxxA: Connect 4 dB N-type attenuators to the Rx
[Base A] and Rx [Base B] ports.
· Hot Standby Controller, TBURQH4xx-E00xxxxA: Connect 2 dB N-type attenuators to the Rx
[Base A] and Rx [Base B] ports.

96 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

Hot standby controller kit: Option A

02/2022 97
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Hot standby controller kit: Option A or B

6.4.9 Physical Interfaces

Front panel

User ports

Digital switching in the hot standby controller directs user data to and from the user ports on the
front panel directly to the user ports on the online radio.

98 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

Select switch

The 3-position switch (A / Auto / B) on the front panel provides the following functionality:

· Position A: Radio A is forced online

· Position Auto: changeover hardware will select the online radio
· Position B: Radio B is forced online

Adjacent to the Select switch are two LEDs. These LEDs indicate the current online radio.

Select
Indicated State
LEDs

Auto Mode

Local Force

Remote Force

Ethernet port LED indicators

Indicated State ETH port

Ethernet port
inactive, no cable
connected

Ethernet port active

@ 10 Mbps

Ethernet port active

@ 100 Mbps

No base detected alarm

Each QB within a Hot standby arrangement, should have HSC Mode enabled by the user. If
HSC Mode is disabled in both QBs and the front panel switch is in Auto mode the HSC will
indicate a ‘
No Base Detected Alarm‘as shown below. If only one QB has the HSC Mode
enabled while the HSC switch is in Auto mode, then that base will go Online.

02/2022 99
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

QHHSC

Alarm Type Radio A LED Radio B LED

No Base Detected
Red Red
Alarm

Rear panel (Hot standby controller Option A)

Hot standby controller Option B

The QHHSC Option B connections are identical to option A however, option B does not include
any RF interfaces on the HSC.

6.5 LED Indicators

Each image below shows where to find the LED indicators of each Trio Q Data Radio.

Top of QR Front of QR

Front of QB &QP Front of QB, QP & QHHSC

See:

· Pwr/TX - DC power and TX LEDs 101

· Sync/RxSig - Synchronization and no received signal LEDs 101

· TxD/RxD (COM 1 and COM 2) - Serial TxD/RxD LEDs 102

100 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

· ETH 1 & ETH 2 - Ethernet link and activity LEDs 102

· Low Power Mode 103

· Alarm detection indicator LED (QB & QP only) 103

· Alarm LED indications 103

· HSC mode alarm 105

· QHHSC change-over pending timer alarm 106

· PTT timeout alarm 107

· Authentication alarm 107

· TGCM Sync alarm 108

· Operational alarm 108

Pwr/TX - DC power and TX LEDs

If all the LEDs are off, no DC power is reaching the radio modem or the internal fuse is open.
Successful power-up is indicated by the Pwr/Tx LED showing a continuous GREEN state.

Tx Indicator (Tx): When the transmitter is active the Pwr/Tx LED is in a RED state.

The QR will take approximately 60 seconds to boot up - during this time, the DC power LED will
flash green/off periodically along with various LED activity. Wait until the DC power LED is no
longer periodically flashing and is in a solid green state before attempting to communicate with
the radio.

Indicated State Pwr/Tx

No power, or Shutdown

Power on

Transmitter On

Sync/RxSig - Synchronization and no received signal LEDs

A flashing or solid green Sync/RxSig LED indicates that the modem is receiving decodable
transmissions from another source.

A regular/solid flashing red Sync/RxSig LED indicates that the modem is receiving un-
decodable transmissions from another source. This symptom can be caused by insufficient RX
signal, too much interference or an incorrect configuration parameter set within the pair of
modems.

02/2022 101
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Indicated State Sync/RxSig

No received signal

Receiver in SYNC state

RSSI over mute level and no

sync

TxD/RxD (COM 1 and COM 2) - Serial TxD/RxD LEDs

The RxD/TxD LEDs indicate data flow into/out of the serial user port. Data being sent to the port
for transmission is indicated by a red flash, and data being received over the air and then
forwarded to the serial port is shown as a green flash. As the serial port is full duplex, there may
be instances where the TxD and RxD LEDs illuminate simultaneously, this will be indicated by
an amber illumination of the port LED.

Indicated State COM1/2

No Activity

RxD Data Output

TxD Data Input

RxD & TxD Data Active

ETH 1 & ETH 2 - Ethernet link and activity LEDs

The Ethernet port LEDs are found on the physical RJ45 sockets, located on the front panel.
Green LED activity typically represents a current physical connection to another Ethernet
device has been established. Amber LED activity indicates Ethernet data is being transferred
between the local Ethernet port and another Ethernet device.

102 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

Indicated State Sync/RxSig

Ethernet port inactive, no

cable connected

Ethernet port active @ 10

Mbps

Ethernet port active @ 100

Mbps

Low Power Mode

When the radio is asleep in Low Power Mode, all LEDs will extinguish. If/when the radio wakes
at about thirty second intervals normal LED operation resumes.

Alarm detection indicator LED (QB & QP only)

The Alarm LED state has two states:

· Green: No alarms are currently detected.
· Red: An alarm or alarms are currently active. This can be a critical alarm or an enabled user
alarm.
For more details, see Alarms 258 .

Indicated State Alarm

No active alarm

Alarm/s detected

Alarm LED indications

In some circumstances the radio will indicate an alarm state. This is shown as all LEDs flashing
RED for 1 sec and then a pattern of green LEDs for 1 sec. The pattern of green LEDs indicates
the type of alarm. Consult the table for more information.

02/2022 103
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

QR Half Duplex Remote

Alarm Type COM 1 COM 2

RxD / TxD RxD / TxD Sync / RxSig Pwr / Tx

Supply voltage Green

alarm

Retry Factory Green

default

Configuration Green Green

alarm

Firmware Green Green

upgrade alarm

Reverted to Green Green Green

factory default
due to internal
alarm

IP address not set Green

(DHCP)

Over temperature Green Green Green

alarm
(Tx has been
disabled)

Over temperature Green Green Green

alarm
(Tx has been
folded back)

VSWR alarm Green Green Green Green

104 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

QB / QP

Alarm Type COM 1 COM 2

Pwr / Tx Sync / RxSig RxD / TxD RxD / TxD

Supply voltage Green

alarm

Pairing Alarm Green Green

(Hot Standby
Mode)

Retry Factory Green

default

Configuration Green green

alarm

Firmware Green Green

upgrade alarm

Reverted to Green Green Green

factory default
due to internal
alarm

IP address not set Green

Over temperature Green Green Green

alarm
(Tx has been
disabled)

Over temperature Green Green Green

alarm
(Tx folded back)

VSWR alarm Green Green Green Green

HSC mode alarm

Each QB within a Hot Standby arrangement should have HSC Mode enabled by the user. When
HSC mode is enabled, the QB will attempt to negotiate and pair with an alternate QB. If HSC
mode is disabled, a QB will ignore any HSC mode negotiation messages it receives.

02/2022 105
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

QB (within a QH)

Alarm Type COM 1 COM 2

Pwr / Tx Sync / RxSig Sync / RxSig RxD / TxD

Pairing Alarm Green Green

Description of When a QB in HSC mode attempts to negotiate with the alternate base,
Alarm and no response is received, a pairing alarm will be displayed (flashing
all red, then, green as shown above)

Probable Causes (1) There is a mismatch in the configuration between Base A and Base
B. Check that HSC mode, IP address, SUBNET mask, shared IP and
VLAN parameters are suitably configured. For more details on
configuring Hot Standby radios, see Part G - Quick Start Guide 120 .
(2) There is a problem with the cable connection in the hot standby
arrangement. Check cables are properly inserted into their correct
locations. Refer to ‘
Step 2 - Interface Connections‘in the QH Hot
Standby Quick Start Guide 125 .

The QHHSC (hot standby controller) indicates an alarm when no QBs are connected (the
connection is detected via the Auxiliary interface). While this alarm is active, the QHHSC front
panel becomes inactive.

QHHSC

Alarm Type Radio A Radio B

No Base Detected Alarm Red Red

QHHSC change-over pending timer alarm

After a change-over occurs within a hot standby arrangement, the QHHSC will run a 60 second
timer. If a new alarm is detected on the online QB during this 60 seconds, the QHHSC will
prevent the change-over and indicate a ‘ Pending Timer’alarm. Once the timer reaches 0, the
change-over will proceed. The pending timer helps prevent a high number of change-overs
occurring in a short period of time.

A pending timer alarm is indicated on the QHHSC with a flashing green LED on the
corresponding radio LED (Radio A/B).

106 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

QHHSC

Alarm Type Radio A Radio B

Pending Timer (To change Green

from Radio A)

Pending Timer (To change Green

from Radio B)

PTT timeout alarm

When the PTT timeout limit is reached (default is 60 Seconds) the following RED LED will begin
to flash on its own.

QB / QP

Alarm Type COM 1 COM 2

Pwr / Tx Sync / RxSig RxD / TxD RxD / TxD

PTT Timeout Red

Alarm

QR

Alarm Type COM 1 COM 2

RxD / TxD RxD / TxD Sync / RxSig Pwr / Tx

PTT Timeout Red

Alarm

Authentication alarm

The authentication alarm is indicated by the Sync/RxSig LED flashing amber once per second.
When Radio Access Controls are enabled and the radio is configured as a Supplicant, this
alarm will be indicated if the radio has not been successfully authenticated and authorized by
the Authenticator radio. Refer to the events log for details of the cause of the alarm.

QB / QP

Alarm Type COM 1 COM 2

Pwr / Tx Sync / RxSig RxD / TxD RxD / TxD

Authentication Amber
Alarm

02/2022 107
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

QR

Alarm Type COM 1 COM 2

RxD / TxD RxD / TxD Sync / RxSig Pwr / Tx

Authentication Amber
Alarm

TGCM Sync alarm

A TGCM (Token Grant Channel Management) Sync alarm is indicated by the TGCM
Sync/RxSig LED flashing red 3 times per second.] This alarm applies to TGCM Remotes and
Repeaters. This alarm indicates that the radio is not synchronized with TGCM Beacons from a
TGCM Manager. This alarm may occur after power up when the radio has not received a
beacon or after beacons have been lost for more than 30 seconds. This LED alarm will reflect
the TGCM Sync State diagnostics parameter.

QB / QP

Alarm Type COM 1 COM 2

Pwr / Tx Sync / RxSig RxD / TxD RxD / TxD

TGCM Sync Red

Alarm

QR

Alarm Type COM 1 COM 2

RxD / TxD RxD / TxD Sync / RxSig Pwr / Tx

TGCM Sync Red

Alarm

Operational alarm

An operational alarm is indicated by all 4 LEDs periodically flashing red (no green flashes). This
alarm can indicate the radio has detected an error which may not be recoverable by the user.
Depending on why the operational alarm has occurred, the event log can be referred to, which
may help diagnose why operation alarm is active.

QR / QB / QP

Operation Alarm Red Red Red Red

108 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

6.6 Connecting Antennas

The RF antenna system should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’

s instructions
and local regulatory requirements.

· The RF (Antenna) connectors on the QR are user-configurable to operate in:

o Shared Tx/Rx mode on the TNC type socket connector
o Separate Tx on the TNC type socket connector, and Rx on the SMA type socket
connector.
§ Note: Available on QR with Integrated I/O and separate Rx port - TBURQRxxx-xxxx2xxx
· The RF (Antenna) connectors on the QB and the QP are N-Type socket connectors

Good quality, low loss, feeder cable, should be considered according to the length of the cable
run. Also, use a short, flexible patch cable between the radio and lightning arrestor or flange
mount of the radio cabinet/enclosure. Ensure that all external connections are waterproofed.

6.7 Communication Ports

Ethernet ports (ETH)

The ETH ports are 10/100 Base-T compliant, using RJ-45 sockets. These sockets support both
TIA/EIA-568-A & B wiring as they have Auto MDI/MDIX Auto Sensing. This means you can use
both straight-through and cross-over type CAT-5 or better patch cables. All RJ45 connectors
should use mating plugs that include an integral locking tab.

02/2022 109
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

QB / QP QR

If termination of a cable is required, then the following wiring arrangement should be followed
(Compliant with TIA/EIA-568-A).

Maximum differential voltage: 5 Vdc, 50 mA max through each differential pair.

If 100-BaseT connection speed is required, CAT-6 Shielded cable should be used for
installation to comply with ETSI EMC directives.

110 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

Serial ports - COM 1/2

The Trio Q Data Radios feature a 9-pin miniature D-Shell (DE-9) Socket connector that
supports two individual serial port connections. Each serial port is associated with an embedded
serial terminal server that provides the serial to TCP/IP or UDP/ IP connectivity.
· COM 1 uses pins 2, 3, 7, and 8 with pin 5 as the common ground
· COM 2 uses pins 4 and 6 with pin 5 as the common ground
· An RSSI output is available on pin 9 which is useful for antenna alignment

Pin out specs:

(1) Pin 2, 6, and 8 are outputs rated at +/- 6 Vdc, 65 mA max

(2) Pin 3, 4, and 7 are inputs rated at +/- 15 Vdc, 5 mA max

(3) Pin 9 is an analog voltage output to indicate the radio’

s live RSSI measurement or, if Low
Power Mode is enabled, this pin is an active low input with an internal pullup, which must be
connected to Gnd to invoke Low Power Mode.

(4) Connecting wires should be #22 AWG (0.33 mm2) or larger

02/2022 111
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

QR450
QB / QP

QR150

RS-232 Mode RS-485 Mode

Pin Name Input / Output Name Input / Output

1 COM 1 DCD Output Not used -

2 COM 1 RxD Output B/Z (Inverting) Input/Output

3 COM 1 TxD Input A/Y (Non- Input/Output

Inverting)

4 COM 2 TxD Input Not used -

5 GND - Not used -

6 COM 2 RxD Output Not used -

7 COM 1 RTS Input Not used -

8 COM 1 CTS Output Not used -

9 RSSI or Low Power Output RSSI or Low Output

Mode Power Mode
Input Input

6.8 Activating Transmitter

Data sent to either of the radio’s communication ports (Ethernet or Serial Port) will cause the
radio to key up its transmitter and send the data over the air. However, to test the transmitter

112 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

with external test equipment (Tx power, VSWR or Frequency), or to test another radio’ s
receiver, the Trio Q Data Radio provides a means to manually control the activation of the
transmitter.

To access the transmit test tool, access the radio’

s web user interface and navigate to
Maintenance -> Test. The Transmit Test tool page is displayed.

The transmitter can now be controlled via this page. To key up the transmitter, click Turn ON.
By default, this will enable a Modulated Carrier for 60 seconds. During this time, the Tx LED
should illuminate solid RED to indicate the transmitter is active.

If the power or frequency is adjusted, and it is desired to retain this value, click Save and apply
to activate the changes in the radio.

If QAM modulation is selected, then an averaging RF power meter will be required to verify the
Tx Power setting.

6.9 Factory Default

The factory default IP address of the QR and QB data radio is 192.168.2.15. The QP data radio
contains two IP addresses - the primary radio’
s (radio A) default IP address is 192.168.2.15
and the secondary radio (radio B) is 192.168.2.16.

If you want to perform configuration changes on the Trio Q Data Radio and are not aware of the
configured IP address, you may need to activate a factory reset. Alternatively, COM 1 can
provide access to the radio’ s configuration via Text User Interface (as long as this port remains
at the default configuration).

Default interface settings are: 19200, N, 8, 1, No Handshaking

A factory reset will cause all previous configuration settings to be erased and returned to the
factory default values.

To initiate a factory reset

1. Apply DC power to the radio.

2. Wait up to 3 minutes for the unit to fully boot up, which is indicated by a solid GREEN Power
LED.

3. Depress the factory default switch using a paper clip or similar object.

02/2022 113
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

4. Keep the switch depressed for 8 seconds or until all four LEDs illuminate solid GREEN and
begin flashing.

The radio is returning to the factory default settings.

5. Wait for up to 4 minutes for the factory reset process to complete.

6.10 Digital I/O

The following Trio Q radios provide three dedicated digital inputs as well as three digital outputs
which can be read/written to via TVIEW+ Diagnostics or SNMP.

· QB Full Duplex Radio

· QH Hot Standby Full Duplex Radio
· QP Hot Standby Half Duplex Radio

The QR Half Duplex Radio provides two dual-function digital I/Os. Each I/O can be used as
either an input or an output. When an I/O is used as an input, the output of that I/O should be
set to off.

114 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

For SNMP object descriptions for digital I/O, see SNMP 276 .

Inputs

The digital inputs for the QH/QB/QP and the QR have the same operational characteristics, the
following input methods can be used across either of these hardware variants.

Some form of switching contact (i.e.: switch, relay) is normally used to change the state of the
input. Both an isolated and non-isolated input configuration is possible.

Typical input drivers include: dry contact (relay), electronic control, or driven control. Each
input can support either type of driver.

Reading the status of a digital input while the circuit is CLOSED will report the input as being
ON.

Reading the status of a digital input while the circuit is OPEN (or not connected) will report the
input as being OFF.

The inputs of a QR are shared with its corresponding output. To read the input state, the
corresponding output state needs to be OPEN. The QR provides the wetting current of
approximately 5 mA for the contacts during a scan of the inputs.

02/2022 115
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Outputs

The digital outputs for the QH/QB/QP & the QR have the same operational characteristics, the
following output methods can be used across either of these hardware variants. Each output is
an open collector.

Power specifications

· Maximum Voltage allowed across each output is 30 Vdc.

· Maximum output current (QH/QB/QP): 1 A
· Maximum output current (QR150): 100 mA

External resistors or a current limited supply should be used to keep the current below these
values.

When the OUTPUT is OFF, the circuit will be OPEN. When the OUTPUT is ON, the circuit will
be CLOSED.

6.11 Connecting to the Web User Interface (WUI)

Trio Q Data Radios provide an embedded web server which provides access to the Web User
Interface (WUI). The WUI can be used to perform configuration changes on the radio. To
change a configuration parameter in a Trio Q Data Radio, connect a PC to one of the Ethernet
ports (ETH 1 or ETH 2) and direct a browser to the IP address of the Trio Q Data Radio. It is
strongly recommended that you follow these guidelines for successful connection to the radio:

(1) Ensure that the Trio Q Data Radio is powered up and has fully booted. This is indicated by a
solid GREEN power LED. It takes approximately 2 minutes from applying DC power for the Trio
Q Data Radio. Once the radio is fully booted, it may be indicating a user alarm. For example, if
the radio’
s antenna port is incorrectly terminated, the radio will indicate a high VSWR alarm.
Regardless of this user alarm, the radio can still be browsed to.

116 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

(2) Disconnect the PC from any other Internet/LAN networks, as this may create a conflict in IP
addresses or the Trio Q Data Radio IP might not fall within the subnet mask specified by the
network.

(3) Connect the PC’ s Ethernet Port to one of the Ethernet Ports (ETH 1 or ETH 2) using an RJ-
45 patch cable. Cross over cables will also work (Ethernet ports support MDI/MDIX). An active
connection is indicated on the radio by solid green and amber illumination on the LEDs which
are fixed to the physical Ethernet port you are connected to.

(4) Ensure that the PC LAN Port is configured for a suitable IP address. If you are using
Windows 7, configure the LAN settings via the Control Panel. Navigate to the Windows ‘ Start‘
button and open Control Panel -> Network and Sharing Center -> Change adapter setting ->
Double click on the LAN port you are using -> Properties -> Double click ‘ TCP/IPv4’ . You
should see the window shown.

Ensure that ‘
Obtain IP Address Automatically‘is NOT selected. It is recommended that you
manually specify a compatible IP Address. In this example, a factory default radio is being
configured. The IP address of that radio is 192.168.2.15 and a compatible IP address for the
PC would be 192.168.2.1. Click OK to accept the changes.

Check with your Network Administrator before allocating IP addresses as each LAN/WAN
network is different.

(5) Open the web browser and enter the IP address of the Trio Q Data Radio into the URL. In
this case, type ‘
192.168.2.15‘
, the browser should now display the home page of the radio.
(Shown below).

You may need to disable a web proxy (if in use) or disable or modify the local firewall to help
ensure the security.

02/2022 117
Part F - Quick Reference Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

6.12 Resolving Ethernet Connection Issues

Here are some basic tips to help you with Ethernet configuration issues. The Windows
operating system (and others) comes complete with many useful tools. Open a command
window by clicking on Start then Run and entering CMD and then click OK.

Obtaining IP information about your PC

If you need to find out more information about your computer’s Ethernet IP configuration,
network gateways and DNS servers, type IPconfig /all into the command window.

118 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part F - Quick Reference Guide

Checking IP connectivity

A reliable way to check IP connectivity to a device is using the 'Ping' utility. Type 'ping xxx'
where xxx is the complete IP address of the destination device you want to check. Ping will
either respond with latency results (as shown) or say ‘ timed out‘if no connection was possible.

Repeated connections to multiple devices with same IP address

A common issue experienced when attempting to configure multiple radios with the same IP
address (such as factory default radios). The issue is due to invalid MAC table entries. If you
change the Ethernet connection between two devices with the same IP address quickly, you
may need to reset the MAC look up table in the PC. You can do this by typing ‘ arp -d‘in the
command window.

02/2022 119
Part G - Quick Start Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

7 Part G - Quick Start Guide

· QR Point to Point Bench Test Setup 120

· QH Hot Standby Quick Start Guide 125

· Setting up eDiags 128

· USB Automatic Configuration Activation 130

· Radio Access Control 132

7.1 QR Point to Point Bench Test Setup

This section describes the 10 key steps required for:

· Connecting and configuring a pair of Trio Q Data Radios
· Performing basic diagnostics and health checks
· Connecting user equipment such as Host Software and/or RTUs

Typical bench setup

Step 1 - RF and DC power connection

RF Connection

Bench testing is typically performed over short distances, so RF signals need to be significantly
attenuated. Using dummy loads or whip antennas is not recommended.

A suitable method for attenuation of RF signals is to use a 4 Port RF Attenuator (Part Number
TBUM4PORTATTEN). An attenuator accurately reduces RF signal level, simulating a real world,
long distance RF link. Other types of RF attenuators can be used providing the total attenuation
is between 80 dB to 100 dB. Check the attenuator power ratings against the configured Tx
power of the radio.

If the TX power of each radio is set to 20 dBm (100 mW) then, low power, low cost attenuators
can be used.

120 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part G - Quick Start Guide

DC power connection

Ensure that each radio is wired using the correct polarity and that power supply is regulated
and has adequate current delivering capacity. See Part F - Quick Reference Guide 72 to
confirm the power supply requirements that you require for the product you are using.

Step 2 - Power up radios

Apply DC power to the radios. The radio will begin a boot up process. This process can take up
to 2 minutes (during this time frame, the ‘Pwr’LED will periodically flash GREEN, indicating that
the boot up process is still in progress).

Once the boot up process has completed, the ‘ Pwr’LED should be solid GREEN. If there is no
LED indication, re-check the DC polarity and ensure that the DC voltage is between operating
voltages.

If these checks are correct then you may need to inspect the internal fuse.

For more details on replacing a fuse, see Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance 368 .

Step 3 - Setup for radio configuration

IP address and factory default

The factory default IP address of the Trio Q Data Radios is 192.168.2.15. If you want to
perform configuration changes on the Trio Q Data Radio and are not aware of the configured
IP address, you may need to activate a factory reset. Alternatively, COM 1 can provide access
to the radio’
s configuration via Text User Interface (as long as this port remains at the default
configuration).

Default interface settings are: 19200, N, 8, 1, No Handshaking.

A factory reset will cause all previous configuration settings to be erased and returned to the
factory default values. A factory default can be initiated by applying DC power to the radio (wait
up to 3 minutes for the unit to fully boot up, indicated by a solid GREEN Power LED), depress
the factory default switch using a paper clip or similar object and keep the switch depressed for
6 seconds or until all four LEDs illuminate solid GREEN and begin flashing, indicating the radio
will return to the factory default settings. Wait for up to 4 minutes for the factory default reset
process to complete.

Connection to embedded web user interface (WUI) - HTTP

Connect the PC Ethernet Port to one of the Ethernet Ports (ETH1 or ETH2). To verify you can
communicate with the QR you should first ping the radio.

Open up a command window on the PC by going to the Start -> Run and typing CMD then
OK. Then type ping 192.168.2.15 which is the default address of the radio. The radio should
respond to the ping as shown below. If this is not the case, see Resolving Ethernet Connection
Issues 118 in Part F - Quick Reference Guide.

02/2022 121
Part G - Quick Start Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Trio Q Data Radios can also be configured via a Text User Interface (TUI) or Command-Line
Interface (CLI). Console protocols such as Telnet, SSH or a serial connection may be used.
For further details on making configuration changes via the TUI and CLI, see Configuration 218
in Part H - Feature Detail.

Step 4 - Start a web browser on your PC

Start a web browser and insert the IP address of the radio into the URL. In this case, type
192.168.2.15 and the configuration page is now displayed in the browser.

Navigate to the Wizards section of the WUI by clicking Setup -> Wizards.

Step 5 - Activate entry point - PTP wizard

Select Point to Point with Half Duplex Entry Point.

Select Entry Point radio and click Start The Wizard.

The Wizard now prompts you to configure the minimum parameters to achieve point to point
operation. For each configuration item, help text is provided on the HTML programmer
interface. If you are manually specifying IP addresses, ensure that you record them for future
reference. You will need to know the IP address of each radio in future steps.

122 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part G - Quick Start Guide

After configuration of all items are complete, activate the configuration by clicking Activate
Configuration in the top right corner.

Shared IP address (Optional configuration - For hot standby units only)

Radio A and Radio B (within the QP) can be configured to ‘

share’an IP address. This is a
separate IP address from each radio’s unique IP address. The shared IP address can be used
to access the current ‘
online’radio.

The shared IP address should be configured in each individual internal radio as the same IP
address.

To configure the shared IP address, go to Setup -> Basestation -> General and enable
Shared IP Mode.

Step 6 - Activate remote - PTP wizard

Repeat steps (3) to (5) for the remote radio. When in Step 5, select Remote radio and click
Start The Wizard.

Step 7 - Verify Modem Operation

The radio configuration and RF link can now be verified for correct operation. Check that the
remote radio can correctly decode a transmitted signal by energizing the transmitter (modulated
carrier) of the entry point radio. Refer to the instructions in the quick reference guide section of
this manual.

With the transmitter energized, inspect the LED status on each radio. The entry point radio
should have a solid RED ‘ Pwr/Tx’LED. The remote radio should a solid GREEN ‘ Sync/RxSig’
LED. If this LED is not SOLID green, it may indicate incorrect configuration or inadequate
signal strength and the setup should be checked. Repeat this test with the remote radio
transmitting.

Step 8 - Packet transmission test

This tool provides a useful way to test a radio communications link by transmitting data packets
between two units in a loop-backed mode.

You can find this tool in the Diagnostics tab, then click the Packet Transmission Test sub-
menu.

In the Destination IP Address field enter the IP address of the target radio that you want to
ping. Ensure that the Number of Packets is set to 1000. Click Start Packet Test. The radio
will indicate the packet test has started and is currently running and both units will have flashing
Tx LEDs indicating data is being transmitted.

02/2022 123
Part G - Quick Start Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

When the test is complete, a Packet transmission test completed message is displayed and
the test results summarized in the Test Results section.

The test results show TX & RX Packets, Lost Packets, and the Packet Error Rate.

Step 9- Embedded diagnostics testing

Review diagnostics

Connect the web browser to the Entry Point radio using the IP address recorded in Step 5.
Once loaded, click the Diagnostics tab, then select the Summary sub-menu. The Diagnostics
summary page is displayed. Review the diagnostics parameters checking for abnormal items
such as high VSWR (high TX reverse power) and lower than expected radio RSSI (Received
Signal Strength).

Follow this step again for the remote radio.

124 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part G - Quick Start Guide

Step 10 - Commissioning record

After a packet transmission test has been performed, a Commissioning Record can be
prepared by clicking Commissioning Record.

It is recommended that the radio is configured to use the current date (either time configured
manually or obtained from an NTP server) otherwise the date / time shown will not be correct.

You can enter an appropriate Unit Name and Location for reference purposes. Additionally, a
comment may be added noting the type of antenna in use. Once this information has been
added, the web page can be printed (using the print facility in the web browser). It may be
useful to print the commissioning record to PDF for future reference.

This now completes the requirements for setting up a half duplex, Point to Point Trio Q Data
Radio Link. The radios are now ready for application testing. The application can be connected
to either ETH1 or ETH2 or both.

7.2 QH Hot Standby Quick Start Guide

This section describes the seven key steps required for connecting and configuring a single QH
arrangement.

Step 1 - RF and DC power connection

Connect the DC power and Antenna ports following the connection diagrams shown in the QH
Quick Reference Guide section.

If antennas are not available, terminate the radios antenna ports with a suitable load or
attenuator.

Do not apply DC power to the hot standby arrangement at this stage.

Step 2 - Interface connections

Connect the interface cables following the diagram below (leaving the QB interconnecting cable
[ETH3-ETH3] disconnected).

02/2022 125
Part G - Quick Start Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Step 3 - Apply DC power

Ensure that the radio select switch on the hot standby controller is switched to Radio A.

Apply DC power to the hot standby arrangement, allowing up to two minutes for the radios to
power up.

Once the hot standby arrangement is powered up (indicated by a solid green LED state on the
pwr LEDs), ensure that the HSC radio select LED for Radio A is illuminated amber. This
indicates that Radio A is forced online.

Step 4 - Start a web browser on your PC

Ensure that each QB radio is in factory default state by pressing the hidden factory default
button on the front panel of each QB for 5 seconds. Allow up to three minutes for the factory
default process to complete.

Connect your PC Ethernet port to the ETH 2 interface of Base A. Verify that your PC can
communicate with Base A by performing a ping test. The default IP address of a Trio Q Data
Radio is 192.168.2.15.

Start a web browser and enter the IP address of the radio into the URL. In this case, type
192.168.2.15 and the configuration page should now be displayed in the browser.

Further details on factory default and web browser connection can be found in the QB Quick
Start Guide.

Step 5 - Radio configuration

There are three main QB configuration parameters to review for hot standby operation:

· HSC Mode: Configure the QB to operate within a hot standby arrangement by enabling HSC
mode. To access HSC mode, go to Setup -> Basestation -> General and enable the HSC
Mode. Once HSC Mode is enabled, a range of hot standby configuration parameters
becomes available.

· Unique IP Address: Each QB radio within a hot standby arrangement requires its own
unique IP address. To configure the IP address, go to Setup -> Network -> Ethernet -> IP
Address. For this example, the following unique IP address allocations have been given:
o Base A IP: 192.168.2.21
o Base B IP: 192.168.2.22
· Shared IP Address: The two QB radios within a hot standby arrangement can be configure
to ‘
share’an IP address. This is an IP address separate from the radio’
s unique IP address.

126 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part G - Quick Start Guide

The ‘
online’base within the hot standby arrangement assumes ownership of the shared IP
address. The shared IP address has to be configured in Base A & B.
To configure the shared IP address, enable HSC mode, then go to Setup -> Basestation ->
General and enable Shared IP Mode.
For this example, the following shared IP address has been allocated:
o Base A & B Shared IP: 192.168.2.20

When these parameters have been configured, activate the configuration.

Once the configuration is activated, Base A will attempt to negotiate and pair with an alternate
QB. As Base B is still in a factory default state, HSC mode negotiation messages will be ignored
(until HSC mode is enabled). This will cause Base A to indicate a pairing alarm, which can be
ignored until Base B has been configured.

QB (within a QH)

Alarm Type Pwr / Tx Sync / RxSig COM 1 RxD / COM 2 RxD /

TxD TxD

Pairing Alarm Green Green

For more details on alarms, see Alarms 258 .

When Base A has been successfully configured, perform the following steps:

· Force Base B online using the radio select switch on the QHHSC.
· Begin from Step 4 and configure Base B.

Step 6 - Base interconnection

When Base A and Base B have both been successfully configured, interconnect the ETH 3
interfaces of both Bases. The cable is shown in the diagram below in RED. Once this cable is in
place, each base should be able to successfully negotiate with one another and the pairing
alarms should stop.

When the cable has been connected, set the radio select switch on the QHHSC to the Auto
position.

02/2022 127
Part G - Quick Start Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Step 7 - Change-over triggers

When the alarm output becomes active on the online QB, a change-over can occur (as long as
the alternate QB does not also have an active alarm output). The alarm output can become
active when an alarm is detected. The alarms are user configurable and can be subscribed to
the alarm output.

By default, no alarms are subscribed to the alarm output. It is recommended to review the
alarms setup in each base, to ensure that suitable alarms have been subscribed to the alarm
output for the given system requirements. If the system requirements are unknown, all of the
alarms can be subscribed to the alarm output, then disabled in the future, if no longer required.

For more details configuring radio alarms, see Alarms 258 in Part H - Feature Detail.

7.3 Setting up eDiags

Ethernet diagnostics (also known as eDiags) is a feature of the TVIEW+ diagnostics software
that encapsulates the TVIEW+ diagnostics protocol in an Ethernet UDP/IP packet. Together
with the eDiags server embedded into each Trio Q Data Radio, the user can monitor a Trio Q
Data Radio network using the TVIEW+ diagnostics software over an Ethernet LAN/WAN. A
typical use diagram is shown below.

For more information on the features, benefits and technical details of the TVIEW+ diagnostics
software, refer to the TVIEW+ diagnostics user manual.

128 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part G - Quick Start Guide

The following instructions explain how to poll Trio Q Data Radios using eDiags over a wireless
network.

1. Enable eDiags within each radio that is required to be polled. Configure the following
parameter in each radio:
o Local Port number - This will be the port number the eDiags session (within the PC) will
address all eDiags data to (example uses: 1040)
2. Ensure that TVIEW+ Diagnostics software has been installed on the PC.

3. Open the TVIEW+ Diagnostics software on the PC and configure the following items (for
detailed instructions on the TVIEW+ Diagnostics software, refer to the TVIEW+ Diagnostics
user manual):
o Create a list (database) of Trio Q Data Radios that are required to be polled for
diagnostics. Each data base entry should have the communications port set to eDiags
(Ethernet) and configured to use the IP address and eDiags port number of the
corresponding radio. Each serial number entered needs to be correct. Other information
can also be specified.
o Define the IP address and local listening port number for the eDiags session (controller
address and port number). This can be configured in Settings -> eDiags Port settings.
The IP address and port number configured needs to match the controller IP address and
controller port number specified within the eDiags settings within each of the radios (they
should all have common settings).
This now completes the requirements for configuring eDiags. The operation of eDiags for a
typical poll/response diagnostics transaction is as follows:

(1) The TVIEW+ Diagnostics software constructs a UDP/IP data gram which targets the
embedded eDiags server of each radio configured within the database.

(2) The UDP datagram is placed onto the LAN/WAN which routes the datagram onto the radio
network.

02/2022 129
Part G - Quick Start Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

(3) The entry point radio will respond to any poll addressed to its own IP address and eDiags
port, or, will transmit the poll over the air to the targeted radio.

(4) The targeted radio will then respond to the poll, by transmitting a response, which will be
sent back to the controller address (the Diagnostics PC).

7.4 USB Automatic Configuration Activation

NOTICE
POTENTIAL SECURITY RISK
A configuration file saved with passwords should be stored in a secure location and only given
to those with unrestricted access. The security information in the configuration file is not
encrypted (except for user passwords, which are hashed)
Failure to follow these instructions can result in cyber security vulnerabilities.

WARNING
HAZARD OF EXPLOSION
· Do not use USB ports in hazardous applications or hazardous locations.
· Use USB ports only for non-hazardous applications in locations that are known to be in a
non-hazardous state.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
UNEXPECTED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
· Verify that the data transfer between the RADIO and the plug-in USB drive is complete
before removing the USB drive from the USB host port.
· Removing a plug-in USB drive from the host port while the data transfer is in progress can
impact system performance and result in a system restart.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.

Step-by-step instructions

1. Copy/Paste the configuration file onto USB drive from a previously saved configuration file
on a PC/Laptop. The configuration file must be located in the root directory of the USB
media. The radio will activate the first valid matching configuration file name it detects.

Note: Ensure the configuration file name matches criteria noted in USB Automatic
Configuration Activation 248 in Part H - Feature Detail.

2. Insert the USB drive into the USB host port of a Trio Q Data Radio.

130 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part G - Quick Start Guide

3. Power-cycle the radio (if the radio is already in a factory default state) or depress the
factory default switch to activate the factory default process. See Factory Default 113 .

Factory Default/Boot-up LED Indications

Indication (Flashing COM 1 COM 2 Sync / Pwr / Tx Indication

ON/OFF) RxD / TxD RxD / TxD RxSig Length

Factory Default in Green Green Green Green 8 seconds

progress

Radio boot-up Green 60 seconds

Once the radio has completed booting up, the Pwr / Tx LED will become solid GREEN (no
flashing). The radio will then attempt to find a valid radio configuration file on the USB media,
which will take approximately 8 seconds.

When a valid configuration file is detected, the following LED sequence will occur:

Configuration Activation in Progress

Indication (Flashing COM 1 COM 2 Sync / Pwr / Tx Indication

ON/OFF) RxD / TxD RxD / TxD RxSig Length

Configuration in Green Green Green Green 40 seconds

progress

Once the configuration has successfully activated, the Pwr / Tx LED will become solid GREEN
(no flashing), indicating the radio is ready for use.

Verification and possible error conditions

If the USB configuration activation was not successful, then there are several possible
scenarios which may result in an alarm being detected and shown on the LED indications.

If the unique configuration file does not match the model of the target radio, then the
configuration will not be activated and the radio will remain in a factory default state.

If the unique configuration file is correct, but information in the file is missing (e.g.: Security)
then a ‘Configuration Alarm‘will be detected and will be shown on the LED indicators until the
radio is power cycled.

Detected alarms are shown on the LED indicators as a sequence of all flashing red LEDs
followed by a pattern of green LEDs shown below.

02/2022 131
Part G - Quick Start Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

QB / QP

Alarm Type Pwr / Tx Sync / RxSig COM 1 COM 2

RxD / TxD RxD / TxD

Configuration alarm Green Green

detected

QR Half Duplex Remote

Alarm Type COM 1 COM 2 Sync / RxSig Pwr / Tx

RxD / TxD RxD / TxD

Configuration alarm Green Green

detected

7.5 Radio Access Control

This quick start guide describes the key steps required to:
· Configure an authenticator 133

· Onboard a radio as a supplicant 134

· Migrate 256-bit AES PSK Encryption to 256-bit AES-GCM Encryption 140

· Replacing an authenticator 149

The example below shows a typical setup with one Entry Point radio configured as Authenticator
and Remote radios configured as Supplicants.

132 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part G - Quick Start Guide

Configuring an authenticator

The following steps outline the process for enabling radio authentication after a radio has had
other operational parameters configured. In this example, the Entry Point to be enabled as the
Authenticator has previously been configured as per the Wizard -> Point to Multipoint ->
Entry Point, and the remotes are also configured in a working RF system.

For more details about configuring Authentication in Hot Standby radio types, see Centralized
User Access Control 312 in Part H - Feature Detail.

Step 1

a. Start a web browser and enter the IP address of the authenticator radio into the URL.

As shown in the diagram above, this is 192.168.2.17.

b. Navigate to the Security section of the WUI by clicking Setup -> Security. In the Radio
Access Control subsection, configure Encryption = AES-GCM.

c. Configure Role as Authenticator.

d. In the Recovery Password field, configure a Recovery Password and record the
password in a secure place.

For more details about the Recovery Password, see Radio Access Control - Operation -
Recovery Password 319 in Part H - Feature Detail.

02/2022 133
Part G - Quick Start Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

e. In the top-right corner, click Activate Configuration to save and activate the changes.

This completes the configuration of an authenticator (Entry Point). The authenticator is now
ready for supplicants (remotes) to be added to the radio network.

Onboard a radio as a supplicant

· Onboarding of supplicant using Zero Touch 134

· Onboarding of supplicant using One Time Password 137

Onboarding of supplicant using Zero Touch

The following steps outline the process for onboarding a remote radio (supplicant) using the
Zero Touch process via USB memory device. The Zero Touch process involves an invitation file
that is generated on the authenticator that includes a radio configuration for the supplicant. The
serial number and configuration file need to be supplied during the invitation generation
process.

In this example, we use a remote configuration file generated by the Wizard -> Point to
Multipoint -> Remote.

For more details about the onboarding process, see Radio Access Control 316 in Part H -
Feature Detail.

Note: Before starting these steps, ensure that you have configured the Entry Point in the PTMP
Wizard radio as an authenticator.

For more details, see Configuring an authenticator 133 .

Step 1: Obtain the serial number of the Supplicant radio

a. Obtain the serial number of the radio, which is to be onboarded as a Supplicant.

Note: The serial number is applied in the generation of the invitation file making it unique.

Step 2: Obtain or create a configuration file for the Supplicant radio

a. Obtain a configuration file for the remote radio that is compatible with the authenticator (or
create one).

The remote radio IP (or WAN/LAN IP) in the configuration file must be unique. In this
example, we will use a saved configuration file after applying the Wizard.

Step 3: Generate a configuration with an invitation for the Supplicant radio

134 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part G - Quick Start Guide

a. On the Authenticator radio, navigate to Maintenance -> Radio Access Control and in the
Invitation subsection, select Zero Touch.

b. Input the Serial Number of the Supplicant radio and select a saved configuration file to use
in the generation of an invitation file.

c. Click Invite and Save to generate a combined configuration and One Time Password (OTP)
invitation file that will be stored on the authenticator radio.

The invitation file contains a radio configuration for the supplicant radio, and other
information such as One Time Password and public keys, required during the onboarding
process.

The serial number of the supplicant will be added to the Radio Access Control List of the
Authenticator with Authorization = Invited and State = Pending.

d. The configuration with invitation file should now be saved for future use in onboarding of the
supplicant radio. The invitation file can be:

· Saved to a USB memory device inserted into the authenticator radio, or

· Saved as a ZIP file onto a PC (via the web browser)

In this example, the invitation file will be saved on a USB memory device.

e. Click Copy Invites to USB to download all combined configuration and OTP invitation files
from the Authenticator to the USB memory device for use in Step 3.

For more details about the Invitation file, see Radio Access Control 316 in Part H - Feature
Detail.

Step 4: Onboard the supplicant with the invitation

a. Insert the USB memory device with the configuration with invitation file into the supplicant
radio in a factory default state and power cycle the radio to initiate an USB Automatic
Configuration Activation.

02/2022 135
Part G - Quick Start Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

· This process will take several minutes to complete.

· The serial number in the file name must match the serial number of the radio for the
onboarding process to be successful.

· The radio must be in a factory default state for the USB memory device with invitation file
to be detected, loaded and activated upon power cycle.

For more details on the factory default process, see Factory Default 113 .

For more details on the USB Automatic Configuration Activation, see USB Automatic
Configuration Activation 248 .

After the USB Automatic Configuration Activation has completed, the remote radio will complete
the onboarding process with the authenticator. The Authenticator will automatically transfer the
required security configuration to the Supplicant and then the Supplicant will activate these
changes. This process can take approximately 5 minutes. Wait until the process is complete.

Once the onboarding process is complete, the Sync LED should be flashing green indicating
successful onboarding. Verification of successful onboarding can be made by observing the
Radio Access Control List in the supplicant WUI/TUI by navigating to Maintenance ->
Security.

When onboarding using this method, the Authenticator transfers security settings to the
Supplicant. The Supplicant goes through a configuration cycle when applying those settings.

The serial number of the Authenticator radio will be added to the Radio Access Control List of
the Supplicant with State = Synced and Authorization = Authorized. If the State = Syncing, then
the onboarding process is not yet complete. If the State = Error, onboarding has been
unsuccessful.

Check the event log for more details of the onboarding process or errors and see Radio Access
Control - Diagnostics 324 in Part H - Feature Detail.

Step 5: Confirmation of onboarding on Authenticator

Verification of successful onboarding can also be made by observing that the entry for the new
supplicant radio has State = Synced and Authorization = Authorized in the RACL of the
Authenticator radio.

It is also recommended to check the Network List in the Authenticator radio as shown below.
The Network List is available by navigating to Monitoring -> Network List.

A number of events will be logged in the authenticator radio when the supplicant radio onboards
successfully.

136 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part G - Quick Start Guide

Onboarding of supplicant using One Time Password (OTP)

The following steps outline the process for generating a One Time Password (OTP) invitation
and then onboarding a supplicant radio. This process only works with a radio that is already
configured and operating on the radio network, but without authentication enabled. The invitation
file is generated on the authenticator prior to onboarding, using the serial number of the remote
radio to be onboarded. In this example, we use a remote radio which is already running a
configuration generated by the Wizard -> Point to Multipoint -> Remote.

For more details about the onboarding process, see Radio Access Control - Operation -
Onboarding 317 in Part H - Feature Detail.

Note: Before starting these steps, ensure that you have configured the Entry Point in the PTMP
Wizard radio as an authenticator.

For more details, see Configuring an authenticator 133 .

Step 1: Obtain the serial number of the Supplicant radio

a. Obtain the serial number of the radio, which is to be onboarded as a Supplicant.

Note: The serial number is applied in the generation of the OTP file making it unique.

Step 2: Generate an invite for the Supplicant radio

a. On the Authenticator radio, navigate to Maintenance -> Radio Access Control and in the
Invitation subsection, select One Time Password.

b. Input the Serial Number of the Supplicant radio to use in the generation of an invitation file.

c. Click Invite and Save to generate the Invitation file with One Time Password (OTP).

The invitation will also be downloaded to your web browser download folder.

This file is to be uploaded to the Supplicant radio to allow it to onboard with this Authenticator
radio. This file will be named “Trio_Q_123456_InvitationOnly.cfg”where 123456 is the serial
number of the Supplicant radio

d. Save the invitation file for future use in onboarding of the supplicant radio.

02/2022 137
Part G - Quick Start Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

The invitation file can be:

· Saved to a USB memory device inserted into the authenticator radio or

· Saved as a ZIP file onto a PC (via the web browser)

In this example, the invitation file will be saved on the PC via the web browser.

e. Click Download All Invites to download a ZIP file containing all OTP invites from the
Authenticator.

f. Unzip the Invites to a folder for use in Step 3.

For more details about the Invitation file, see Radio Access Control 316 in Part H - Feature
Detail.

Step 3: Onboard the supplicant with the invitation

a. Start a web browser and insert the IP address of the supplicant radio into the URL.

As shown in the diagram above, this is 192.168.2.18.

b. Navigate to Monitoring -> Network List and verify that the radio can communicate with the
Authenticator radio by checking the presence of Authenticator radio’
s serial number in the
list.

c. Navigate to Maintenance -> Radio Access Control and upload the file obtained from Step 2
onto this radio in One-Time Password Based Onboarding under the Onboarding
section.

d. Choose the file, click Open, and then click Upload.

The serial number of the Supplicant will be added to the Radio Access Control List of the
Authenticator with Authorization = Invited and State = Pending

e. Navigate to Security under the Setup page and select Radio Authentication Role as
Supplicant.

f. Input the IP address of Authenticator radio in Authenticator IP field.

138 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part G - Quick Start Guide

g. Activate the configuration by clicking Activate Configuration in the top-right corner of the
web page.

Once the onboarding process is complete, the Sync LED should be flashing green indicating
successful onboarding. Verification of successful onboarding can be made by observing the
Radio Access Control List in the supplicant WUI/TUI by navigating to Maintenance ->
Security.

The serial number of the Authenticator radio will be added to the Radio Access Control List of
the Supplicant with State = Synced and Authorization = Authorized. If the State = Syncing, then
the onboarding process is not yet complete. If the State = Error, onboarding has been
unsuccessful.

Check the event log for more details and see Radio Access Control - Diagnostics 324 in Part H -
Feature Detail.

Step 4: Confirmation of onboarding on Authenticator radio

After about one minute, the Radio Access Control List on the Authenticator radio will display
Authorized.

An event will be logged in Authenticator radio when the Supplicant radio onboards with One-time
Password.

02/2022 139
Part G - Quick Start Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Step 5: Confirmation of Onboarding on Supplicant Radio

Verification of successful onboarding can also be made by observing the entry for the new
supplicant radio has State = Synced and Authorization = Authorized in the RACL of the
Authenticator radio.

It is also recommended to check the Network List in the Authenticator radio as shown below.
The Network List is available by navigating to Monitoring -> Network List.

A number of events will be logged in the authenticator radio when the supplicant radio onboards
successfully.

Migrating 256-bit AES PSK Encryption to 256-bit AES-GCM Encryption

The following steps outline the process for migrating a system from legacy 256-bit AES pre-
shared key encryption to 256-bit AES-GCM encryption with authentication. This process
assumes the legacy radio system is configured and operating.

For more details about encryption, see Radio Access Control - Operation - Encryption 317 in
Part H - Feature Detail.

Step 1: Configuring an authenticator

In this step, we configure an authenticator in the Entry Point radio of the existing radio system
using 256-bit AES pre-shared key encryption.

140 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part G - Quick Start Guide

a. Start a web browser and insert the IP address of the authenticator radio into the URL. As
shown in the diagram above, this is 192.168.2.17.

b. Navigate to the Security section of the WUI by clicking Setup -> Security.

c. In the Encryption subsection, confirm Encryption = AES and Shared Key is specified as
shown below. These Encryption parameters do not change at the this point of the process.
At the end of the process, Encryption shall be changed to AES-GCM.

d. In the Radio Access Control subsection, configure Role as Authenticator.

02/2022 141
Part G - Quick Start Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

e. In the Recovery Password field, configure a Recovery Password and record the
password in a secure place.

For more details about the Recovery Password, see Radio Access Control - Operation -
Recovery Password 319 in Part H - Feature Detail.

f. In the top-right corner, click Activate Configuration to save and activate the change as
shown below.

This completes the configuration of an authenticator in a legacy 256-bit AES pre-shared key
system. The authenticator is now ready for supplicants (remotes) to be added to the radio
network.

Step 2: Onboarding of supplicant using One Time Password

a. Obtain the serial number of the radio, which is to be onboarded as a Supplicant.

Note: The serial number is applied in the generation of the OTP file making it unique.

b. Generate an invite for the Supplicant radio:

i. On the Authenticator radio, navigate to Maintenance -> Radio Access Control and in the
Invitation subsection, select One Time Password.

ii. Input the Serial Number of the Supplicant radio to use in the generation of an invitation
file.

iii. Click Invite and Save to generate the Invitation file with One Time Password (OTP).

This file is to be uploaded to the Supplicant radio to allow it to onboard with this
Authenticator radio. This file will be named “Trio_Q_123456_InvitationOnly.cfg”where
123456 is the serial number of the Supplicant radio

iv. Save the invitation file for future use in onboarding of the supplicant radio. The invitation
file can be:

· Saved to a USB memory device inserted into the authenticator radio or

· Saved as a ZIP file onto a PC (via the web browser)

In this example, the invitation file will be saved on the PC via the web browser.

v. Click Download All Invites to download a ZIP file containing all OTP invites from the
Authenticator.

vi. Unzip the Invites to a folder for use in Step 3.

For more details about the Invitation file, see Radio Access Control 316 in Part H - Feature
Detail.

142 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part G - Quick Start Guide

Step 3: Onboard the supplicant with the invitation

In this step, we onboard the supplicant with the One Time Password Invitation. This example will
use the Telnet method to connect to the remote radio (supplicants) TUI. The invitation is
transferred via TFTP.

a. Open Telnet (or SSH) and establish a session with the supplicant.

b. Select D) for Maintenance.

02/2022 143
Part G - Quick Start Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

c. Select A) for Radio Access Control List.

The invitation file is to be transferred to the remote (Supplicant) using the TFTP file transfer
feature. SCP file transfer is also available.

d. Select A) for Configure Transfer Mode.

144 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part G - Quick Start Guide

e. Configure the Server IP where the TFTP server is located. Select G) to accept these
changes.

f. Select F) for One-Time Password Invitation.

02/2022 145
Part G - Quick Start Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

g. Select L) to load the OTP invitation from the TFTP server.

The Server file name is automatically generated. Check that invitation file of the same name
exists on the TFTP server before loading.

h. Once the One Time Password invitation is transferred from the TFTP server, the
authenticator is added to the supplicants RACL as with Authorization = Invited and State =
Pending.

i. Return to the main menu, and navigate to Configuration -> Security (J).

146 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part G - Quick Start Guide

j. Configure Role = Supplicant and Authenticator IP = 192.168.2.17. Return to the main menu
and activate the configuration changes by selecting “T”.

Once the onboarding process is complete, the Sync LED should be flashing green
indicating successful onboarding. The onboarding process can take up to 5 minutes.
Verification of successful onboarding can be made by observing the Radio Access Control
List in the supplicant.

The serial number of the Authenticator radio will be added to the Radio Access Control List
of the Supplicant with State = Synced and Authorization = Authorized. If the State =
Syncing, then the onboarding process is not yet complete. If the State = Error, onboarding
has been unsuccessful.

Check the event log for more details and see Radio Access Control - Diagnostics 324 in Part
H - Feature Detail.

k. After about five minutes, the Radio Access Control List on the Authenticator radio will display
Authorized, as shown in the image below.

Verification of successful onboarding can also be made by observing the entry for the new
supplicant radio has State = Synced and Authorization = Authorized in the RACL of the
Authenticator radio.

It is also recommended to check the Network List in the Authenticator radio as shown below.
The Network List is available by navigating to Monitoring -> Network List.

An event will be logged in Authenticator radio when the Supplicant radio onboards with One
Time Password.

02/2022 147
Part G - Quick Start Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Step 4: Transition of radios to AES-GCM Encryption

In this step, we transition the radios from 256-bit AES PSK encryption to 256-bit AES-GCM
Encryption. Upon completion the radio system will be operating, as per the diagram shown
below.

a. Browse to the Authenticator radio and configure Encryption = AES-GCM.

b. Activate the configuration.

c. Open Telnet (or SSH) and establish a session with the Supplicant.

d. Select “J”to Navigate to the Setup -> Security.

e. Configure Encryption = AES-GCM.

f. Return to the main menu and activate the configuration.

Once the onboarding process is complete, the Sync LED should be flashing green indicating
successful onboarding. The onboarding process can take up to 5 minutes. Verification of
successful onboarding can be made by observing the Radio Access Control List in the
supplicant.

The serial number of the Authenticator radio will be added to the Radio Access Control List of
the Supplicant with State = Synced and Authorization = Authorized. If the State = Syncing, then
the onboarding process is not yet complete. If the State = Error, onboarding has been
unsuccessful.

Check the event log for more details and see Radio Access Control - Diagnostics 324 in Part H -
Feature Detail.

Verification of successful onboarding can also be made by observing the entry for the new
supplicant radio has State = Synced and Authorization=Authorized in the RACL of the
Authenticator radio.

148 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part G - Quick Start Guide

It is also recommended to check the Network List in the Authenticator radio as shown below.
The Network List is available by navigating to Monitoring -> Network List.

The migration process is now complete, and the radio system is using 256-bit AES-GCM.

Replacing an authenticator

The following steps outline the process for replacing an authenticator in a network of
authenticated supplicants.

Before replacing an authenticator, save the authenticator’

s recovery password, RACL and the
full configuration (standard with sensitive data).

Step 1: Configuring the replacement authenticator

In this step, we configure a factory default radio.

a. Obtain the replacement radio and ensure that it is of the same type as the radio to be
replaced.

b. Factory default the radio (if not already in a factory default state).

For more details on the factory default process, see Factory Default 113 .

c. Connect and power up the radio.

d. Ensure the PC has an IP address of 192.168.2.1 with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.

e. Start a web browser on the PC with the IP address 192.168.2.15 in the URL.

f. Navigate to Setup -> Save/Load.

g. Click Choose File, select the saved configuration, and click Open.

h. Click Load to load the selected configuration to the radio.

i. Make note of the IP address and ensure the PC also has an appropriate IP alias within the
same network.

j. Click Activate Configuration and wait for the configuration to complete.

Once the configuration has completed, the web page should reload the setup page.

02/2022 149
Part G - Quick Start Guide Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Step 2: Restoring the RACL

In this step, we load all authenticated supplicants into the replacement authenticator.

a. Navigate to Maintenance -> Radio Access Control.

b. Under Radio Access Control List Save/Load click Choose File, select the saved RACL,
and click Open.

c. Click Upload to restore the RACL to the replacement radio.

Once the RACL has been restored, the authenticated supplicants will appear in the Radio
Access Control List with each supplicant displaying Authorized and Syncing.

Step 3: Entering the Recovery Password

In this step, we use the recovery password to re-authenticate the supplicants to the replacement
authenticator.

a. While still in the Radio Access Control section, enter the recovery password into the
Recovery Password text box.

b. Click Apply to commit the recovery password.

The replacement authenticator radio is now ready.

Step 4: Replace the authenticator

a. Replace the original authenticator radio with the newly-configured authenticator radio.

b. Wait for the process to complete.

Once the process has completed, the supplicants in the Radio Access Control List should
show Authorized and Synced.

At this point, the recovery password of the authenticator should be changed:

a. Navigate to Setup -> Security.

150 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part G - Quick Start Guide

b. Once the recovery password has been changed, click Activate Configuration to apply the
changes.

c. Store the new recovery password, along with the original RACL and configuration, in a
secure location.

02/2022 151
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

8 Part H - Feature Detail

· System Topologies and Operating Modes 152

· Efficiency and Bandwidth 161

· Connectivity 188

· Ease of Use 202

· Security 311

· Low Power Mode 355

8.1 System Topologies and Operating Modes

· Network Modes 152

8.1.1 Network Modes

In this section, some shorthand notations are used for simplification.

· 192.168.1.1/24 is the equivalent of an IP address of 192.168.1.1 with mask 255.255.255.0.
“/24”is a shorthand method of referring to the mask size, as per industry conventions with IP
routing.
· 192.168.1.0/24 is the CIDR format for referring to all IPs between 192.168.1.1 and
192.168.1.254. 192.168.1.0 is known as the network address, but there is no actual device
with a unique IP of 192.168.1.0
See:
· Transparent bridge mode 152

· IP routing mode 154

· Mixed Bridge/Router Mode 160

Transparent bridge mode

· Operation 152

· Configuration 153

Operation

Trio Q Data Radios can be configured to operate in a transparent bridge mode. This mode
transports all data as layer 2 Ethernet traffic over the radio network. Each radio will behave like
a layer 2 Ethernet switch, transparently forwarding traffic, based on rules, dynamically
determined from device MAC addresses. When enabled, automatic Peer-to-Peer repeating will
detect destination MAC addresses which need to be repeated on the radio channel. Destination
MAC addresses which existing on the wire (Ethernet Ports) are not repeated, saving radio
network bandwidth. Each radio requires an IP address and mask to be configured for a user to
access radio management features (web server/Telnet/diagnostics/etc.).

152 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

The example below shows a typical PTMP bridge mode network configuration. The entry point
has peer to peer repeating enabled so that remote devices can communicate peer to peer via
the Entry Point if required.

The example below shows a typical PTMP via Repeater bridge mode network configuration. The
Repeater has peer to peer repeating enabled as all traffic must be repeated, including peer to
peer traffic between remote sites via the Repeater.

Configuration

Transparent bridge mode can be configured via Setup -> Radio in the System Parameters
subsection as shown below. Where repeating is required, Peer to Peer Repeat needs to be
enabled only in the Repeater.

02/2022 153
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

IP Address (LAN) and Subnet Mask can be configured via Setup -> Network in the Ethernet
subsection as shown below.

IP routing mode

· Operation 154

· Configuration 158

Operation

Introduction

Trio Q Data Radios can be configured to operate in an IP routing mode. This mode transports
all data as layer 3 Ethernet traffic over the radio network. Each radio behaves as a network
gateway for its corresponding subnet. This allows a network designer to segment a wide area IP
network (WAN) into smaller subnets, which minimizes the amount of over the air radio traffic.
Since each radio behaves as a router, traffic will be routed (and repeated) based on user
defined IP routing rules.

The diagram below demonstrates the configuration of a PTMP IP routing network. In this
example, the Host application generates a SCADA poll for RTU A and the following routing
decisions take place:

1. The host application generates an IP packet (i.e. the poll) to a destination IP of 192.168.2.2
(i.e. RTU A).

2. The computer running the host application determines the destination IP 192.168.2.2 is
outside of its local subnet (defined as the 192.168.1.0 network due to the /24 subnet mask)
and forwards the packet to the gateway (i.e. The Entry Point radio).

3. The Entry Point radio determines the destination IP 192.168.2.2 is outside of its local subnet
(defined as the 192.168.1.0 network due to the /24 subnet mask) and forwards the packet
based on its configured route rules. The route rule that applies for packets destined to the
192.168.2.0 network (i.e. Remote A & RTU A) results in the Entry Point radio forwarding the
packet to Remote A.

Note: When an IP route rule is defined in a radio, the next hop route is defined with the
WAN IP of the destination radio, not the LAN IP.

4. Remote A receives the packet and determines 192.168.2.2 belongs to its local LAN subnet
and forwards the packet to its Ethernet interface where RTU A is connected.

5. RTU A responds to the poll request, with a SCADA response with a destination IP of
192.168.1.10 (i.e. the host).

154 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

6. The same process as outlined in steps 1 to 4 occurs for the SCADA response from RTU A
to the host application.

Default Gateways

An alternative method to using a single static route is to define a default gateway. A default
gateway is essentially an open single static route; i.e. a default gateway with a configured value
of 192.168.2.1 is the equivalent of a static route: 0.0.0.0 192.168.2.1 – which means all traffic is
forwarded to the gateway. When a radio in an IP routing network has only one static route rule,
a default gateway can be defined instead. Configuration of a default gateway can sometimes be
an easier way to define a common route.

Default gateways can be configured together with static routes, and when this occurs, the static
routes take precedence over the default gateway. If there is no matching static route for the IP
packet, the IP packet is forwarded to the default gateway. Some caution needs to be applied to
the use of default gateways, as they are open, and not bound by a specific network address
range. For example, the connection of a laptop to a radio with a default gateway might result in
DNS, network discovery, and other unintended unicast IP packets being forwarded onto the
radio channel. When using default gateways, it is recommended to enable the firewall and
define rules to limit the type of IP packets that can be transmitted by the radio.

In the diagram below, the single static route in Remote A and Remote B have been replaced
with a configured default gateway.

More examples can be found in the IP routing - Configuration 158 .

02/2022 155
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Repeating

IP routing can also be applied when repeating is required. In the diagram below, a variety of
static routes are applied to forward IP packets (i.e. repeat them) where required. Note that the
Entry Point may be configured with a default gateway or a summarized route (i.e.
192.168.0.0/16). Both techniques avoid the need to configure 4 separate routes, one for each
remote subnet.

156 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Multicast Routing

IP routing requires additional route rules when forwarding multicast packets such as traffic from
the serial device server. In the diagram below, multicast traffic from the serial device server in
the Entry Point radio is routed from the LAN to the WAN with the “224.240.1.1 LAN WAN”static
route rule. An opposite rule is required in the remote radio to forward multicast IP packets from
the WAN to the LAN. In this example, IP packets from the serial device server in the remote
radios are unicast (to the Entry Point IP) not multicast, so these packets do not require special
rules in the return direction. Additional examples of configuring IP routing with the serial device
server can be found in Serial Device Server 189 .

Multicast Repeating

IP routing requires additional route rules when forwarding multicast packets such as traffic from
the serial device server. In the diagram below, multicast traffic from the serial device server in
the Entry Point radio is routed from the LAN to the WAN with the “224.240.1.1 LAN WAN”static
route rule. An opposite rule is required in the remote radio to forward multicast IP packets from
the WAN to the LAN. In this example, IP packets from the serial device server in the remote
radios are unicast (to the Entry Point IP) not multicast, so these packets do not require special
rules in the return direction. Additional examples of configuring IP routing with the serial device
server can be found in Serial Device Server 189 .

02/2022 157
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Configuration

IP routing mode can be configured via Setup -> Radio in the System Parameters subsection
as shown below.

158 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

IP Address (LAN) and Subnet Mask can be configured via Setup -> Network in the Ethernet
subsection as shown below.

Once IP routing mode is enabled, WAN IP and Subnet and Static Routes can be configured via
Setup -> IP Routing.

To add a new route to the table, click “+”. This will add a new, empty table entry, which will need
to be manually populated with a static route. Routes must be configured in one of the formats
specified below.

Formatting a static route

There are multiple formatting methods in which static route rules can be written.

Routing rules may define a forwarding path to the next route or to radio interface (LAN or WAN)
as shown in the diagrams previously shown in this section. Parameters shown as <parameter>
are mandatory. Parameters shown as [parameter] are optional.

Example 1: Route Format: <Unique IP Address> <Next Route IP/LAN/WAN> [! Comment]

Example: 192.168.1.20 10.10.10.1 !Route back to SCADA host

Example 2: Route Format: <Network Address> <Netmask> <Next Route IP/LAN/WAN> [!

Comment]

Example: 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1

Example 3: Route Format: <Network Address/CIDR> <Next Route IP/LAN/WAN> [! Comment]

Example: 192.168.1.0/24 10.10.10.1

Example 4: Route Format: <Multicast Address> [FROM WAN/LAN] <Next Route LAN/WAN> [!
Comment]

Example: 224.240.1.1 LAN WAN ! Forward multicast from LAN Serial device server to
WAN

02/2022 159
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Example: 224.240.1.1 WAN LAN ! Forward multicast from WAN to LAN for Serial
device server

Note: In one multicast route rule, there may only be one occurrence of LAN.

To enable WAN to WAN repeating, the Forward Broadcast option must be enabled.

Mixed Bridge/Router Mode

· Operation 160

· Configuration 161

Operation

As of firmware 2.6.0, Trio Q Data Radios in a radio network can be configured to be a mixture
of bridge and IP routing radios. This topology allows the routing functionality to be split from a
radio to an external router to avoid redundant routing configurations (as with a pure IP routing
network operating with an external router).

In this mode, all radios are accessible via its primary IP (bridged mode) or WAN IP (router
mode) without additional routes. Routes are still required to access network addresses that are
outside the bridge and WAN IP subnet.

In the example below, the Bridge/WAN IP networks are the same, and can be reached from the
host with minimal configuration. These include all radios, and any devices attached to a bridged
radio. The following methods may be used to access devices on the router radio’ s segregated
LAN network:
· Using Port Forwarding, devices can be reached via the router’
s WAN IP
· Using 1:1 NAT, devices can be reached via a 1:1 NAT IP address that is on the Bridge/WAN
subnet
· In non-NAT configurations or using 1:1 NAT with an address outside of the Bridge/WAN
subnet, static routes would be required at the external router, the repeating router, and the
end router

160 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Configuration

In addition to normal configuration of Bridge and IP Routing for the respective radios, the
repeating radio needs to have the following:
· Bridge mode with Peer to Peer Repeat enabled under Setup -> Radio

· IP Routing mode with Forward Broadcast enabled under Setup -> IP Routing

8.2 Efficiency and Bandwidth

· Dynamic Speed Selection (DSS) 162

· Channel Management 168

· Automatic Repeat reQuests (ARQs) 176

· Robust Header Compression (RoHC) 178

02/2022 161
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

· Quality of Service 180

· E-Series Emulation Mode 186

8.2.1 Dynamic Speed Selection (DSS)

· Operation 162

· Configuration 166

· Diagnostics 167

Operation

· RF data rate vs RF sensitivity 162

· Dynamic Speed Selection (DSS) 163

· DSS policies 164

RF data rate vs RF sensitivity

Trio Q Data Radios support a variety of different RF data rates. As the RF data rate reduces,
the RF sensitivity improves and therefore a larger service radius (or range) is achievable.

For more details on RF data rates and RF sensitivities, see Appendix - Specifications 398 .

Received signal strength decreases as distance increases from the transmitting radio. In PTMP
radio systems with a fixed RF data rate, the fastest RF data rate that can be chosen while still
maintaining reliable operation is limited by the remote site with the weakest received signal
strength (typically the site furthest away from the transmitter).

Reliable operation is a function of fade margin and in most designs 20 dB of fade margin is the
design target (i.e. the minimum acceptable receive signal is 20 dB higher than the 1x10-6 BER
RF sensitivity). The diagram below demonstrates the combination of reduced service radius for
increasing RF data rate while maintaining a minimum fade margin.

162 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Dynamic Speed Selection (DSS)

Trio Q Data Radios support Dynamic Speed Selection (DSS), which is a feature that selects the
fastest possible over the air RF data rate while maintaining reliable decoding of received data
packets. Reliability is measured (or predicted) using a variety of user configurable policies. This
improves performance of the radio channel by minimizing lost polls and the need for retries at
the SCADA protocol level. By reducing the RF data rate, the sensitivity of the radio is increased
by up to 18 dB to overcome challenging propagation environments, noise or interference.

DSS can be defined as having the following characteristics:

· It is applied between any two radios for unicast transmitted data packets
· It is applied to transmissions in both entry point to remote, and remote to entry point
transmissions
Note: A reduction in RF data rate for the entry point to remote transmission does not result in a
reduction of RF data rate in the remote to base transmission (or vice versa).
· It can be configured to use a variety of policies (i.e. metrics) for selection of RF data rate
(ARQ retries, SNR (signal to noise ratio), or RSSI
· It can be bound by user configurable minimum and maximum RF data rates
· It will operate with forward error correction (FEC), when enabled

Note: Broadcast and Multicast packets are transmitted at the Minimum Configured RF data rate.

02/2022 163
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

The diagram above demonstrates how DSS operates. A PTMP radio system is designed with a
minimum of 20 dB fade margin at the slowest RF data rate. The entry point radio chooses the
fastest possible RF data rate while still maintaining reliable decoding of received data packets at
the remote radio. DSS supports independent RF data rate selection on a per remote basis. Full
fade margin is not required at the fastest RF data rate, providing that reliable decoding of
received data packets is achieved.

The above diagram demonstrates how DSS reacts to reduced signal strength and degraded
reliability. In the event of a reduced signal strength, DSS will decrease the RF data rate until
decoding of received data packets at the remote radio is reliable. Overall reliability is always
bound by the design target of 20 dB fade margin at the slowest RF data rate. If reliability of
decoding received data packets improves, DSS will increase the RF data rate.

DSS policies

Dynamic speed selection (DSS) provides three different user configurable policies that
determine what RF data rate will be selected for the next transmitted data packet.

164 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

RSSI based

DSS RF data rate is determined from the last known received signal strength (RSSI) of a packet
received from the target remote radio that the transmission is destined for. The transmitting
radio maintains a historical list of last known RSSI for any radio it receives data from. The
fastest RF data rate will be chosen if the RSSI is greater than the 1E-6 BER (Bit Error Rate)
threshold (as defined in the datasheet). If the RSSI is lower than the threshold, a slower RF data
rate will be chosen where the RSSI is higher than that RF data rates BER threshold.

The RSSI policy allows the user to over-ride the threshold with a RSSI Offset, which adds an
additional user-defined level (in dB) to the datasheet BER thresholds. ARQs are recommended
to be enabled when using this policy. The RSSI policy is the only option available when
operating in CPM mode and is also available in QAM mode for migration from CPM to QAM.

ARQ based (Tx Retry)

DSS RF data rate is determined by an average of the ARQ retry rate as measured over the last
100 transmitted packets. If the currently selected RF data rate results in ARQ retries, DSS will
select a slower RF data rate. The ARQ policy attempts to maintain an ARQ retry rate of between
zero and 1%.

This policy is only available in QAM mode and requires ARQ retries to be enabled. ARQ is the
recommended policy to enable at the Entry Point of a PTMP system, optimizing the RF data
rate to each remote radio.

SNR based

DSS RF data rate is determined on the measured signal to noise (SNR) ratio of previous
packets arriving at the receiving radio (normally an Entry Point). The Entry Point radio is
configured as a Dynamic Beacon Manager, where it transmits periodic beacons that contain
information such as the path loss and noise floor that allow a remote to determine the SNR ratio
of its transmitted packets to the Entry Point.

This method takes into account both the path loss asymmetry and the potentially raised noise
floor at the destination. ARQ retries need to be enabled in remote radios. SNR is the
recommended Dynamic Policy to enable at the remote radio, optimizing the RF data rate to the
base station from each remote radio.

As of firmware 2.6.0 onwards, both SNR and ARQ policy is augmented with EVM (Error Vector
Magnitude) measurements at the data packet receiver. The intention is to adjust transmitted
speed of packets preemptively to avoid packet loss thus resulting in a retry. When a radio
receives a unicast data packet it measures the EVM of the received packet. The Acknowledge
sent for succeeding data packets will indicate that the sender should increase, decrease, or
leave the speed the same. This enhancement also improves performance where paths are
asymmetrical and/or affected by multipath effects. This augmentation makes ARQ policy
suitable in both upstream and downstream directions.

The diagram below demonstrates a typical configuration of DSS in a PTMP system.

02/2022 165
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

In CSMA (Carrier-Sense Multiple Access) systems the Dynamic Beacon ID needs to be

enabled as Manager or Remote when operating in digital or carrier detect modes.

The diagram below demonstrates a typical configuration of DSS in a PTMP via multiple repeater
system. In TGCM, the Dynamic Beacon ID is set automatically and is not user-configurable.
The event log will indicate when the radio has synchronized with a manager/repeater.

Configuration

Configuration of DSS is available via Setup -> Radio in the modulation section as shown in the
diagram below.

166 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

DSS is enabled by configuring the Radio Data Rate to Dynamic. The Dynamic Policy is
configured to ARQ, RSSI, or SNR, as required.

Diagnostics

To check the Dynamic Beacon State, navigate to the Monitoring -> Summary page in the web
interface. Searching or Locked is displayed.

A variety of diagnostics parameters are available showing information pertinent to DSS. The
type of diagnostics information and the interpretation will depend on the configuration of the
radio Dynamic Beacon Mode (Manager or Remote), and Dynamic Speed policy (RSSI, ARQ or
SNR). The most useful diagnostics can be found in the Network List (Monitoring -> Network
List).

Diagnostic parameters that are related to DSS are:

· Serial Number/IP Address/Radio Name: The identification of the neighboring radio that this
row of diagnostics information relates to.
· Tx Data Rate: The data rate of the last packet transmitted to this specific neighboring radio.
· Rx Data Rate: The data rate of the last packet received from this specific neighboring radio.
· Tx Retry Rate: The average rate of Transmit Retried (ARQ) packets to this specific
neighboring radio.
· RSSI (dBm): The receive signal strength of the last packet received from the neighboring
radio.
· RSSI avg. (dBm): The average RSSI of the last twenty (20) packets received from the
neighboring radio.

02/2022 167
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

· SNR (dB): The signal to noise ratio of the last packet received from the neighboring radio.
· Remote Tx Retry Rate (%): The average rate of Transmit Retried (ARQ) packets from this
specific neighboring radio.
· Remote RSSI (dBm) #: The receive signal strength of the last packet received by the
neighboring radio.
· Remote RSSI avg. (dBm) #: The average RSSI of the last twenty (20) packets received by
the neighboring radio.
# = Data received from the diagnostics beacon.

8.2.2 Channel Management

· Token Grant Channel Management (TGCM) 168

· Carrier Detect Channel Management 173

· Digital Channel Management 173

8.2.2.1 Token Grant Channel Management (TGCM)

· Operation 168

· Configuration 172

· Diagnostics 173

Operation

As of firmware version 2.4.0, Token Grant Channel Management (TGCM) is available in half-
duplex radio types only. TGCM is a channel management protocol as opposed to a collision
avoidance protocol. TGCM is ideal for Simplex (single frequency) or two frequency systems
using half duplex radio hardware. TGCM does not use receiver mute (or RSSI) and is therefore
ideal for systems suffering from external interference.

TGCM prevents over-the-air data collisions between remote radios using the concept of a token.
With TGCM, one radio is configured as the TGCM manager and is responsible for granting
permission for each remote to transmit, with only one remote radio granted permission to
transmit at any one time. When a remote radio has data to transmit, the remote radio requests a
token from the TGCM manager. Once the token is granted by the TGCM manager, the remote
has permission to transmit. Within the TGCM channel management protocol, a specific time slot
is allocated for remotes to request tokens. Outside of this time slot, the TGCM manager may
transmit data to remotes, or a remote with a token may transmit data to the manager. Remotes
and Repeaters obtain timing and other information from a regular transmitted TGCM beacon
from the Manager radio.
· Random access 169

· Subscribed access 169

· System topologies 170

168 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Random access

The diagram below demonstrates how TGCM prevents over-the-air data collisions. In this
example, Remote A and Remote B have data to transmit (DATA) to the TGCM Manager, and
both Remote A and Remote B transmit a token request (TR) at the same time. This results in a
collision between TR requests, however, user data remains buffered in Remote A and Remote B
and is not lost. Each remote applies a small amount of random backoff time. Remote B has a
lower random backoff, and transmits another TR, this time without colliding with Remote A. The
Remote B TR is acknowledged with a Token Grant (TG), and Remote B transmits its buffered
user data. The process is repeated for Remote A when its longer random backoff timer expires.

The Token defines who can transmit (i.e. which remote) and the protocol timing defines when
and how long that remote radio can transmit. This prevents collisions between remote radios
transmitting user data.

The TGCM protocol also uses polling of remote radios (known as Dynamic Polling) and a
subscribed access mode, in addition to the random-access mode as described above.
Dynamic Polling is a feature of TGCM in Random Access mode. Dynamic polling uses machine
learning algorithms in the TGCM manager to predict when any one remote radio has a higher
probability of needing access to transmit user data. TGCM elevates the priority of these radios
into a Dynamic Polling list. Radios in the Dynamic Polling List are queried (i.e. polled) for user
data before time is allocated to other radios to request a token.

Radios elevated into the Dynamic Polling list are given priority over radios which are not in the
Dynamic Polling List, which results in lower latency and faster transactional traffic times (Poll-
Response). The algorithm also detects when Remote radios in the Dynamic Polling list no longer
have user data to transmit, after which the radio is demoted (i.e. removed). The algorithm
balances the elevation of Remote radio priority based on fair rules and makes decisions based
on real time traffic demands. Random Access mode is a user configurable option available in
radios configured in TGCM remote mode. Dynamic polling is a user configurable option
available in radios configured in TGCM manager mode.

Subscribed access

When a radio is configured in TGCM remote mode and Subscribed Access is enabled, the
TGCM manager elevates the radio into a Fixed Polling list. This mode is recommended in cases
where all radios regularly have user data to transmit and this mode may result in lower latency
compared to Random Access mode. Remote radios within a network may be configured with a
mixture of Random Access and Subscribed Access modes.

02/2022 169
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

System topologies

TGCM can be configured to implement the following system topologies:

· Point to Point (PTP)

· Point to Multipoint (PTMP)
· Point-to-Multipoint via Repeater (PTMP/R) and
· Point-to-Multipoint via Multiple Repeaters (PTMP via Multiple Repeaters)

The topology of the network is controlled with the configuration of radios as TGCM Manager,
Repeater or Remote, and the configuration of Network and Segment IDs within each radio.

In a PTP or PTMP network topology, as shown in the diagram above, there is one radio (i.e.
Entry Point) configured as the TGCM Manager and the others are TGCM Remotes. TGCM uses
a Network ID (which is a number between 0 and 7) to manage overlapping TGCM systems on
the same frequency in the same area. TGCM remotes will connect only to a TGCM Manager
with the same network ID, and all radios in the same network must have the same Network ID.

170 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

In PTMP/R network topologies, the radio configured as the TGCM manager should be the
repeater to maximize system performance.

In PTMP via Multiple repeater topologies, one or more radios are configured as TGCM
Repeaters as shown in the diagram below. Each Repeater is added to the fixed polling list of the
TGCM manager, and in this way is granted regular channel access to act as a Manager for
remote radios that belong to it. Each repeater must be directly connected to the TGCM
Manager. There may be more than one repeater in the network, but each additional repeater will
cause additional latency as the TGCM Manager needs to grant each repeater time to act as a
Manager to its remotes. PTMP via Multiple Repeater networks should only be configured using
IP routing mode to prevent unnecessary repeating.

Each Repeater in a network (i.e. with a matching Network ID) requires a unique Repeater
Segment ID. Repeaters may be configured with Repeater Segment IDs between 2 and 31.
Segment ID = 1 is reserved for radios communicating with the TGCM Manager. Remotes
associated with a specific Repeater need a matching Segment ID. If more than 30 Repeaters
are required, Repeater Segment IDs may be reused but RF system planning must ensure no
overlap occurs with Repeaters using the same Repeater Segment ID. Repeaters automatically
use Segment ID = 1 for upstream communication and this is not configurable. Only ONE layer
of repeaters is allowed.

02/2022 171
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Configuration

TGCM mode of operation can be configured via Setup -> Radio in the Channel Management
section, as shown in the image below.

172 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Diagnostics

A TGCM (Token Grant Channel Management) Sync alarm is indicated by the Red flashing of
the Sync/RxSig LED at half second intervals. This alarm applies to TGCM Remotes and
Repeaters. This alarm indicates that the radio is not synchronized with TGCM Beacons from a
TGCM Manager. This alarm may occur after power up when the radio has not received a
beacon or after beacons have been lost for more than 30 seconds. This LED alarm will reflect
the TGCM Sync State diagnostics parameter.

The remote radio provides 2 performance metrics available to monitor:

· Mean Wait Time to Transmit (ms): The time taken, for the remote radio to be granted
permission to transmit averaged over the last 100 transmissions
· Random Access Contention (%): The level of contention faced by a remote radio during
the last 100 attempts to request permission to transmit.
If Mean Wait Time to Transmit (ms) increases excessively, the radio channel may be nearing
capacity. Quality of Service bandwidth limits may need to be applied or SCADA polling slowed
down.
If Random Access Contention (%) increases excessively, there may be too many radios
attempting to access the channel at the same time. Quality of Service bandwidth limits may
need to be applied or Max Slots may need to be increased.

8.2.2.2 Carrier Detect Channel Management

Operation

Remote radios in a Carrier Detect channel management system listen for a transmission
(carrier) in progress before beginning a new transmission. If the channel is busy, a random
backoff time period is waited to finish before attempting to access the channel again.

This mode is suitable for both single frequency and two frequency systems.

For two-frequency systems, to facilitate efficient data communication, it is recommended that

the Entry Point radio or Repeater be a full duplex radio (QB/QH) and configured as a channel
access manager. When the channel access manager receives a transmission from a remote, it
activates its own transmitter, indicating to all other remotes that the channel is busy, thereby
mitigating collisions between remote radios, which cannot detect each other’ s transmission.

Note: Carrier Detect in half-duplex radio systems has been superseded by Token Grant
Channel Management (TGCM) 168 .

8.2.2.3 Digital Channel Management

· Operation 173

· Configuration 174

Operation

Remote radios in a Digital channel management system, monitor a channel busy flag in the
digital data stream transmitted from the channel access manager to determine if the channel

02/2022 173
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

access manager is currently busy receiving a transmission from another remote. When the
channel access manager receives a transmission from a remote, it activates its own transmitter
and sets the channel busy flag, indicating to all other remotes the channel is busy. However,
unlike carrier detect mode, if the channel access manager needs to transmit data to remotes, it
can do so, facilitating full duplex communication.

In this mode of operation, remote radios can distinguish between the channel access manager
transmitting data and the channel access manager indicating the channel is busy. Even if the
channel access manager is transmitting data, a remote radio can transmit data back to the
channel access manager. In this way the radio system can fully use the full duplex capabilities
of the Entry Point or the Repeater (channel access manager). The channel busy flag consumes
a small amount of bandwidth in the channel access manager to remote direction. However, as
this direction is one to many, it has negligible impact on radio network capacity.

Digital channel management can be used in two frequency, PTMP, and PTMP/R system
topologies where the Entry Point or Repeater is full duplex. It is not available in simplex systems,
or where the Entry Point/Repeater is half duplex or in PTMP via multiple Repeaters system
topologies.

Digital channel management requires a full duplex manager radio (QB/QH).

Configuration

· Retry after 174

· Delay before 175

· Rx data 'Priority' 176

Retry after

This flow chart shows the operation in a remote radio with the following configuration:
· Channel management mode: Digital
· Backoff Method: Retry After Tx attempt
· Backoff time:
o Max Slots: 10
o Slot Time: 10 ms
· Data Priority: Tx Data

174 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

When data is ready to be transmitted, the remote radio checks the channel busy flag to see if it
is set (i.e. is the manager receiver busy). If the channel busy flag is clear, the data is
transmitted to the manager. If the channel busy flag is set, the radio waits a random time before
trying again.

As it is possible that there may be more than one radio waiting to transmit data to the manager,
a random wait time is applied to avoid two radios waiting at the same time, retrying and then
colliding. There are multiple configurable parameters involved in when the wait time is applied
and what amount of time is waited.
· Backoff Method - Defines ‘
when’a radio will implement the backoff time. In this example, the
backoff method is configured to ‘Retry After Tx Attempt’ . If the channel busy flag is clear, the
remote will transmit data immediately. If the channel busy flag is set, the remote will wait a
random Backoff time and try again.
The Backoff time is calculated by choosing a random number between 1 and ‘ Max Slots’(in this
example 10) and multiplying the number by the ‘ Slot Time’(in this example 10 ms). In any
remote radio, a smaller number of ‘ Max Slots’and ‘Slot Time’can be configured to reduce the
random Backoff time, which will increase the rate at which the radio checks the channel busy
flag. In effect, a radio with a smaller backoff time has a higher probability of transmitting its data
first, in a situation where multiple remote radios are waiting for access the channel.

As the data priority is configured for Tx Data, the radio will transmit data even when an
incoming data packet it being received.

This channel management configuration provides maximum radio channel efficiency and are
recommended when there is multiple asynchronous data traffic on the radio channel.

Delay before

This flow chart shows the operation in a remote radio with the following configuration:

· Channel management mode: Digital

· Backoff Method: Delay Before Tx attempt

02/2022 175
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

· Backoff time:
o Max Slots: 10
o Slot Time: 10 ms
· Data Priority: Tx Data

When data is ready to be transmitted, the remote radio waits a random time before checking
the channel busy flag to see if it is set (i.e. is the manager receiver busy). If the channel busy
flag is clear, the data is transmitted to the manager. If the channel busy flag is set, the radio
repeats the wait time and tries again.

The primary difference when compared to the Retry After example, is that the radio applies the
random wait time before any attempt is made to check the channel busy flag.

This channel management configuration provides maximum radio channel efficiency when there
is synchronous data traffic on the radio channel (i.e. GPS timing, synchronous exception
reports).

Rx data 'Priority'

In PTMP/R system topologies, where the Entry Point radio is half duplex, the configuration of Rx
data priority may be required. This is particularly useful for asynchronous traffic, such as a
combination of SCADA exception reporting and polling. In this scenario, the probability that a
data packet currently being received by the Entry Point radio is for the Entry Point radio and
not for a remote, is high. Therefore, without Rx data priority, incoming packets to the Entry
Point radio would be lost if priority was given to transmitting packets.

8.2.3 Automatic Repeat reQuests (ARQs)

Operation

· Typical data transaction with ARQ enabled 177

176 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

· Automatic retry example 177

Typical data transaction with ARQ enabled

The example below shows the ARQ behavior between a pair of radios during a typical data
transaction.

Automatic retry example

The example below shows the ARQ behavior between a pair of radios when a packet is lost
during a transmission (ARQ =1).

02/2022 177
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

In Digital or Carrier Detect modes of collision avoidance, the radio will wait 500 ms for an
acknowledgment, before sending an automatic retry. In TGCM mode, there is no wait time for
an acknowledgment. It is recommended that the SCADA host poll response time out time is
configured to be a minimum of 3 seconds.

8.2.4 Robust Header Compression (RoHC)

· Operation 178

· Configuration 179

· Diagnostics 180

Operation

· Payload compression 179

Robust Header Compression (RoHC) is suitable for use in all radio topologies including: PTP,
PTMP, ‘ PTMP via repeater’ , and ‘PTMP via repeater with store and forward’. The Trio Q
implementation of RoHC supports backward-compatibility with existing systems that do not have
RoHC-capable firmware. RoHC-capable radios first establish if the target radio, where
Ethernet/IP traffic is destined (unicast), is capable of RoHC operation. Only RoHC-capable
radios will have RoHC-compressed traffic sent to them. Broadcast and multicast traffic is not
RoHC compressed.

Before traffic can be RoHC-compressed between RoHC-enabled radios, the radio must
determine that the destination radio is RoHC-capable. If this can’
t be confirmed, packets to that
destination radio will remain RoHC-uncompressed, and the radio will check again every 10
minutes. When a radio boots up it will announce that it is RoHC-capable.

Once the destination radio is determined to be RoHC-capable, it will transmit RoHC-compressed

traffic over the air when exchanging unicast data, and repeated exchanges will keep the RoHC
states synchronized. When multiple RoHC-compressed packets are corrupt, the RoHC states
can become unsynchronized and the process of synchronization will re-start. Different levels of

178 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

compression have different amounts of tolerance to corrupted RoHC packets before loss of
synchronization of RoHC states occur.

Payload compression

Some types of SCADA and Telemetry protocols contain multiple repetitive sequences of data.
When processed through a compression algorithm like LZO or Z-Standard, a reduction
(compression) of up to 50% in data size can be achieved. The amount of compression is highly
dependent on the data content, and length of the data being compressed. Data that is already
compressed (VoIP, Video, Images) or encrypted is generally not able to be compressed
further.

Transmitting compressed data over the air can result in reduced end-to-end latency, as it takes
less time to transmit the compressed payload with a smaller number of bytes compared to the
original data. In addition, since it takes less time to transmit, the contribution to channel
occupancy is lower. Channel occupancy is the time a radio system is busy with data being
transmitted, compared as a ratio to total time.

The radio attempts to compress the payload of an Ethernet/IP packet, prior to transmitting it
over the air. Once the payload data has been run through the compressor, a comparison is
made to the original payload data size (in bytes). If compression was achieved, the compressed
payload is transmitted over the air.

In some circumstances the payload data is not compressible. When this is detected, the
original payload is transmitted over the air instead.

The level of compression applied by the compression algorithm is user-configurable. In general,

for SCADA and Telemetry protocols, 'Payload Compression = Low' provides some compression
without introducing additional latency. Where the protocol has very large payloads with multiple
repeated data content, 'Payload Compression = High' provides additional compression, at the
expense of extra processing latency. The small amount of extra processing latency is
acceptable given the improved compression and subsequent reduction of total end-to-end
latency.

Configuration

RoHC has three user-configurable levels of compression: Low, Medium and High.

Low: Applies a low level of compression. Tolerates up to 8 consecutive dropped packets before
re-synchronizing RoHC states.

Medium: Applies a medium level of compression. Tolerates up to 4 consecutive dropped

packets before re-synchronizing RoHC states.

High (Default): Applies a high level of compression. Tolerates up to 2 consecutive dropped

packets before re-synchronizing RoHC states.

PTP mode

PTP (Point-to-Point) Mode should be enabled in both radios of a PTP link. In this mode, the
type of RoHC-compression is optimized for PTP links. For all other modes of operation, leave
this mode disabled.

02/2022 179
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Hot Standby Operation

When RoHC-compression is enabled in a Hot Standby System, all packets received by the
online radio are forwarded to the offline radio. This will allow for a seamless transition from an
offline to online state as the decompression states will be synchronized between the two radios.

The states may not be synchronized if the radios were powered up separately (or replaced
while the other is in operation) until after the next change over. The radios will then be
synchronized for subsequent change overs.

Data exchange between the two radios are encrypted with a shared encryption key configured
under Basestation -> General -> Pairing Key

Diagnostics

Compression (%): Measures the percentage of compression achieved compared to

uncompressed data. Combines both RoHC and payload compression.

Dropped Packets: The number of corrupted compressed packets received that the radio has
been unable to de-compress. Combines both RoHC and payload compression.

Note: The location of the statistical performance information for compression is Monitoring ->
Summary -> Compression.

8.2.5 Quality of Service

· Operation 180

· Configuration 182

Operation

Classification of traffic applies to all traffic that is transmitted by the radio. This includes user
traffic from external devices (Ethernet 1 and 2), serial traffic (data) from the internal serial
device servers, and other traffic from the internal services of the radio (eDiags, SNMP, Telnet,
web, etc).

Using QoS, important traffic classes can be prioritized for transmission over less important
classes.

When traffic is classified into a class and then tagged with a priority level, the radio will order
(for subsequent transmission) the traffic according to the priority level. If there is no other traffic
in the queue waiting for transmission, prioritization has no effect.

Traffic shaping follows the Hierarchical Token Bucket methodology. Effectively, average
bandwidth use is measured over time, and shaping of traffic will be applied if the maximum
bandwidth is exceeded. Shaping occurs by inserting a time gap (wait) period between traffic of
the class being shaped, during which time traffic of other classes may be sent.

For traffic of a specific class, a minimum allocated bandwidth can be specified by configuring
the minimum bandwidth parameter. If more bandwidth is required than specified by Minimum
Bandwidth, and other classes are not using their minimum allocated bandwidth, traffic in the
class can use additional bandwidth until the Maximum Bandwidth is reached. After this point,
traffic shaping will be applied.

180 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

For shaping to be performed as intended, the maximum bandwidth of each class and the sum of
the minimum bandwidths of all classes should be less than or equal to the available bandwidth of
the radio.

The available bandwidth can be estimated at 80% of the over-the-air RF data rate, assuming all
sites are operating at the fastest possible over-the-air RF data rate.

To understand how QoS combines classification of traffic together with prioritization and
bandwidth-shaping, the operation of matches, classifiers and classes in the context of a radio
policy needs to be explained.

To allow for future changes and maximum flexibility, matches, classifiers, classes and policies
are abstracted so that multiple different combinations can be configured to achieve a specific
desired outcome.

· Match: A set of rules configured to match (or filter) a specific type of traffic. Parameters
(rules) that can be configured include:
o Ethernet protocol type
o Source or destination MAC address
o VLAN ID and PCP
o IP protocol
o Source or destination IP
o Source or destination port number
For example, Telnet traffic can be identified in a match which has Eth Protocol ID = IPv4
(2048), IP Protocol of TCP(6), and destination port of Telnet(23)
Multiple different types of matches can be configured to uniquely identify specific types of
data. Typical matches include ARP requests, Ping, eDiags Radio Diagnostics, HTTP/HTTPS,
SNMP, Modbus, and DNP. One or more matches are then associated with ‘ classifier‘that
groups the matches into a ‘ class‘
.
· Classifier: Identifies (groups) traffic that belongs to one or more matches. A typical use of a
classifier is to identify multiple different matches and group the traffic that belongs to them
into a distinct priority group. For example, a user may wish to classify eDiags and SNMP
traffic as low priority, so a classifier called LowPriority can be configured that includes
matches for this traffic.
· Class: One or more classifiers grouped together that apply a specific priority level and
minimum and maximum bandwidth. Multiple different classes can be configured.
Traffic will be matched with each class according to their included classifiers in the order
listed within the policy. Matched traffic will be prioritized and shaped according to the class.
Unmatched traffic will be assigned to the lowest priority with no guaranteed bandwidth and no
shaping applied.
Optimal shaping requires the sum of all classes’minimum bandwidth, and the maximum
bandwidth of each class, to be less than the radio’ s available bandwidth. The combination of
classes matching traffic and applying priority and traffic shaping is known as a ‘ policy’
.
Lower priority traffic which is repetitively delayed due to higher priority traffic will be
discarded.
From firmware version 2.5.0, the port fields allow up to five non-contiguous ports and/or
contiguous port ranges to be specified in a single match by using the comma delimiter. If both

02/2022 181
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

source and destination addresses contain multiple ports, the match will succeed if the packet
contains any of the listed source ports, and any of the listed destination ports.

The example below would match a UDP or TCP packet with a source port of 20000,
21000...21110, 22000, 23000, or 24000, and a destination port of 10000, 11000,
12000...12110, 13000, or 14000.

Configuration

The example below shows a typical configuration of QoS in an entry point radio. This
configuration prioritizes the traffic types (matches) noted below, ordered from highest to lowest
priority: ARP Requests, DNP3 via TCP, DNP3 via UDP, Trio Diagnostics protocol, SNMP Polls
and Traps, HTTP and Telnet.

Step 1- Match

Unique characteristics need to be defined for each traffic type for the radio to identify and
match the desired traffic types. The unique characteristics can include: Ethernet Protocol,
Source MAC Address, Destination MAC address, IP Protocol, Source IP Address, Destination
IP Address, Source Port, and/or Destination Port.

The following matches are implemented in this example:

· ARP Requests:
o Name: ARP
o ETH Protocol: ARP(2054)
· DNP3 via TCP:
o Name: DNP3TCP
o IP Protocol: TCP(6)
o Destination Port: 20000
· DNP3 via UDP
o Name: DNP3UDP
o IP Protocol: UDP(17)
o Destination Port: 20000
· Trio Radio Diagnostics protocol
o Name: TrioDiags
o IP Protocol: UDP(17)
o Destination Port: EDIAGS(1040)
· SNMP Polls and Traps
o Name: SNMP

182 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

o IP Protocol: UDP(17)
o Destination Port: 161-162
· Access to WUI
o Name: HTTP
o IP Protocol: TCP(6)
o Destination Port: HTTP(80)
· Access to Text Terminal
o Name: Telnet
o IP Protocol: TCP(6)
o Destination Port: TELNET(23)
For reasons explained below, a final match will be configured for all other traffic not matched
above.

· All Other Traffic

o Name: CatchALL
o IP Protocol: ALL(*)
Once the traffic matches have been added to the configuration, a summary of the Name and
Description is displayed as shown below:

Note: The row location of a Match can be moved by using the UP/DOWN arrow icons. The row
location within this table does not affect the operation of QoS. It is to help with visual
representation only.

To review a detailed summary of the configured matches, select the magnifying glass icon
located at the bottom left of the table:

02/2022 183
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Step 2 - Classifier

Classifiers are essentially groups of matches. A classifier can contain a single or multiple
matches.

In this example, five separate classifiers are to be configured, each one requiring a unique
name:
· Very High Priority
· High Priority
· Medium Priority
· Low Priority
· All Other Traffic

Once a classifier has been configured with a unique name, matches to be associated with that
classifier can be added.

184 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Once the classifiers have been added to the configuration, a summary of the Name and
Description is displayed as shown below:

Note: The row location of a Classifier can be moved by using the UP/DOWN arrow icons. The
row location within this table does not affect the operation of QoS, it is to help with visual
representation only.

Step 3 - Prioritization and shaping

Once classifiers have been defined, a class is then configured to apply an assigned level of
priority and minimum/maximum bandwidth. The combination of multiple different classes that
implement QoS for data transmitted onto the radio channel is known as the Radio Policy.

For optimal performance, the sum of all defined Minimum Bandwidths within the classes should
not exceed 80% of the total available radio channel bandwidth. For example, given a 56 kbps
(56000 bps) radio channel, the sum of all Minimum Bandwidths configured within these classes
should not exceed 45 kbps (45000 bps).

See the example below for creating and configuring a Radio Policy.

Once each of the Classes are configured, the table should look like the following:

02/2022 185
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Note: The row location of a Class in the Radio Policy can be moved by using the UP/DOWN
arrow icons. The first matching class in the radio policy has the priority and bandwidth rules
applied. All subsequent classes are ignored. Classes are checked from the first to the last row
in the table of classes in the radio policy.

Explanation of class configurations

Very High Priority Traffic

This class only contains a single match, being ARP requests. As ARP requests are a core
requirement of Ethernet/IP communications, the priority has been set to 1(the highest priority).

ARP request packets are small in size and the required bandwidth to transmit them is low, so
the minimum bandwidth is configured for 5 kbps (5000 bps). The maximum bandwidth is
configured for 45 kbps (45000 bps), which means ARP traffic can use up to 45 kbps if other
traffic types are not using their allocated bandwidth.

High Priority Traffic

This class only contains two matches, including: DNP3 via TCP and DNP3 via UDP. DNP3 is
the SCADA protocol in this example, so this is considered high priority, and set to priority 3.
DNP traffic requires a certain minimum bandwidth for scan timing to met, so the minimum
bandwidth is configured for 25 kbps (25000 bps). The maximum bandwidth is configured for 45
kbps (45000 bps), which means DNP traffic can use up to 45 kbps if other traffic types are not
using their allocated bandwidth.

All Other Traffic

This class captures all traffic that has not been found within any other preceding class. In this
example, any other traffic sent over the radio network is considered unimportant, so has been
given a priority level of 7. During periods of traffic congestion, traffic within this class is
effectively inhibited, by configuring the minimum bandwidth to 0.008 kbps (8 bps). The
maximum bandwidth is configured for 10 kbps (10000 bps), which means other traffic can use
up to 10 kbps if other traffic types are not using their allocated bandwidth.

8.2.6 E-Series Emulation Mode

· Overview 186

· Configuration 187

Overview

As of firmware release 1.3.6.3674, the Q (UHF only) supports E-Series emulation mode. The
Diagram below shows a typical E-Series PTMP via Repeater topology, where the remote sites
have been replaced with half duplex Trio Q Data Radios. Configuration values which are
fundamental to a successful radio link are shown below to provide an example on how to
configure the Trio Q Data Radios in E-Series emulation mode. Single frequency or two
frequency systems can use E-Series emulation mode.

186 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Configuration

The configuration parameters shown in the diagram above can be accessed within the Trio Q
Data Radio within the following locations:

Modulation (Setup -> Radio -> Modulation) provides the compatibility options of: Q Data
Radio Mode or E/M Data Radio Mode.

Radio Type (Setup -> Radio -> System Parameters) provides the options of:
· Access Point
· Remote

Type (Setup -> Radio -> Modulation) the following bandwidth/data rates are supported.
Availability is dependent on the regional approval of the radio (ACMA/ETSI/FCC):

· E-Series · M-Series
9600 12.5 kHz ACA 4 Level 9600 25.0kHz ACA M-Series
19200 25.0 kHz ACA 4 Level 4800 12.5kHz ACA M-Series

02/2022 187
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

9600 12.5 kHz FCC 4 Level 4800 25.0kHz ACA M-Series

19200 12.5 kHz FCC 4 Level 2400 12.5kHz ACA M-Series
19200 25.0 kHz FCC 2 Level 9600 12.5kHz FCC M-Series
9600 12.5 kHz ETSI 4 Level 4800 12.5kHz ETSI M-Series

For BER specifications and/or sensitivities, refer to the corresponding E or M Series Data
sheet.

Ethernet Stream ID (SID) (Setup -> Radio -> System Parameters) provides the
configuration option of Ethernet SID to be used.

Serial Rx/Tx SIDs (Setup -> Serial COM 1 (or 2) provides the configuration options of the
Serial SIDs to be used.

Radio configuration is still performed via WUI, TUI, or CLI (not via TVIEW+ Programmer).

For detailed information on E-Series parameters, refer to the E-Series user manual.

8.3 Connectivity

· Serial Device Server 189

· Modbus Gateway 192

· Network Address Translation (NAT) 194

188 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

· TCP/UDP Gateway 201

8.3.1 Serial Device Server

· Point to Point Serial Device Server Configuration 189

· Point to Multipoint Serial Device Server Configuration 191

8.3.1.1 Point to Point Serial Device Server Configuration

Point to Point serial connectivity can be achieved by using the serial device server embedded
within the Trio Q Data Radio's radio. The serial device server has three protocols available,
each with their own benefits:
· TCP: Establishes a session-based connection, providing high reliability on data delivery
· UDP: Consumes low bandwidth and provides a low latency connection
· PPP: Provides a virtual Ethernet connection over a serial link

Serial data transport via TCP

Connect the PC’ s Ethernet port to ETH1 or ETH2 of the radio being configured and using a web
browser, navigate to the radio’
s configuration page by entering the IP address of the unit into
the browser’s URL bar. Once the configuration has been activated, repeat the process for the
remaining radio.

To access the parameters below, navigate to the Setup tab and select the COM1 option under
Configuration.

Serial data transport via UDP

Connect the PC’ s Ethernet port to ETH1 or ETH2 of the radio being configured and using a web
browser, navigate to the radio’
s configuration page by entering the IP address the unit into the
browser’s URL bar. Once the configuration has been activated, repeat the process for the
remaining radio.

02/2022 189
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

To access the parameters below, navigate to the Setup tab and select the COM1 option under
Configuration.

Serial data transport via PPP

Connect the PC’ s Ethernet port to ETH1 or ETH2 of the radio being configured and using a web
browser, navigate to the radio’
s configuration page by entering the IP address the unit into the
browser’s URL bar. Once the configuration has been activated, repeat the process for the
remaining radio.

To access the parameters below, navigate to the Setup tab and select the COM1 option under
Configuration.

The example uses the following IP addresses for external PPP Clients: ‘
Host Application -
192.168.2.20’‘External Device (RTU) - 192.168.2.30’

190 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

8.3.1.2 Point to Multipoint Serial Device Server Configuration

Point to Multipoint serial connectivity can be achieved by using the serial device server
embedded within the Trio Q Data Radios. The serial device server can be used in UDP mode, to
achieve a point to multipoint serial link.

Serial data transport via UDP

Connect the PC’ s Ethernet port to ETH1 or ETH2 of the radio being configured and using a web
browser, navigate to the radio’
s configuration page by entering the IP address the unit into the
browser’s URL bar. Once the configuration has been activated, repeat the process for the
remaining radio/s.

To access the parameters below, navigate to the Setup tab and select the COM1 option under
Configuration.

The allocated IP addresses for this example are ‘Entry Point- 192.168.2.16’ ,‘Remote A -
192.168.2.17’ ,‘Remote B - 192.168.2.18’ .... (additional remotes can use incremental IP
allocation from Remote B).

02/2022 191
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

8.3.2 Modbus Gateway

Point-to-Point (PTP) with Modbus TCP to Modbus RTU can be performed by using the Modbus
gateway feature embedded within the Trio Q Data Radios.

Modbus TCP to Modbus RTU - Point to point

Connect the PC’ s Ethernet port to ETH1 or ETH2 of the radio being configured and using a web
browser, navigate to the radio’
s configuration page by entering the IP address the unit into the
browser’s URL bar. Once the configuration has been activated, repeat the process for the
remaining radio/s.

To access the parameters below, navigate to the Setup tab and select the COM1 option under
Configuration.

192 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Modbus TCP to Modbus RTU - Point to multipoint

Connect the PC’ s Ethernet port to ETH1 or ETH2 of the radio being configured and using a web
browser, navigate to the radio’
s configuration page by entering the IP address the unit into the
browser’s URL bar. Once the configuration has been activated, repeat the process for the
remaining radio/s.

To access the parameters below, navigate to the Setup tab and select the COM1 option under
Configuration.

02/2022 193
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

8.3.3 Network Address Translation (NAT)

As of firmware version 1.4.0, Network Address Translation (NAT) with port forwarding is
available.

As of firmware version 2.5.0, NAT with 1:1 address forwarding is available.

The following Diagrams are designed to provide configuration information on typical topologies.
The channel bandwidth and Tx/Rx frequencies are not shown within the diagrams, as they
depend on the user’ s license.

The following diagrams show ‘ /24’after an IP address. This short-hand addressing indicates the
device’ s subnet mask. ‘
/24’equals a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. Short-hand addressing can
be used when writing a static route.

194 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

See:

· NAT Configuration 195

· NAT Port Forwarding - Point to Multipoint - Full duplex entry point 196

· NAT Port Forwarding - Point to Multipoint via multiple repeaters 197

· NAT 1:1 Address Forwarding 198

· Special Considerations for IP router mode 199

NAT Configuration

NAT is only available when the radio is operating in IP Routing mode.

NAT configuration parameters can be accessed within the radio’

s configuration page by
browsing to Setup -> IP Routing.

Enable or disable the NAT feature using the Enable and Disable selection shown above. When
enabled, source address translation will be performed for incoming packets from the Ethernet
ports, and allows the following options:
· Double SNAT: When enabled, source address translation will be performed for incoming
packets from the radio channel
· Port Forwarding Rules: Forwards a TCP and/or UDP port on the radio’
s WAN address to a
routable address and port on the radio’
s LAN network
· 1:1 NAT: Forwards an IP address or network to another routable address or network

Port forwarding rules

The following are rules for redirecting a Port on the WAN to a Port on the LAN at the specified
Target IP Address. There is a maximum of 250.

· State: [Enable] or [Disable] the rule

· Protocol: Apply to [TCP], [UDP], or [ALL] traffic
· WAN IP Port: Listening Port on the WAN interface
· Target IP Address: IP address to redirect traffic to
· Target IP Port: Port at the specified LAN Address to redirect traffic to
· Rule Comments: Optional notes for the rule (128 Characters Max)

02/2022 195
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

1:1 Address forwarding rules

The following are rules for redirecting a virtual WAN IP address to a Target IP address or
network address. When specifying a network address, the number of addresses in the WAN IP
Address and Target IP Address must match. There is a maximum of 32 entries.

· State: [Enable] or [Disable] the rule

· WAN IP Address: The virtual WAN IP to forward from
· Target IP Address: The destination IP to forward to
· Count: The number of addresses to forward. This needs to be 1 if specifying a network.
· Rule Comments: Optional notes for the rule (128 Characters Max)

NAT Port Forwarding - Point to Multipoint - Full duplex entry point

The diagram above provides an example of how to port-forward a Telnet session. To establish a
Telnet session from the host application, to the Ethernet device connected to Remote A, the host
application will have to use the following addressing: [Telnet 10.10.10.2 2300]. This address
references Remote A’ s WAN IP address and the unique port number allocated to the Ethernet
device specified within the port forwarding rule.

196 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

NAT Port Forwarding - Point to Multipoint via multiple repeaters

The diagram above provides an example of how to port-forward a Telnet session from the Host
application, to an Ethernet device shown. To establish a Telnet session from the host application
to the Ethernet device connected to Remote A, the host application requires the following
addressing: [Telnet 10.10.10.3 2300]. This address references Remote A’ s WAN IP address
and the unique port number allocated to the Ethernet device specified within the port forwarding
rule.

This topology should use Carrier Detect or Token Grant channel management.

02/2022 197
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

NAT 1:1 Address Forwarding

The diagram above provides an example of how to use 1:1 address forwarding to expose two
Ethernet devices behind a NAT enabled radio. To establish communications with devices behind
Remote A, the host application will use the WAN IP addresses 10.10.10.100 and 10.10.10.101
to communicate to 192.168.1.2 and 192.168.1.3 respectively.

For devices behind Remote B, as the entire subnet of 10.10.11.0/24 has been forwarded, to
reach each Ethernet device, the host application will use the WAN IP addresses 10.10.11.2 and
10.10.11.3 to communicate with 192.168.1.2 and 192.168.1.3 respectively.

The table below shows the IP addresses that should be used in a firewall rule:

198 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Interface Direction Source Address Destination Address

Radio In Origin IP Address Target IP Address

Radio Out WAN IP Address Any

Ethernet In Target IP Address Origin IP Address

Ethernet Out Radio LAN IP Address Target IP Address

Origin IP Address refers to the source IP address of the original request.

Special considerations for IP router mode

The source address of packets exiting the radio channel which are generated by the radio and
not in response to a request will depend on whether Network Address Translation (NAT) is
enabled or disabled.

When NAT is disabled, the source IP address will be the radio’ s LAN address. The exception to
this is for point to multipoint configurations of the TCP/UDP gateway where the packet will have
the radio’ s WAN address as the multicasted packets are not required to exit the LAN interface.

When NAT is enabled, the source IP address will be the radio’ s WAN address. The exception to
this is for point-to-multipoint, and multipoint to multipoint configurations where packets are
multicasted. Serial and Modbus services will have a source address of the radio LAN’ s address
as the multicasted packets are required to exit both the LAN and WAN interface.

The following table lists the source address of packets originating from the radio services with
the pink cells indicating exceptions:

IP Routing w/o NAT IP Routing w NAT

LAN Interface WAN Interface LAN Interface WAN Interface

Terminal
Server

TCP Client LAN IP LAN IP LAN IP WAN IP

TCP Server LAN IP Same as LAN IP Same as

destination of destination of
request request

UDP PTP Static LAN IP LAN IP LAN IP WAN IP

UDP PTP LAN IP LAN IP LAN IP WAN IP

Dynamic

UDP PTMP LAN IP LAN IP LAN IP LAN IP

Point

02/2022 199
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

UDP PTMP Multi LAN IP WAN IP LAN IP WAN IP

Point

UDP MPTMP Does not exit the WAN IP Does not exit the WAN IP
LAN interface LAN interface

SNMP

SNMP Trap LAN IP LAN IP LAN IP WAN IP

NTP

NTP Server LAN IP Same as LAN IP Same as

destination of destination of
request request

NTP Client LAN IP LAN IP LAN IP WAN IP

Config Transfer

SCP LAN IP LAN IP LAN IP WAN IP

TFTP LAN IP LAN IP LAN IP WAN IP

TCP/UDP
Gateway

UDP PTP LAN IP WAN IP LAN IP WAN IP

UDP PTMP Does not exit the WAN IP Does not exit the WAN IP
Point LAN interface LAN interface

UDP PTMP Multi LAN IP WAN IP LAN IP WAN IP

Point

TCP Client LAN IP WAN IP LAN IP WAN IP

TCP Server Same as Same as Same as Same as

destination of destination of destination of destination of
request request request request

200 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

8.3.4 TCP/UDP Gateway

The following information provides worked examples on using the TCP/UDP Gateway. For
feature detail, see TCP/UDP Gateway 46 .

Example A: TCP/UDP gateway in Layer-2 (Bridge mode) radio network

· A legacy DNP Host Application is limited to supporting a restricted number of TCP

connections in a wide area point to multipoint (PTMP) SCADA network. To ensure DNP traffic
is routed to all remote sites in the PTMP network, a TCP/ UDP gateway is enabled in the
Entry Point radio.
· RTU A: An Ethernet capable remote device that is connected to another TCP/UDP gateway to
provide Ethernet DNP connectivity.
· RTU B: A serial only device that is connected to the embedded serial device server to provide
serial DNP connectivity to the device.

02/2022 201
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Example B: TCP/UDP gateway in Layer-3 (IP routing mode) radio network

8.4 Ease of Use

· Web User Interface (WUI) 203

· Text Terminal 209

o Command-Line Interface (CLI) 215

o Text User Interface (TUI) 216

· Configuration 218

202 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

· Diagnostics 250

· Alarms 258

· Events 270

· SNMP 276

· Network Time 307

· Base Station Advanced Configuration 308

· Trio E-Series Emulation Mode 310

8.4.1 Web User Interface (WUI)

Trio Q Data Radios provide a graphical Web User Interface (WUI) which can be accessed
locally or over the RF interface by HTTP/HTTPS standard web browsers like IE11, Edge, and
Chrome to perform configuration changes, monitor diagnostics, perform maintenance, and
access test tools. This eliminates the requirement for stand-alone configuration software to be
installed on a PC. When in a factory default configuration state, the WUI can be accessed at
192.168.2.15.

For instructions on how to access the WUI via a HTTP connection, see QR Point to Point
Bench Test Setup - Step 3 121 in Part G - Quick Start Guide.

8.4.1.1 HTTP Secure (HTTPS)

The Trio Q Data Radio’

s web user interface can be accessed through a secure HTTP (HTTPS)
connection.

There are multiple steps required to establish a successful HTTPS connection to a Trio Q Data
Radio, which include:
· Enabling HTTPS within the Trio Q Data Radio
· Loading a signed, digital certificate into the Trio Q Data Radio. This may be generated by a
certificate server (i.e. Active directory) or can be self-generated by the Trio Q Data Radio.
· Resolving web browser issues

When the above steps have been completed, enter HTTPS://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where ‘
x’is the
unit’
s IP address, into the web browsers URL bar and press enter.

Enabling HTTPS within a Trio Q data radio

Navigate to the unit’

s Security page (Setup -> Security) and under the Administration heading,
you can enable/disable HTTPS. You also have the option to disable HTTP access once HTTPS
is enabled.

02/2022 203
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Loading a digitally signed certificate into a Trio Q Data Radio

Certificate Management Server

A certificate can be generated and signed from a certificate management server. Once a
certificate is signed, it should then be loaded into the Trio Q Data Radio. An example of
commonly used certificate management server is Active directory. For each individual unit, a
unique certificate is required. Certificates used are bound to each unit by its IP address and
serial number. If the IP address of a unit is changed, the certificate needs to be re-generated
and re-loaded back into the Trio Q Data Radio.

To load a signed certificate into a Trio Q Data Radio via the WUI, navigate to Maintenance ->
Security management and click Browse.

Verify the correct file has been selected, then click Upload.

Once the certificate has been successfully uploaded, a message will appear and information
about the certificate will be visible within the current certificate section.

Unless the certificate management server has been linked to the web browser as a trusted
certificate server, the browser may display security messages upon entry to the Trio Q Data
Radio WUI via HTTPS. To add exceptions into the browser for these security messages see the
instructions on the following page.

Self-signed certificate

A self-signed certificate can easily be generated from within the Trio Q Data Radio. To generate
a self-signed certificate, navigate to the security update page (Maintenance -> Security
maintenance) and click Generate.

Once the self-signed certificate has been created, a message will appear and information about
the certificate will be visible within the current certification section.

204 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Resolving web browser issues

Every web browser has a list of trusted Certification Authorities (CAs). When either a CA that is
not included within the web browsers trusted list is used to sign a certificate, or a self-signed
certificate is used, a security message will appear within the web browser when an attempt to
access a Trio Q Data Radio’ s WUI via HTTPS is made. See the example below (example uses
Internet Explorer 8).

This security message is identifying that the signee of the certificate being read is not within the
browser’s trusted list.

Clicking Continue to this website (not recommended) will allow a HTTPS connection through
to the Trio Q Data Radio. The URL bar of the browser will still indicate that the certificate is still
not trusted.

Although the browser is identifying this, a secure connection should still be in place between the
browser and the Trio Q Data Radio.

To add the signer to the browser’s trusted list

1. Click the Certificate Error window within the URL bar as shown.

A Certificate Invalid window will open.

02/2022 205
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

2. Click View certificates.

A certificate information window will open.

3. Click Install Certificate.

If you cannot see the Install Certificate button, restart Internet Explorer in administrator
mode. Do this by right clicking the Internet Explorer icon on the desktop and selecting Run
as administrator. If this selection is not available, speak to your system administrator.

This will start the certificate import wizard.

206 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

3. Click Next.

4. Check the Place all certificates in the following store option and click Browse.

02/2022 207
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

5. Select the Trusted Root Certification Authorities folder and click OK.

6. Once the import directory has been selected, click Finish.

A security message will appear providing information about the added certificate exception.

7. Click Yes to complete the installation process.

208 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

8.4.2 Text Terminal

The text terminal can be accessed via; a serial connection 209 , a Telnet session 211 , or a SSH
session 212 .

As of firmware 2.6.0, the Command-Line Interface (CLI) 215 is the first menu interface shown
when connecting to the text terminal. To start the TUI, connect to the Command-Line Interface
(CLI) and then enter the command menu. See Text User Interface (TUI) 216 .

Serial Connection

The serial text terminal interface is accessed via the COM 1/2 interface as shown in the diagram
below. By default, the TUI and CLI can be accessed via COM 1 (Pins 2, 3, & 5).

Text User Interface:

· Com 1
· Port Speed: 19200 bps
· Format: 8, N, 1

Connection to the PC requires a straight-through serial cable with Pins 2, 3, & 5 connected.
Hardware handshaking is not enabled by default within the Trio Q Data Radios, so unless
handshaking is a requirement, no other connections are required.

Once the Trio Q Data Radio is connected to the PC via a strait through serial cable, use a serial
console tool to create a serial communications connection to the text terminal. The following
example uses a software package called PuTTY. PuTTY is a freely available Serial console,
SSH, and Telnet client. PuTTY can be downloaded from: http://www.putty.org/

Once installed, open PuTTY to display the configuration window.

02/2022 209
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Within the Category section, go to Connection -> Serial. Within the serial line configuration
section configure the serial port you will be using to interface to the Trio Q Data Radio to the
following settings:
· Speed (baud): 19200
· Data bits: 8
· Stop bits: 1
· Parity: None
· Flow control: None

210 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Telnet session

The text terminal can be accessed via Telnet. This is convenient if you are remotely connected
to a Trio Q Data Radio via an Ethernet network. The Telnet interface requires much less
bandwidth compared to the web user interface, which results in higher speed access to
configuration parameters and diagnostics. Most computer operating systems come with
integrated Telnet software. For Windows based operating system, you can initiate a Telnet
session using the command line interface.

Before you can connect to the text terminal via Telnet, ensure that the Telnet interface within the
Trio Q Data Radio is enabled. By default, the Telnet service is enabled. The Telnet service can
be enabled/disabled using the Web user interface. Enable the interface via the Configuration -
> Security menu item as shown below.

To start a Telnet session, open a command window via Start -> Run and type Telnet
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx where xxx is the IP address of the target radio. See the example below.

02/2022 211
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

If the Telnet connection was successful, the following screen is displayed.

If security password protection has been enabled, you will first need to enter the appropriate
username and password.

Secure Shell (SSH)

Secure Shell (SSH) provides a secure alternative to standard Telnet. To access the Trio Q Data
Radio’ s text terminal via the embedded SSH server, use an SSH client. The following example
shows how to access a Trio Q Data Radio’ s text terminal using a commonly used Windows SSH
client called PuTTY.

Before you can connect to the text terminal via SSH, ensure that the SSH server within the Trio
Q Data Radio is enabled (set to SSH Terminal to Enable). For security reasons, the SSH server

212 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

is disabled by default. It can be enabled via the web user interface. Enable the interface via the
Configuration -> Security menu item as shown.

Upon enabling SSH, you will also be required to fill out a username and password. Ensure that
you record this username and password for future use.

For the SSH client to know it is communicating with the device it is addressing (not a ‘
man in
the middle‘
), the client will attempt to first authenticate the server.

The client will take the following process to authenticate the server:
· The client requests the device fingerprint from the server it is trying to connect to.
· Once the client has received the server’
s fingerprint, it will check its own records to see
whether it already has this fingerprint in memory.
· If it does have the fingerprint on record, the connection between the client and the server
should automatically begin.
· If the client does not have the fingerprint in memory, a security alert will appear, advising the
user that either an attacker could be an intercepting the device as it does not have the
fingerprint on record, or it is a new device that it has not connected to before.

02/2022 213
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

As there is no way of differentiating between a ‘ man in the middle‘attack or a first time

connection due to the fingerprint not stored on the client’ s records, it is advised that the SSH
server (Trio Q Data Radio) is always connected locally to the client and read before they are
deployed in the field. This will allow the client to store the server’
s fingerprint on record and will
help prevent any chances of undetected ‘ man in the middle‘attacks.

Once a fingerprint has been stored into memory, it can be extracted from the registry (PuTTY
example only).

HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\SimonTatham\Putty\SSHHostKeys.

This can then be deployed into another client PC, if required.

Configure the SSH client (in this case PuTTY) to interface correctly with the embedded Trio Q
Data Radio’s SSH server.

The Port number for the embedded Trio Q Data Radio’

s SSH terminal is 22. This is a standard
and is not user definable.

The SSH terminal also requires a username and password to be configured. Upon logging into
the Trio Q Data Radio via SSH, the user will be prompted for the username and password.

214 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Once the correct username and password have been entered, the Trio Q Data Radio will grant
access to the CLI main menu.

8.4.2.1 Command-Line Interface (CLI)

As of firmware 2.6.0 the Command-Line Interface (CLI) is the first menu interface displayed on
the text terminal.

The CLI is divided into two distinct areas:

· Unit Information: Displays unique unit information about the radio such as serial number,
currently configured IP address, and firmware pack version identification

02/2022 215
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

· Configuration: Provides access to the configuration of Network Parameters, Radio

configuration, Serial interfaces, eDiags, Security, SNMP, IP routing, and more

8.4.2.2 Text User Interface (TUI)

To access the Text User Interface (TUI), connect to the Command-Line Interface (CLI) 215 and
then enter the command menu.

The TUI is divided into four distinct areas:

· Unit Information: Displays unique unit information about the radio such as serial number,
currently configured IP address, and firmware pack version identification

216 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

· Configuration: Provides access to the configuration of Network Parameters, Radio

configuration, Serial interfaces, eDiags, Security, SNMP, and IP routing, and more

· Diagnostics: Provides access to the Diagnostics facilities in the radio

02/2022 217
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

· Maintenance: Provides access to maintenance facilities in the radio

8.4.3 Configuration

Trio Q Data Radios provide multiple ways to manage device configuration. These include:

· Viewing, creating, and editing radio configurations using the WUI/TUI/CLI

· Loading or saving configurations using the WUI/TUI
· Automatic configuration activation using the USB port
· Zero Touch configuration using the USB port

For more details on Zero Touch configuration, see Radio Access Control 316 in Part H - Feature
Detail.

218 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

See:

· Configuration (WUI) 219

· Configuration (CLI) 220

o CLI Configuration Commands 227

· Configuration (TUI) 246

· Automatic Configuration Save 248

· USB Automatic Configuration Activation 248

8.4.3.1 Configuration (WUI)

Any single radio configuration can be saved to a configuration file. The configuration file can be
used to duplicate a radio’
s configuration or as the basis for another remote radio’s
configuration.

To save or load a configuration file, navigate to Setup -> Save / Load.

Save configuration

As of firmware version 1.5.0, there are two modes for saving a configuration file:

· Standard: Saves a configuration file including standard configuration parameters (i.e.

Network, Radio, COM1/2, etc).
· Standard with Passwords: (Only available when logged in with unrestricted access)

Saves a standard configuration file which includes secure information. Secure information
includes:

o Configuration Security [Enable/Disable]

o HTTP/HTTPS [Enable/Disable]

o Telnet/SSH [Enable/Disable]

o AES [Enable/Disable]

o SNMP community Strings

o SNMPv3 local and remote user credentials

o User Administration information (passwords hashed).

The Standard with Passwords saved configuration file allows an unrestricted user to duplicate
the security information saved from one radio into another radio.

02/2022 219
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

NOTICE
POTENTIAL SECURITY RISK
A configuration file saved with passwords should be stored in a secure location and only given
to those with unrestricted access. The security information in the configuration file is not
encrypted (except for user passwords, which are hashed).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in cyber security vulnerabilities.

Once the Saved configuration mode has been selected, click Save.

When a configuration file is saved, the radio will take an image of the current active
configuration and create a ‘.cfg’file.

Configuration changes which have not been activated will not be saved.

NOTICE
POTENTIAL SECURITY RISK
When saving confidential information such as usernames and passwords, use a secure
connection to the configuration page such as HTTPS or SSH.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in cyber security vulnerabilities.

Load configuration

To load a configuration file, click Choose File, browse to a directory where a configuration has
been previously saved, and click Open. Once the file is selected, click Load.

Once the configuration file has loaded, click Activate.

NOTICE
POTENTIAL SECURITY RISK
When loading confidential information such as usernames and passwords, use a secure
connection to the configuration page such as HTTPS or SSH.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in cyber security vulnerabilities.

8.4.3.2 Configuration (CLI)

· Command modes, prompts, and access controls 221

· Configuration sessions 222

· Syntax formatting 223

· Command-line editing 223

· Command completions 224

220 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

· Command help 224

· Understanding defaults and No commands 225

· Line order 225

· Encrypted passwords 225

· Supported character sets 226

· Quotes 226

· Comments 226

· Examples 226

For details about available commands, see CLI Configuration Commands 227 .

Command modes, prompts, and access controls

The CLI includes command modes and access controls. Some commands can only be entered
in certain modes, and some require that certain roles be assigned to the user. For example, to
enter commands that modify the configuration, you need to enter Global Configuration mode.
The Global Configuration mode may only be entered by users assigned the read-write, security,
or unrestricted roles. Once the configuration mode is entered, only users assigned the security
or unrestricted roles may enter security related configuration commands. The current command
mode is indicated by the prompt.

The CLI has the following command modes:

User Exec

This is the first mode entered after logging on to the CLI. From this mode, the command exit will
end the CLI session. This mode does not permit commands which impact the operation of the
radio.

After logging in, the prompt initially appears as follows:

radio>

Privileged Exec

To enter this mode from User Exec mode, issue the command enable. To return to User Exec
mode, issue the command disable. From this mode, the command exit will end the CLI
session.

This mode allows access to all commands permitted by the role assigned to the user.

In this mode, the prompt appears as follows:

radio#

02/2022 221
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Global Configuration

To enter this mode from Privileged Exec mode, issue the command configure terminal. Once
in this mode, commands that can change the radio configuration are available.

Only one CLI session can enter Global Configuration mode at a time whether they are
connected via serial, Telnet, or SSH.

In this mode, the prompt appears as follows:

radio(config)#

To exit Global Configuration and retain the changes to the staged configuration, issue the
command exit, end, or Ctrl-Z.

From Global Configuration mode, some commands enter a command-specific configuration

mode. For example, the username command enters the username configuration mode.

The prompt changes to the following:

radio(config-username)#

After making changes within the command-specific configuration context, issue the command
exit to return to Global Configuration mode. Issue the command end or Ctrl-Z to return directly
to Privileged Exec mode.

To abandon the changes made within the command-specific configuration context and return to
Global Configuration mode, issue the command cancel.

Configuration sessions

The radio uses a commit model to make changes to the configuration. Configuration changes
are staged during a configuration session and then committed to memory and merged into the
running configuration.

A configuration session is started when the command enable is issued and the CLI enters
Privileged Exec mode. A copy of the running configuration is created called the staged
configuration. Changes are made to the staged configuration using the commands available
within Global Configuration mode.

To commit the staged configuration, issue the command write memory from the Privileged
Exec mode. All configuration items will be checked, and if no errors are detected, the staged
configuration is stored into memory and activated by merging into the running configuration. On
the next startup the radio will resume the committed configuration.

Note: In some cases the command write memory will cause the SSH or Telnet session to
disconnect. If this occurs, you can reconnect to the CLI by restarting your Telnet or SSH client.
A disconnect occurs if the radio requires a reboot to activate the changes. A disconnect also
occurs when your PC is connected directly to the radio via an Ethernet cable, because during
a configuration activation the radio briefly powers down the Ethernet ports. This is a signal to
the connected RTU or PLC that the radio is undergoing a configuration change. Inserting an
Ethernet switch between your PC and the radio will prevent this from occurring.

To end the configuration session and abort all uncommitted changes in staged configuration,
issue the command disable from Privileged Exec mode. Returning to Privileged Exec mode

222 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

using the enable command will start a new configuration session and reset the staged
configuration from the running configuration.

Syntax formatting

Command syntax descriptions use the conventions listed in the following table.

Convention Description

Bold text indicates commands and keywords that you enter literally as
bold
shown.

italics Italic text indicates arguments for which you supply values.

[x] Square brackets enclose an optional element (keyword or argument).

A vertical bar indicates a choice within an optional or required set of

|
keywords or arguments.

Square brackets enclosing keywords or arguments separated by a

[x | y]
vertical bar indicate an optional choice.

Braces enclosing keywords or arguments separated by a vertical bar

{x | y}
indicate a required choice.

Nested sets of square brackets or braces indicate optional or required

choices within optional or required elements. Braces and a vertical bar
[x {y | z}]
within square brackets indicate a required choice within an optional
element.

Command-line editing

Command-line editing uses the conventions in the following table.

02/2022 223
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Convention Description

Up arrow and down arrow View all previously entered commands

When you reach a command you want to reuse, you can edit
it or press the Enter key to start it.

[^A] Move the cursor to the start of the line

[^E] Move the cursor to the end of the line

[^C] Abort the current line

[^U] Delete the current line

[^K] Delete all characters to the right of the cursor

[^W] Delete all characters to the left of the cursor

Delete and Backspace keys Supported

Command completion

To complete a command or keyword after entering a partial string, press the Tab key.

If the partial string matches multiple commands or keywords, then a list of possible options is
displayed to guide you to completion. For example, from the User Exec mode, if you enter e
and press the Tab key, the CLI does not complete the command because it matches more than
one command. However, if you enter en, the Tab key completes the enable command.

Command completion also works with the Enter key. If a partial string matches only one
command, then pressing the Enter key will complete and run the command. For example, in
Privileged Exec mode, entering configure t then pressing Enter will auto-complete to
configure terminal and the CLI will enter the Global Configuration mode.

Command help

Help information is available from the CLI in the following ways:

· To display information regarding auto-completion or line editing: enter the command help
· To display a list of arguments and available keywords including a description of each: enter a
command followed by ?
o Entering a partial command displays the possible compete commands including a
description of each
· To display all commands available in the current command mode including a description of
each: enter ?
o Note: If you want to include a question mark (?) in a command string, press Ctrl-V before
typing the question mark so that you do not inadvertently invoke CLI help.

224 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Understanding defaults and No commands

The commands show running-config and show staged-config list only the commands
necessary to merge the default configuration into the running or staged configuration.
Commands entered in Global Configuration mode that result in the default setting are omitted
from the listing.

Review the release notes for changes to the default configuration in future firmware version.

The no command is used to delete items from the staged configuration. Only items that have
multiple entries can be deleted, such as usernames or IP routes. For example, to delete the
user bob, enter the command no username bob or to delete all users enter the command no
username.

To display all the configuration items that are currently active on the radio and not just what has
changed from the default, add the all parameter to the end of the show command so it
becomes show running-config all or show staged-config all. The resulting configuration can
be entered into another radio without doing a factory default so that its operation is the same.

Line order

Generally, commands can be entered in any order. Once the write memory command is
entered, all configuration commands are validated together before committing to memory. If one
or more conflicts are detected, the first command in conflict is displayed and you are prompted
to correct the conflict before entering the write memory command again. The process is
continued until all conflicts are corrected allowing the activation process to complete.

Encrypted passwords

Sensitive data such as password, encryption keys, and other secrets are stored on the radio in
either an encrypted or hashed format.

Passwords used to authenticate users to the radio are automatically encrypted before storing
into memory. For example, the encrypted form of the password “trio123”might look like
$5$Fu3… Xvt.mm4. You can copy the encrypted password to another radio in its encrypted
form, but you cannot unencrypt the passwords yourself. Password commands provide the
option to input a password in their clear or encrypted format.

The following example sets the user’

s password from a clear text input:
radio(config-username)# password trio123

The following example sets the user’

s password in its encrypted form copied from another radio:
radio(config-username)# password 1 $5$Fu3…Xvt.mm4

Passwords used to authenticate to other devices cannot be encrypted, therefore they are
obscured using a two-way hashing algorithm. The same applies to all other secrets such as
SNMP v3 remote user passwords, user-defined pairing keys and user-defined encryption
keys.

02/2022 225
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

The show command displays secrets in their encrypted or hashed format.

Note: Encrypting or hashing secrets stored in the configuration provides an additional level of
security, however, these encrypted or hashed secrets must be treated as sensitive information
and shared only with trusted parties.

Supported character sets

The CLI currently supports a subset of the UTF-8 encoding only. UTF-8 was designed for
backward compatibility with ASCII: the first 128 characters of UTF-8 correspond one-to-one
with ASCII. The CLI supports the ASCII printable characters (0x20 to 0x7e).

Quotes

The CLI supports using double quotes around parameters, where everything inside the quotes
is treated as a single parameter. This can be useful when typing a parameter that includes “?”,
as when quoting the help function will be disabled. To input a parameter where the first
character is a quote, enter the double quotes twice and the second quote will be used as the
first character of the parameter.

Comments

The CLI ignores entries that begin with “! ”. Use this feature to insert comments into your
command scripts. Note that a space must follow the !, otherwise the CLI will report an error.

Examples

The following example enables user access controls and adds a user named Bob with password
password123 who is assigned the security user role:
radio> enable
radio# configure terminal
radio(config)# user authentication enabled
radio(config)# username bob
radio(config-username) password password123
radio(config-username) access security
radio(config-username) exit
radio(config)# exit
radio# write memory
Please wait for configuration to activate.
Configuration Activated
radio# disable
radio# exit

The following example removes the user Bob:

radio> enable
radio# configure terminal
radio(config)# no username bob
radio(config)# exit
radio# write memory

226 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Please wait for configuration to activate.

Configuration Activated
radio# disable
radio# exit
8.4.3.2.1 CLI Configuration Commands

The following is a list of all the CLI configuration commands and the command mode that they
are available in.
· global configuration 227

· syslog server 234

· serial com1 234

· serial com2 235

· virtual-port 1 236

· virtual-port 2 237

· tcp-udp-gateway 1 237

· tcp-udp-gateway 2 238

· username 239

· radius server 239

· snmp-agent local-user 240

· snmp-agent remote-user 240

· nat port-forwarding-rule 241

· nat one-to-one-rule 241

· vlan membership 241

· qos match 242

· qos classifier 242

· qos policy 243

· firewall advanced radio-service custom 243

· firewall advanced traffic-bridge-filter radio-rule 244

· firewall advanced traffic-bridge-filter ethernet-rule 244

· firewall advanced traffic-router-filter radio-rule 245

· firewall advanced traffic-router-filter ethernet-rule 246

global configuration

Enter the global configuration mode with the following command from the configure command
mode.

configure

02/2022 227
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

The prompt will change to radio(config)#

The following commands are available within the global configuration mode.

ethernet port1 {enabled | disabled}

ethernet port2 {enabled | disabled}
ethernet port3 {enabled | disabled}
ethernet speed {auto | full-10 | half-10}
ip allocation {dhcp | static}
ip address ip-address
ip subnet-mask subnet-mask
ip default-gateway ip-address
ip primary-dns ip-address
ip secondary-dns ip-address
spanning-tree {enabled | disabled}
ntp server {enabled | disabled}
ntp client {enabled | disabled}
ntp sync-period minutes
ntp primary-server ip-address
clock timezone {-12 | -11 | -10 | -9 | -8 | -7 | -6 | -5 | -4 | -3.5 | -3 | -2 | -1 | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 |
5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 9.5 | 10 | 11 | 12}
clock dst-offset {-2 | -1.5 | -1 | -0.5 | 0 | 0.5 | 1 | 1.5 | 2}
clock set date-time
radio name string
radio location string
radio contact string
radio modulation compatibility {cpm | e-m-mode | qam}
radio channel-bandwidth {12.5 | 25 | 25-red}
radio data-rate {8 | 16 | 24 | 32 | dynamic | 14 | 28 | 42 | 56 | 10.4 | 14.4 | 16.6 | 20.0 |
20.8 | 28.8 | 33.2 | 40.0 | 43.2 | 49.8 | 60.0 | 9.6 | 13.3 | 15.4 | 18.5 | 19.2 | 26.6 | 30.6 |
36.9 | 39.9 | 46.0 | 55.4 | 41.6 | 57.6 | 66.4 | 80.0 | 86.4 | 99.6 | 120.0 | 15.6 | 21.6 | 24.9 |
30.0 | 31.2 | 64.8 | 74.7 | 90.0}
radio dss policy {arq | snr | rssi}
radio dss downstream-policy {arq | rssi}
radio dss fec {enabled | disabled}
radio dss data-rate min {8 | 16 | 24 | 32 | 14 | 28 | 42 | 56 | 20.0 | 40.0 | 60.0 | 10.4 | 14.4 |
16.6 | 20.8 | 28.8 | 33.2 | 43.2 | 49.8 | 18.5 | 36.9 | 55.4 | 9.6 | 13.3 | 15.4 | 19.2 | 26.6 |
30.6 | 39.9 | 46.0 | 80.0 | 120.0 | 41.6 | 57.6 | 66.4 | 86.4 | 99.6 | 30.0 | 90.0 | 15.6 | 21.6 |
24.9 | 31.2 | 64.8 | 74.7}
radio dss data-rate max {8 | 16 | 24 | 32 | 14 | 28 | 42 | 56 | 20.0 | 40.0 | 60.0 | 80.0 | 10.4
| 14.4 | 16.6 | 20.8 | 28.8 | 33.2 | 43.2 | 49.8 | 57.6 | 66.4 | 76.8 | 18.5 | 36.9 | 55.4 | 73.8 |
9.6 | 13.3 | 15.4 | 19.2 | 26.6 | 30.6 | 39.9 | 46.0 | 53.1 | 61.3 | 70.8 | 120.0 | 160.0 | 41.6 |
86.4 | 99.6 | 115.2 | 132.8 | 153.6 | 30.0 | 90.0 | 15.6 | 21.6 | 24.9 | 31.2 | 64.8 | 74.7}
radio dss rssi-offset decibels
radio modulation type {e-9600-12.5-etsi | e-19200-25-fcc | e-19200-12.5-fcc | e-9600-
12.5-fcc | e-9600-12.5-acma | e-19200-25-acma | m-2400-12.5-acma | m-4800-12.5-acma |
m-9600-25-acma | m-9600-12.5-fcc | m-4800-25-acma | m-4800-12.5-etsi}
radio dss beacon {disabled | remote | manager}

228 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

radio dss beacon id string

radio dss beacon de-sense-offset decibels
radio tx frequency megahertz
radio tx power level-dbm
radio rx frequency megahertz
radio rx mute level-dbm
radio antenna configuration {common | dual}
radio network-mode {bridge | ip-routing}
radio type {access-point | remote}
radio peer-to-peer-repeat {enabled | disabled}
radio arq-retries {disabled | 1 | 2}
radio ethernet-sid id-number
radio stream-repeat id-number
radio stream-translate id-number
radio channel-management mode {disabled | digital | carrier-detect | token-grant}
radio channel-management manager {enabled | disabled}
radio channel-management topology-function {manager | remote | repeater}
radio channel-management dynamic-polling {enabled | disabled}
radio channel-management data-priority {tx | rx}
radio channel-management backoff-method {retry-after-tx | delay-before-tx}
radio channel-management max-slots integer
radio channel-management slot-time milliseconds
radio channel-management access-mode {subscribed | random}
radio channel-management network-id id-number
radio channel-management segment-id id-number
radio channel-management repeater-segment-id id-number
radio simplex system-topology {disabled | ptmp | ptmp-repeater | mptmp}
radio simplex topology-function {entry-point | remote | repeater}
radio compression payload {off | low | medium | high}
radio compression header {off | low | medium | high}
radio compression header ptp {enabled | disabled}
radio diagnostic-beacon interval minutes
radio ptt {permanent-tx | auto}
radio ptt com1-rts {enabled | disabled}
radio ptt timeout seconds
radio tx high-temp-foldback {enabled | disabled}
low-power mode {disabled | rtu}
low-power ethernet {enabled | disabled}
syslog {enabled | disabled}
syslog server [index] [position]
syslog facility {local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7}
syslog severity {emergency | alert | critical | error | warning | notice | info | debug}
serial com1
serial com2
virtual-port 1
virtual-port 2
tcp-udp-gateway 1
tcp-udp-gateway 2

02/2022 229
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

diags polling from-sid id-number

diags polling to-sid id-number
diags repeat {enabled | disabled}
diags auto-poll {enabled | disabled}
diags auto-poll sid id-number
diags auto-poll interval seconds
diags auto-poll controller-address integer
ediags {enabled | disabled}
ediags controller ip ip-address
ediags controller port port-number
ediags local port port-number
ediags timeout seconds
user-authentication {enabled | disabled}
user-authentication type {local | radius | local-radius | radius-local}
username username [position]
telnet-server {enabled | disabled}
ssh-server {enabled | disabled}
https-server {enabled | disabled}
http-server {enabled | disabled}
usb port1 {enabled | disabled}
radius server [index] [position]
radius timeout seconds
radius retries num-retries
radio encryption mode {none | aes | aes-gcm}
radio encryption shared-key-256 {0 clear-encryption-key | 1 hashed-encryption-key |
clear-encryption-key}
radio encryption shared-key-128 {0 clear-encryption-key | 1 hashed-encryption-key |
clear-encryption-key}
radio access-control role {none | authenticator | supplicant}
radio access-control recovery-password {0 clear-password | 1 hashed-password | clear-
password}
radio access-control authenticator ip-address
snmp-agent {disabled | enabled}
snmp-agent version {1 | 1-2c | 1-2c-3 | 3}
snmp-agent engineid-suffix word
snmp-agent community ro community-string
snmp-agent community rw community-string
snmp-agent local-user username [position]
snmp-agent remote-user username [position]
snmp-agent notification {disabled | enabled}
snmp-agent notification version {1 | 2c | 3}
snmp-agent use-informs {disabled | enabled}
snmp-agent inform timeout seconds
snmp-agent inform retires num-retries
snmp-agent notification community community-string
snmp-agent manager 1 ip ip-address
snmp-agent manager 1 user username

230 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

snmp-agent manager 2 ip ip-address

snmp-agent manager 2 user username
snmp-agent manager 3 ip ip-address
snmp-agent manager 3 user username
snmp-agent manager 4 ip ip-address
snmp-agent manager 4 user username
snmp-agent heartbeat {enabled | disabled}
snmp-agent heartbeat interval minutes
radio gpio-1 snmp-notify {enabled | disabled}
radio gpio-2 snmp-notify {enabled | disabled}
hsc {enabled | disabled}
hsc shared-ip {enabled | disabled}
hsc shared-ip address ip-address
hsc pairing-key {0 clear-pairing-key | 1 hashed-pairing-key | clear-pairing-key}
base gpo-1 alt-function {enabled | disabled}
base gpo-2 alt-function {enabled | disabled}
base snmp gpi-1 snmp-notify {enabled | disabled}
base snmp gpi-2 snmp-notify {enabled | disabled}
base snmp gpi-3 snnp-notify {enabled | disabled}
radio health-alarm snmp-notify {enabled | disabled}
hsc changeover snmp-notify {enabled | disabled}
hsc periodic-changeover hours
ip wan address ip-address
ip wan subnet-mask subnet-mask
ip route route
ip direct-broadcast {enabled | disabled}
ip forward-broadcast {enabled | disabled}
nat {enabled | disabled}
nat double-snat {enabled | disabled}
nat port-forwarding-rule [index] [position]
nat one-to-one-rule [index] [position]
vlan {enabled | disabled}
vlan management-vlan id id-number
vlan scada-vlan {enabled | disabled}
vlan scada-vlan id id-number
vlan scada-vlan ip-address ip-address
vlan scada-vlan subnet-netmask subnet-mask
vlan scada-vlan default-gateway ip-address
vlan scada-vlan shared-ip-address ip-address
vlan com1 {management-vlan | scada-vlan}
vlan com2 {management-vlan | scada-vlan}
vlan tcp-udp-gateway {management-vlan | scada-vlan}
vlan eth1 mode {access | trunk}
vlan eth1 ingress-filtering {enabled | disabled}
vlan eth1 pvid id-number
vlan eth2 mode {access | trunk}
vlan eth2 ingress-filtering {enabled | disabled}
vlan eth2 pvid id-number

02/2022 231
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

vlan eth3 mode {access | trunk}

vlan eth3 ingress-filtering {enabled | disabled}
vlan eth3 pvid id-number
vlan membership [index] [position]
qos {enabled | disabled}
qos match name [position]
qos classifier name [position]
qos policy [index] [position]
firewall mode {advanced | basic}
firewall advanced radio-service allow-http-server {none | radio | ethernet | all}
firewall advanced radio-service allow-https-server {none | radio | ethernet | all}
firewall advanced radio-service allow-telnet-server {none | radio | ethernet | all}
firewall advanced radio-service allow-ssh-server {none | radio | ethernet | all}
firewall advanced radio-service allow-serial-device-server {none | radio | ethernet | all}
firewall advanced radio-service allow-tcp-udp-gateway {none | radio | ethernet | all}
firewall advanced radio-service allow-ediags {none | radio | ethernet | all}
firewall advanced radio-service allow-snmp-agent {none | radio | ethernet | all}
firewall advanced radio-service allow-ntp {none | radio | ethernet | all}
firewall advanced radio-service allow-icmp {none | radio | ethernet | all}
firewall advanced radio-service custom [index] [position]
firewall advanced traffic-bridge-filter default-action {drop | allow}
firewall advanced traffic-bridge-filter radio-rule [index] [position]
firewall advanced traffic-bridge-filter ethernet-rule [index] [position]
firewall advanced traffic-router-filter default-action {drop | allow}
firewall advanced traffic-router-filter radio-rule [index] [position]
firewall advanced traffic-router-filter ethernet-rule [index] [position]
firewall basic ethernet-type {allow-all | allow-arp-uni-multi | allow-arp-uni | allow-uni}
firewall basic traffic http {allow | drop}
firewall basic traffic https {allow | drop}
firewall basic traffic icmp {allow | drop}
firewall basic traffic telnet {allow | drop}
firewall basic traffic ediags {allow | drop}
firewall basic traffic snmp {allow | drop}
firewall basic traffic ssh {allow | drop}
firewall basic traffic netbios {allow | drop}
firewall basic traffic vlan {allow | drop}
firewall basic allow-port port-number [position]
firewall basic allow-mac-address mac-address [position]
firewall basic allow-ip-address ip-address [position]
alarms snmp-notify global {enabled | disabled}
alarms warning temperature {enabled | disabled}
alarms warning temperature units {celsius | fahrenheit}
alarms warning temperature upper celsius degrees-celsius
alarms warning temperature lower celsius degrees-celsius
alarms warning temperature upper fahrenheit degrees-fahrenheit
alarms warning temperature lower fahrenheit degrees-fahrenheit
alarms snmp-notify temperature {enabled | disabled}
alarms alarm-output temperature {enabled | disabled}

232 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

alarms warning frequency {enabled | disabled}

alarms warning frequency upper kilohertz
alarms warning frequency lower kilohertz
alarms snmp-notify frequency {enabled | disabled}
alarms warning rssi {enabled | disabled}
alarms warning rssi upper level-dbm
alarms warning rssi lower level-dbm
alarms snmp-notify rssi {enabled | disabled}
alarms warning vswr {enabled | disabled}
alarms warning vswr limit {1.5 | 2}
alarms snmp-notify vswr {enabled | disabled}
alarms alarm-output vswr {enabled | disabled}
alarms warning dc-supply {enabled | disabled}
alarms warning dc-supply upper voltage
alarms warning dc-supply lower voltage
alarms snmp-notify dc-supply {enabled | disabled}
alarms alarm-output dc-supply {enabled | disabled}
alarms warning eth-link {enabled | disabled}
alarms warning eth-link ip primary ip-address
alarms warning eth-link ip secondary ip-address
alarms warning eth-link retries num-retries
alarms warning eth-link retry-interval seconds
alarms snmp-notify eth-link {enabled | disabled}
alarms alarm-output eth-link {enabled | disabled}
alarms snmp-notify tx-power {enabled | disabled}
alarms alarm-output tx-power {enabled | disabled}
alarms snmp-notify pll-lock {enabled | disabled}
alarms alarm-output pll-lock {enabled | disabled}
alarms snmp-notify operational {enabled | disabled}
alarms alarm-output operational {enabled | disabled}
alarms snmp-notify fan {enabled | disabled}
alarms alarm-output fan {enabled | disabled}
alarms warning rx-packet-compare {enabled | disabled}
alarms warning rx-packet-compare differential percentage
alarms snmp-notify rx-packet-compare {enabled | disabled}
alarms alarm-output rx-packet-compare {enabled | disabled}
alarms warning rssi-compare {enabled | disabled}
alarms warning rssi-compare margin decibels
alarms warning rssi-compare offset decibels
alarms snmp-notify rssi-compare {enabled | disabled}
alarms alarm-output rssi-compare {enabled | disabled}
auto-config-save {disabled | enabled}
auto-config-save protocol {tftp | scp}
auto-config-save config-type {standard | sensitive}
auto-config-save server ip-address
auto-config-save file-path path
auto-config-save username username
auto-config-save password {0 clear-password | 1 hashed-password | clear-password}

02/2022 233
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

syslog server

Enter the syslog server command-specific mode with the following command from the
configure command mode.

syslog server [index] [position]

The prompt will change to radio(config-syslog-server)#

The following commands are available within the syslog server command-specific mode.

ip-address ip-address
port port-number
protocol {udp | tcp | tls}
position integer

serial com1

Enter the serial com1 command-specific mode with the following command from the configure
command mode.

serial com1

The prompt will change to radio(config-serial-com1)#

The following commands are available within the serial com1 command-specific mode.

mode {disabled | serial-device-server | modbus-gateway | text-terminal | serial-data-

port | system-port}
interface {rs232 | rs485}
flow-control {none | hardware}
dcd-function {disabled | rf-carrier-detect}
character-layer {9600-8n1 | 19200-8n1 | custom}
baudrate {300 | 600 | 1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200}
data-bits {7 | 8}
parity {odd | even | none}
stop-bits {1 | 2}
stream-mode {user-port | trunk-stream}
rx-sid id-number
tx-sid id-number
from-sid id-number
to-sid id-number
packet-layer {standard | modbus | dnp3 | medina | slip | custom}
packet-layer-custom frame-size min size-bytes
packet-layer-custom frame-size max size-bytes
packet-layer-custom char-input-timer milliseconds
packet-layer-custom eom-char-function {enabled | disabled}
packet-layer-custom eom-char-function eom-char character
protocol {tcp | udp | ppp}

234 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

tcp protocol-mode {client | server | client-server}

tcp local-ip port port-number
tcp primary-ip address ip-address
tcp primary-ip port port-number
tcp secondary-ip address ip-address
tcp secondary-ip port port-number
tcp retry-counter num-retries
tcp inactivity-timeout seconds
udp protocol-mode {ptp | ptmp | mptmp}
udp listen-mode {static | dynamic}
udp node-type {point | multi-point}
udp remote-ip address ip-address
udp remote-ip port port-number
udp local-ip port port-number
udp inactivity-timeout seconds
udp remote-ip multicast-address ip-address
udp local-ip multicast-address ip-address
udp multicast-ttl {same-subnet | same-site | same-region | same-continent |
unrestricted}
modbus-rtu-timeout seconds
ppp ip address ip-address

serial com2

Enter the serial com2 command-specific mode with the following command from the configure
command mode.

serial com2

The prompt will change to radio(config-serial-com2)#

The following commands are available within the serial com2 command-specific mode.

mode {disabled | serial-device-server | modbus-gateway | text-terminal | serial-data-

port | system-port}
character-layer {9600-8n1 | 19200-8n1 | custom}
baudrate {300 | 600 | 1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200}
data-bits {7 | 8}
parity {odd | even | none}
stop-bits {1 | 2}
stream-mode {user-port | trunk-stream}
rx-sid id-number
tx-sid id-number
from-sid id-number
to-sid id-number
packet-layer {standard | modbus | dnp3 | medina | slip | custom}
packet-layer-custom frame-size min size-bytes
packet-layer-custom frame-size max size-bytes

02/2022 235
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

packet-layer-custom char-input-timer milliseconds

packet-layer-custom eom-char-function {enabled | disabled}
packet-layer-custom eom-char-function eom-char character
protocol {tcp | udp | ppp}
tcp protocol-mode {client | server | client-server}
tcp local-ip port port-number
tcp primary-ip address ip-address
tcp primary-ip port port-number
tcp secondary-ip address ip-address
tcp secondary-ip port port-number
tcp retry-counter num-retries
tcp inactivity-timeout seconds
udp protocol-mode {ptp | ptmp | mptmp}
udp listen-mode {static | dynamic}
udp node-type {point | multi-point}
udp remote-ip address ip-address
udp remote-ip port port-number
udp local-ip port port-number
udp inactivity-timeout seconds
udp remote-ip multicast-address ip-address
udp local-ip multicast-address ip-address
udp multicast-ttl {same-subnet | same-site | same-region | same-continent |
unrestricted}
modbus-rtu-timeout seconds
ppp ip address ip-address

virtual-port 1

Enter the virtual-port 1 command-specific mode with the following command from the
configure command mode.

The prompt will change to radio(config-virtual-port-1)#

The following commands are available within the virtual-port 1 command-specific mode.

mode {disabled | user-port | trunk-stream | modbus-gateway}

rx-sid id-number
tx-sid id-number
from-sid id-number
to-sid id-number
protocol {tcp | udp}
protocol mode {client | server | client-server}
tcp local-ip port port-number
tcp primary-ip address ip-address
tcp primary-ip port port-number

236 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

tcp secondary-ip address ip-address

tcp secondary-ip port port-number
inactivity-timeout seconds
retry-counter num-retries
udp listen-mode {static | dynamic}
udp local-ip port port-number
udp remote-ip address ip-address
udp remote-ip port port-number
udp inactivity-timeout seconds
modbus-timeout seconds

virtual-port 2

Enter the virtual-port 2 command-specific mode with the following command from the
configure command mode.

virtual-port 2

The prompt will change to radio(config-virtual-port-2)#

The following commands are available within the virtual-port 2 command-specific mode.

mode {disabled | user-port | trunk-stream | modbus-gateway}

rx-sid id-number
tx-sid id-number
from-sid id-number
to-sid id-number
protocol {tcp | udp}
protocol mode {client | server | client-server}
tcp local-ip port port-number
tcp primary-ip address ip-address
tcp primary-ip port port-number
tcp secondary-ip address ip-address
tcp secondary-ip port port-number
inactivity-timeout seconds
retry-counter num-retries
udp listen-mode {static | dynamic}
udp local-ip port port-number
udp remote-ip address ip-address
udp remote-ip port port-number
udp inactivity-timeout seconds
modbus-timeout seconds

tcp-udp-gateway 1

Enter the tcp-udp-gateway 1 command-specific mode with the following command from the
configure command mode.

02/2022 237
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

tcp-udp-gateway 1

The prompt will change to radio(config-tcp-udp-gateway-1)#

The following commands are available within the tcp-udp-gateway 1 command-specific mode.

state {enabled | disabled}

inactivity-timeout seconds
retry-count num-retries
lan protocol {udp | tcp}
lan tcp mode {server | client}
lan udp mode {static | dynamic}
lan tcp remote-ip address ip-address
lan tcp remote-ip port port-number
lan udp remote-ip address ip-address
lan udp remote-ip port port-number
lan local-ip port port-number
radio protocol {udp | tcp}
radio tcp mode {server | client}
radio udp mode {ptp | ptmp-mc | ptmp-bc}
radio udp node-type {point | multi-point}
radio tcp remote-ip address ip-address
radio tcp remote-ip port port-number
radio udp remote-ip address ip-address
radio udp remote-ip multicast-address ip-address
radio udp remote-ip broadcast-address ip-address
radio udp remote-ip port port-number
radio udp local-ip multicast-address ip-address
radio local-ip port port-number
udp multicast-ttl {same-subnet | same-site | same-region | same-continent |
unrestricted}

tcp-udp-gateway 2

Enter the tcp-udp-gateway 2 command-specific mode with the following command from the
configure command mode.

tcp-udp-gateway 2

The prompt will change to radio(config-tcp-udp-gateway-2)#

The following commands are available within the tcp-udp-gateway 2 command-specific mode.

state {enabled | disabled}

inactivity-timeout seconds
retry-count num-retries
lan protocol {udp | tcp}
lan tcp mode {server | client}

238 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

lan udp mode {static | dynamic}

lan tcp remote-ip address ip-address
lan tcp remote-ip port port-number
lan udp remote-ip address ip-address
lan udp remote-ip port port-number
lan local-ip port port-number
radio protocol {udp | tcp}
radio tcp mode {server | client}
radio udp mode {ptp | ptmp-mc | ptmp-bc}
radio udp node-type {point | multi-point}
radio tcp remote-ip address ip-address
radio tcp remote-ip port port-number
radio udp remote-ip address ip-address
radio udp remote-ip multicast-address ip-address
radio udp remote-ip broadcast-address ip-address
radio udp remote-ip port port-number
radio udp local-ip multicast-address ip-address
radio local-ip port port-number
udp multicast-ttl {same-subnet | same-site | same-region | same-continent |
unrestricted}

username

Enter the username command-specific mode with the following command from the configure
command mode.

username username [position]

The prompt will change to radio(config-username)#

The following commands are available within the username command-specific mode.

state {disabled | enabled}

username username
password {0 hashed-password | 1 clear-password | hashed-password}
access {unrestricted | read-write-sec | read-write | read-only}
comment string
position integer

radius server

Enter the radius server command-specific mode with the following command from the
configure command mode.

radius server [index] [position]

The prompt will change to radio(config-radius-server)#

02/2022 239
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

The following commands are available within the radius server command-specific mode.

ip-address ip-address
port port-number
secret {0 clear-secret | 1 hashed-secret | clear-secret}
position integer

snmp-agent local-user

Enter the snmp-agent local-user command-specific mode with the following command from
the configure command mode.

snmp-agent local-user username [position]

The prompt will change to radio(config-snmp-agent-local-user)#

The following commands are available within the snmp-agent local-user command-specific
mode.

username username
access {rw | ro}
auth method {md5 | sha}
auth password {0 clear-password | 1 hashed-password | clear-password}
privacy method {des | aes}
privacy password {0 clear-password | 1 hashed-password | clear-password}
position integer

snmp-agent remote-user

Enter the snmp-agent remote-user command-specific mode with the following command from
the configure command mode.

snmp-agent remote-user username [position]

The prompt will change to radio(config-snmp-agent-remote-user)#

The following commands are available within the snmp-agent remote-user command-specific
mode.

username username
auth method {md5 | sha}
auth password {0 clear-password | 1 hashed-password | clear-password}
privacy method {des | aes}
privacy password {0 clear-password | 1 hashed-password | clear-password}
position integer

240 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

nat port-forwarding-rule

Enter the nat port-forwarding-rule command-specific mode with the following command from
the configure command mode.

nat port-forwarding-rule [index] [position]

The prompt will change to radio(config-nat-port-forwarding-rule)#

The following commands are available within the nat port-forwarding-rule command-specific
mode.

state {enabled | disabled}

protocol {all | tcp | udp}
wan-port port-number
target-ip ip-address
target-port port-number
comment string
position integer

nat one-to-one-rule

Enter the nat one-to-one-rule command-specific mode with the following command from the
configure command mode.

nat one-to-one-rule [index] [position]

The prompt will change to radio(config-nat-one-to-one-rule)#

The following commands are available within the nat one-to-one-rule command-specific mode.

state {enabled | disabled}

wan-ip ip-address
target-ip ip-address
count integer
comment string
position integer

vlan membership

Enter the vlan membership command-specific mode with the following command from the
configure command mode.

vlan membership [index] [position]

The prompt will change to radio(config-vlan-membership)#

The following commands are available within the vlan membership command-specific mode.

02/2022 241
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

state {enabled | disabled}

vid id-number
eth1 {enabled | disabled}
eth2 {enabled | disabled}
description string
position integer
eth3 {enabled | disabled}

qos match

Enter the qos match command-specific mode with the following command from the configure
command mode.

qos match name [position]

The prompt will change to radio(config-qos-match)#

The following commands are available within the qos match command-specific mode.

name word
ethernet-protocol {all | ipv4 | arp | vlan | custom protocol-number}
source-mac mac-address
destination-mac mac-address
vlan-id id-number
vlan-pcp integer
ip-protocol {all | tcp | udp | icmp | eigrp | custom protocol-number}
source-ip ip-address
destination-ip ip-address
source-port {all | http | https | ssh | telnet | tftp | ftp | ediags | snmp | snmp-traps |
modbus | dnp | custom port-number}
destination-port {all | http | https | ssh | telnet | tftp | ftp | ediags | snmp | snmp-traps |
modbus | dnp | custom port-number}
description string
position integer

qos classifier

Enter the qos classifier command-specific mode with the following command from the
configure command mode.

qos classifier name [position]

The prompt will change to radio(config-qos-classifier)#

The following commands are available within the qos classifier command-specific mode.

name word

242 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

matches string
description string
position integer

qos policy

Enter the qos policy command-specific mode with the following command from the configure
command mode.

qos policy [index] [position]

The prompt will change to radio(config-qos-policy)#

The following commands are available within the qos policy command-specific mode.

state {enabled | disabled}

priority {1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8}
min-bandwidth bandwidth-bps
max-bandwidth bandwidth-bps
classifiers string
description string
position integer

firewall advanced radio-service custom

Enter the firewall advanced radio-service custom command-specific mode with the following
command from the configure command mode.

firewall advanced radio-service custom [index] [position]

The prompt will change to radio(config-firewall-advanced-radio-service-custom)#

The following commands are available within the firewall advanced radio-service custom
command-specific mode.

state {enabled | disabled}

action {allow | drop}
interface [radio] [ethernet]
service [http] [https] [telnet] [ssh] [serial-dev-server] [gateway] [ediags] [snmp] [ntp]
[icmp]
mac-address mac-address
ip-address ip-address
description string
position integer

02/2022 243
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

firewall advanced traffic-bridge-filter radio-rule

Enter the firewall advanced traffic-bridge-filter radio-rule command-specific mode with the
following command from the configure command mode.

firewall advanced traffic-bridge-filter radio-rule [index] [position]

The prompt will change to radio(config-firewall-advanced-traffic-bridge-filter-radio-rule)#

The following commands are available within the firewall advanced traffic-bridge-filter radio-
rule command-specific mode.

state {enabled | disabled}

action {allow | drop}
direction {in | out | in-out}
source-mac mac-address
destination-mac mac-address
ethernet-protocol {all | ipv4 | arp | vlan | custom protocol-number}
vlan-id id-number
vlan-pcp integer
vlan-eth-protocol {all | ipv4 | arp | vlan | custom protocol-number}
ip-protocol {all | tcp | udp | icmp | eigrp | custom protocol-number}
source-ip ip-address
destination-ip ip-address
port-matching {common | separate}
common-port {all | http | https | ssh | telnet | tftp | ftp | ediags | snmp | snmp-traps |
modbus | dnp | custom port-number}
source-port {all | http | https | ssh | telnet | tftp | ftp | ediags | snmp | snmp-traps |
modbus | dnp | custom port-number}
destination-port {all | http | https | ssh | telnet | tftp | ftp | ediags | snmp | snmp-traps |
modbus | dnp | custom port-number}
description string
position integer

firewall advanced traffic-bridge-filter ethernet-rule

Enter the firewall advanced traffic-bridge-filter ethernet-rule command-specific mode with

the following command from the configure command mode.

firewall advanced traffic-bridge-filter ethernet-rule [index] [position]

The prompt will change to radio(config-firewall-advanced-traffic-bridge-filter-ethernet-rule)

#

The following commands are available within the firewall advanced traffic-bridge-filter
ethernet-rule command-specific mode.

state {enabled | disabled}

244 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

action {allow | drop}

direction {in | out | in-out}
source-mac mac-address
destination-mac mac-address
ethernet-protocol {all | ipv4 | arp | vlan | custom protocol-number}
vlan-id id-number
vlan-pcp integer
vlan-eth-protocol {all | ipv4 | arp | vlan | custom protocol-number}
ip-protocol {all | tcp | udp | icmp | eigrp | custom protocol-number}
source-ip ip-address
destination-ip ip-address
port-matching {common | separate}
common-port {all | http | https | ssh | telnet | tftp | ftp | ediags | snmp | snmp-traps |
modbus | dnp | custom port-number}
source-port {all | http | https | ssh | telnet | tftp | ftp | ediags | snmp | snmp-traps |
modbus | dnp | custom port-number}
destination-port {all | http | https | ssh | telnet | tftp | ftp | ediags | snmp | snmp-traps |
modbus | dnp | custom port-number}
description string
position integer

firewall advanced traffic-router-filter radio-rule

Enter the firewall advanced traffic-router-filter radio-rule command-specific mode with the
following command from the configure command mode.

firewall advanced traffic-router-filter radio-rule [index] [position]

The prompt will change to radio(config-firewall-advanced-traffic-router-filter-radio-rule)#

The following commands are available within the firewall advanced traffic-router-filter radio-
rule command-specific mode.

state {enabled | disabled}

action {allow | drop}
direction {in | out | in-out}
mac-address mac-address
connection-state [invalid] [established] [new] [related]
ip-protocol {all | tcp | udp | icmp | eigrp | custom protocol-number}
source-ip ip-address
destination-ip ip-address
icmp-type {all | echo-reply | destination-unreachable | redirect | echo-request | custom
integer}
icmp-code integer
port-matching {common | separate}
common-port {all | http | https | ssh | telnet | tftp | ftp | ediags | snmp | snmp-traps |
modbus | dnp | custom port-number}
source-port {all | http | https | ssh | telnet | tftp | ftp | ediags | snmp | snmp-traps |

02/2022 245
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

modbus | dnp | custom port-number}

destination-port {all | http | https | ssh | telnet | tftp | ftp | ediags | snmp | snmp-traps |
modbus | dnp | custom port-number}
description string
position integer

firewall advanced traffic-router-filter ethernet-rule

Enter the firewall advanced traffic-router-filter ethernet-rule command-specific mode with

the following command from the configure command mode.

firewall advanced traffic-router-filter ethernet-rule [index] [position]

The prompt will change to radio(config-firewall-advanced-traffic-router-filter-ethernet-rule)

#

The following commands are available within the firewall advanced traffic-router-filter
ethernet-rule command-specific mode.

state {enabled | disabled}

action {allow | drop}
direction {in | out | in-out}
mac-address mac-address
connection-state [invalid] [established] [new] [related]
ip-protocol {all | tcp | udp | icmp | eigrp | custom protocol-number}
source-ip ip-address
destination-ip ip-address
icmp-type {all | echo-reply | destination-unreachable | redirect | echo-request | custom
integer}
icmp-code integer
port-matching {common | separate}
common-port {all | http | https | ssh | telnet | tftp | ftp | ediags | snmp | snmp-traps |
modbus | dnp | custom port-number}
source-port {all | http | https | ssh | telet | tftp | ftp | ediags | snmp | snmp-traps |
modbus | dnp | custom port-number}
destination-port {all | http | https | ssh | telnet | tftp | ftp | ediags | snmp | snmp-traps |
modbus | dnp | custom port-number}
description string
position integer

8.4.3.3 Configuration (TUI)

Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) and Secure Copy Protocol (SCP) clients

As of firmware 1.4.0, radio configuration files can be saved and/or loaded via TFTP.

As of firmware 2.2.4, radio configuration files can be saved and/or loaded via SCP.

246 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

TFTP and SCP file saving/loading is available within the Text User Interface (TUI) only.

For a file transaction to occur, the file transfer client within the radio requires a connection to
an active server. TFTP and SCP server software is available on the internet and can be installed
on a PC and can operate in the background.

· To access the radio transfer client within the TUI, go to Configuration -> Configuration file
Load/Save

To connect to a TFTP or SCP server, the following parameters are required by the radio:

· Transfer Mode: Select the required transfer protocol. This needs to match the software
installed on the target PC.
· Server IP: Specify the IP address of where the server resides (the server can be connected
via a radio link, or directly connected to the radio).
· Server Port: Specify the IP port number on which the server is listening on. (Default: TFTP
69, SCP 22)
· Server File: Specify the name of the file being saved/loaded. The default file name is the
radio model, serial number, and radio name. If the name is changed from default, only
alphanumeric characters (without spaces) can be used.
Additional configuration is required for the SCP transfer:
· Server File Path: Specify the path (relative to the server’
s root) to save to/load from. This is
specified using Linux file notation (using "/" to separate folders). To save to the root folder,
enter a single "/" character.
· User: Specify the name of the user to authenticate with the SCP server.
· Password: Specify the password of the specified user to authenticate with the SCP server.

02/2022 247
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

To initiate an action:

· Load configuration from Server: Using the information provided, the radio will attempt to:
o Establish a connection with a server at the specified IP address and port number.
o If a connection is successful, the radio will then request from the server, a configuration
file to load into the radio (a previously stored configuration file within the TFTP Server is
required). The name of the file requested is that which is specified within the server file
parameter. Ensure that the spelling and case sense of the file name is correct.
o Once the file is successfully loaded into the radio, use the Esc key to navigate back to the
main menu to allow activation of the loaded configuration file.
o Once the configuration file has been activated, if the new configuration contained a
different IP address from the previous configuration and the TUI connection had been
established via an IP connection, a new IP connection may need to be established (i.e.
new Telnet or SSH session) targeting the new IP address of the radio.
· Save active configuration (without sensitive data) to Server: Save the active
configuration file of the radio to the server specified. The name of the file saved will be that
which is specified within the server file parameter.
· Save active configuration (with sensitive data) to Server: Save the active configuration
file, including secure information of the radio to the server specified.
For more details on saved secure information, see Configuration (WUI) 219 .

8.4.3.4 Automatic Configuration Save

Available as of firmware version 2.1.0

Configuration changes in a radio can be uploaded (synchronized) over-the-air or via LAN port
to a TFTP or SCP server to facilitate management of radio configurations in a central location.
After a user initiates a configuration activation in the radio, the radio will attempt to upload the
configuration file to the server. The process will retry if unsuccessful.

The configuration file format that is saved on the server is fixed at: TRIO_[RadioModel]
_[RadioSerial].cfg or TRIO_TRIO_[RadioModel]_[RadioSerial]_[RadioName].cfg if a radio
name has been configured in the radio.

Upon activation of the configuration synchronization process, a random delay time of between
5...30 minutes is applied before uploading is attempted. If any attempt is unsuccessful, then the
delay timer is reset to a random time between 30...180 minutes. This process will repeat until
successfully uploaded. For testing of the configuration without a delay time, a test facility is
available and can be found in Maintenance -> Test -> Automation Configuration Save Test.

The configuration file will be uploaded to the TFTP/SCP server and stored in the servers’
configured upload path. A subfolder below the default folder configured in the TFTP/SCP serve
may be specified in the File Path parameter using the format /foldername.

The process can be monitored through events logged in the user event log.

8.4.3.5 USB Automatic Configuration Activation

Available as of firmware version 2.1.0

248 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

A user can activate a new radio configuration in a radio via the USB host port without the need
for a computer or a HTTP connection. The configuration file to be activated needs to be located
on a USB drive that is inserted into the USB host port of the radio. Activation of the radio
configuration will only occur when the radio is in a factory default state and the radio is power-
cycled with the USB drive inserted.

A similar process is available for onboarding of radios using certificate based Radio Access
Control.

For more details, see Radio Access Control 316 .

USB host port

The USB host port is a USB series A receptacle that allows the radio to act as a host for a plug-
in USB drive. For bus-powered USB devices, the port can provide up to 100 mA at 5 volts.

The following USB devices are not supported:

· USB hubs are not supported. USB hubs are devices that allow multiple USB devices to
connect to a single USB port.
· Any USB memory device that incorporates an actual rotating hard-drive. These units are
typically the size of a cell phone or larger and may mention in their documentation any of the
following terms: IDE, 2.5”, 3.5”, or, some number of RPM.
· Any USB memory device larger than 32 GB

USB drive format

The USB drive must be formatted as FAT32. You can use a PC to format a USB drive to FAT32
file format.

To format a new USB drive to FAT32 format

1. Right-click the USB drive and select Format.

2. If you have a choice of FAT and FAT32, select FAT32.

Configuration file naming conventions

There are two file-naming conventions that are supported in this feature:

· Load configuration file with the generic filename of Auto.cfg. This method is useful when a
single configuration file is copied to the USB drive (and renamed to Auto.cfg) prior to use.
· Load configuration file with unique (i.e. radio-specific) filename (i.e.
Trio_QR450_123456.cfg). This method is useful when a multiple number of radio
configuration files are stored on the USB drive.
File name format must match ‘
Trio_XXXXX_123456.cfg, where ‘ XXXXX‘is the radio model
(i.e. QR450) and ‘
123456‘is the serial number of the target radio, to have the configuration
activated.
If a configuration file from another radio serial number is to be duplicated into a radio of a
different serial number, the new target radio serial number must appear in the filename.

02/2022 249
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

The Automatic Configuration Management tool will add any configured Radio Name as text
after the serial number. All text after the serial number is ignored. e.g.
TRIO_QR450_713246_Remote_WTP.cfg
Note: This feature requires configuration files that have been saved from radios running
firmware R2.1.x or later. If security features are enabled in the radio configuration, the radio
configuration must be saved with the ‘ standard with sensitive data‘option.

8.4.4 Diagnostics

Trio Q Data Radios provide access to diagnostics information in multiple different views, each
with a specific purpose. Within each view, common diagnostics parameters are displayed. The
following sections on each view detail how the diagnostics are displayed and what each
parameter means.

See:
· Summary Page 250

· Network List 251

· Syslog 255

8.4.4.1 Summary Page

The summary page can be accessed via the Web User Interface (WUI) or the Text User
Interface (TUI).

In the WUI, it is located under Monitoring -> Summary and an example is shown below.

250 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

8.4.4.2 Network List

The Network List can be accessed via the Web User Interface (WUI).

In the WUI it is located under Monitoring -> Network List and an example is shown below.

02/2022 251
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Operation

The Network List contains diagnostics information relating to neighboring (i.e. other) radios. The
Network List is a dynamic list of diagnostics data gathered from received packets or from a
dedicated diagnostics beacon over the last 28 days.

For example, when an Entry Point radio receives a valid data packet from a remote radio, or
transmits a unicast packet to the remote radio, a row for that remote (identified by the unique
serial number) is added or updated in the network list. Only a limited amount of data can be
gathered from received or transmitted packets. The network list is volatile and is cleared during
a power cycle.

At regular intervals, the remote will transmit a diagnostics beacon. The Diagnostics Beacon
contains the current values of diagnostics parameters as measured by the remote radio. When
received by the Entry Point, the Entry Point extracts the diagnostics values and displays them in
the appropriate columns for that radio. The parameters that are derived from a diagnostics
beacon are shown in italics.

Diagnostics beacons are transmitted at regular, user configurable intervals. For radio channel
efficiency, the radio will buffer a diagnostics beacon and attach it to a user data transmission if
possible. If there is irregular or insufficient user data to do this, the radio will transmit the
beacon by itself. Upon power cycle, a radio will transmit an initial diagnostics beacon to
announce its existence on the network to other radios. Radios configured as Manager Radios in
TGCM mode of operation transmit diagnostics beacons at fixed 30 second intervals.

In a remote radio that is receiving beacons from a Hot Standby Radio, only one row is shown
for the Hot Standby Radio, identified by the serial number of the Hot Standby Controller.

the Hot Standby Radio, identified by the serial number of the Hot Standby Controller.

The Network List can be sorted in ascending or descending order by clicking on the column
header. Consecutive clicks on the same column switches between ascending and descending
sort, indicated with a green up and down arrow respectively.

The Network List can also be filtered. Columns with a filter currently applied are highlighted in
blue. To apply a filter, type the filter text into the column’
s text box. The following operators may
be used in a filter:

252 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Operator Description Column Type Example

< Match values less than Number <1234

<= Match values equal or less than Number <=1234

> Match values greater than Number >1234

>= Match values equal or greater Number >=1234

than

= Match values equal to Number/String =Entry Point

* Partial match values Number/String *Point

! Match values not equal to Number/String !Entry Point

{ Match values starting with Number/String {Rem

} Match values ending with Number/String }mote

|| Match at least one search term Number/String {Entry || {Remote

&& Match all search terms Number/String {Entry && }Point

[empty] Match empty values Any [empty]

[nonempty] Match non-empty values Any [nonempty]

rgx: Match using regular expression Any rgx:^Remote

Filters may be applied to multiple columns simultaneously. To clear all filters, click the icon
at the top right of the table.

The Network List can be saved to .CSV format for further analysis and is available to be
extracted via SNMP or using EcoStruxure Geo SCADA Expert (ClearSCADA).

Configuration

The diagnostics beacon can be configured via Setup -> Radio -> Advanced Parameters as
shown in the image below.

Diagnostics Parameters

02/2022 253
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

The network list contains the following diagnostics parameters:

· Remote IP Address #: The (WAN/LAN) IP address of the neighboring radio for which a
packet of data was received by this radio.
· Remote Radio Name #: The configured radio name of the neighboring radio.
· Serial Number Rx: The radio serial number of the neighboring radio that this row of
diagnostics information relates to.
o Note: Hot standby radios will identify with the serial number of the Hot Standby controller
· Last Packet Rx (min): The amount of time elapsed since the last packet was received from
the neighboring radio.
· Last Packet Rx (date/time): The timestamp when the last packet was received from the
neighboring radio.
· Authorization State: The current authorization state of the radio (only applicable is radio
access control is enabled).
· Tx Data Rate (kbps): The data rate of the last packet transmitted to this specific neighboring
radio.
· Tx Path Loss (dB): The path loss of the RF link when transmitting to this specific
neighboring radio.
· Tx Retry Rate (%): The average rate of Transmit Retried packets to this specific neighboring
radio.
· Tx Disc. Rate (%): The average rate of Discarded Transmit packets to this specific
neighboring radio due to a packet exceeding the Transmit Retry count.
· Rx Dupl. Disc. Rate (%): The average rate of duplicate packets received from the
neighboring radio.
· Rx Data Rate (kbps): The data rate of the last packet transmitted to this specific neighboring
radio.
· RSSI (dBm): The receive signal strength of the last packet received from the neighboring
radio.
· RSSI avg. (dBm): The average RSSI of the last twenty (20) packets received from the
neighboring radio.
· SNR (dB): The signal to noise ratio of the last packet received from the neighboring radio.
· EVM (%): The error vector magnitude of the last packet received from the neighboring radio.
· Rx Ch. Occ. (%): The average proportion of time that packets from the neighboring radio are
being transmitted on the receive channel (as a percentage of total time averaged over five (5)
minutes).
· Tx Thput (kB/Hr): The average byte rate of packets transmitted to the neighboring radio
· Rx Thput (kB/Hr): The average byte rate of packets received from the neighboring radio
· Remote Tx Retry Rate (%): The average rate of Transmit Retried packets from this specific
neighboring radio.
· Remote Tx Disc. Rate (%): The average rate of Discarded Transmit packets from this
specific neighboring radio due to a packet exceeding the Transmit Retry count.

254 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

· Remote RSSI (dBm) #: The receive signal strength of the last packet received by the
neighboring radio.
· Remote RSSI avg. (dBm) #: The average RSSI of the last twenty (20) packets received by
the neighboring radio.
· Remote Dynamic Mute Level (dBm) #: The dynamic mute level of the neighboring radio.
· Remote SNR (dB) #: The signal to noise ratio of the last packet received by the neighboring
radio.
· Remote EVM (%) #: The error vector magnitude of the last packet received from the
neighboring radio.
· Remote Freq Offset (Hz) #: The difference in received frequency of last packet compared
to configured frequency.
· Remote Supply Voltage (V) #: The current reported supply voltage of the neighboring radio.
· Remote Fwd Power (dBm) #: The measured transmit power of the neighboring radio.
· Remote VSWR #: The VSWR of the neighboring radio.
· Remote Set Power (dBm) #: The set power of the neighboring radio.
· Remote Temp C #: The current radio temperature in Celsius of the neighboring radio.
· Remote Temp F #: The current radio temperature in Fahrenheit of the neighboring radio.
· Remote Comp (%) #: The percentage of compression achieved for data transmitted by the
neighboring radio.
· Remote Up Time (min) #: The neighboring radio system up time.
· Remote Global Alarm #: The global alarm state of the neighboring radio.
· Last Diags. Beacon Rx (min): The amount of time elapsed since the last diagnostics beacon
was received from the neighboring radio.

8.4.4.3 Syslog

Trio Q Data Radios support syslog for transferring event logs to a remote syslog server. Syslog
format defined by RFC-5424 is supported. The implementation supports TLS, TCP, and UDP for
message transport.

NOTICE
INSECURE COMMUNICATIONS
Syslog communications on TCP and UDP can be insecure because these protocols transmit
data in clear text.
It is strongly recommended to use the TLS protocol for secure communications of syslog
events.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in the loss of data confidentiality.

02/2022 255
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Syslog Message Format

Values assigned to syslog fields by Trio Q Data Radios are listed in the following table.

Syslog Value Notes

Protocol Field

<PRI> <PRI> PRI = facility*8 + severity

VERSION 1 Defined by RFC-5424

TIMESTAMP TIMESTAMP Timestamp when the event occurred on the

radio, expressed in UTC

HOSTNAME RADIO IP ADDRESS IP Address assigned to the radio

APP-NAME Trio -

PROCID PROCID Process that originated the message

MSG ID EVENT ID ID of the event as defined in Events 270

STRUCTURED [ meta This parameter tracks the sequence in which

DATA sequenceId=”seq_num” the radio submits messages to the syslog
] server. Te sequence starts at 1 when the
syslog function is started and is incremented
by 1 with every message up to a maximum
value of 2147483647. If that value is reached,
the next message is sent with a sequence ID of
1.

MSG BODY EVENT DESCRIPTION Complete description of the event

Configuration

Syslog Configuration is located under Setup -> Syslog.

· Enable: Enables or disables the syslog service

256 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

· Servers: Configures the address, port, and protocol of the syslog servers. Up to 5 servers
can be configured. The radio connects to only one server at a time. In the case of a
connection error, the radio tries to connect with the next server in the list.
· Facility: Configures the facility value that will be embedded in every event sent to the syslog
server from this radio
· Maximum Severity: Events with the configured severity level or higher will be sent to the
syslog server. The severity of each event is defined in Events 270 .

Syslog TLS Configuration

To establish a connection with a syslog server over TLS, certificates of the syslog server need
to be uploaded to the radio.

Upload certificates on the Syslog Management screen, as shown below.

To upload a certificate

1. Navigate to Maintenance -> Syslog Management.

2. Click Choose File.

3. Under Upload Remote Certificate, click Upload.

Certificates can come in a bundle as .pem file or as individual .crt certificates. Trio Q Data
Radios accept both formats. If a bundle is uploaded, the radio will split it into its constituent
certificates before storing them. Trio Q Data Radios can support a maximum of 250 certificates
for syslog server authentication.

The Certificate List displays the certificates by their Common Name (CN) embedded in their
Subject header. If a CN is not found, then the whole subject is displayed.

02/2022 257
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

All certificates in the list are trusted by the radio when establishing TLS connection with the
syslog server.

To delete a single or multiple certificates from the Certificate List

1. Select the certificate(s) that you want to delete.

2. At the bottom of the list of certificates, click Delete.

If the server requires mutual authentication for TLS, the certificate of the radio must be
uploaded to the syslog server.

To upload the certificate to the syslog server, in the Download section, click Save.

Event Log

Event Record Notes

ID# Severi Event Description Event Detail

ty

750 EVENT Syslog Connection Connecting to <server

Initiated address/ip>:port on <protocol>

751 EVENT Syslog Connection Connected to <server

Successful address/ip>:port on <protocol>

755 EVENT Syslog Connection Failed to connect to <server This event is

Error address/ip>:port on <protocol> raised when an
attempt to
connect results
in failure.

756 EVENT Syslog Connection Connection with <server This event is

Interrupted address/ip>:port on <protocol> raised when an
was interrupted established
connection is
interrupted.

8.4.5 Alarms

The Trio Q Data Radio can monitor the condition of various diagnostic and operating
parameters (i.e DC volts, Tx Power, etc). The radio’
s active alarms can be evaluated by
observing the event history and alarm states.

The alarm states can be viewed within the Monitoring section of the Web User Interface
(Monitoring -> Alarms and Events).

258 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

See:
· Alarm states 259

· Configuration 259

· Warning state 260

Alarm states

Depending on active values of monitored alarms, the alarm states can be displayed in different
levels of severities, including:

· Disabled: The alarm is not being monitored

· Normal: The alarm value is in normal (acceptable) operating conditions
· Recovered: The alarm has recovered from a warning or critical state, back into normal
operating conditions, the alarm state will remain in a recovered state, until either, the alarms
are reset (by clicking Reset Alarms at the top corner of the window) or the alarm state
changes again.
· Warning: The alarm is within the warning threshold limits defined by the user
· Critical: The alarm is outside of the hardware limits of the radio (alarms which can reach
critical severity, cannot be disabled)

Configuration

The diagram below provides an example of how an alarm state can be deemed ‘ Normal’or
‘Critical’
. The example shows the value thresholds for the normal and critical state of the DC
supply in a QB. Once a DC supply measurement is taken, the behavior of the alarm state
reporting structure is as follows:

02/2022 259
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

· Normal: If the value falls within the green zone (11 to 30 Vdc) the alarm state can display
‘
normal’as this is an acceptable operating value.
· Critical: If the value falls within the red zone (below 11 Vdc or above 30 Vdc) the alarm state
can display ‘ critical’as these values are the hardware limits of the radio (the radio may switch
off or self protect depending on the extremity of the critical value).

Warning state

Enable/Disable the warning state for the respective alarm being configured. The warning state
can help prevent a critical alarm from occurring, by indicating an alarm value has been
measured outside of ‘ normal’operating conditions, but, still within ‘
critical’operating conditions.
This means a warning alarm can be active, before a critical alarm state is reached.

Once the warning alarm is enabled, a limit/threshold should be configured. The diagram below
provides an example of how the warning alarm is implemented into the alarm state reporting
structure for the DC supply in a QB. Once a DC supply measurement is taken, the behavior of
the alarm state reporting structure is as follows:

· Normal: If the value falls within the green zone (12 to 28 Vdc) the alarm state can display
‘
normal’as this is an acceptable operating value.
· Warning: If the value falls within the amber zone (11 to 12 Vdc OR 28 to 30 Vdc) the alarm
state can display ‘
warning’as this has been configured by the user to be outside of normal
operating conditions.
· Critical: If the value falls within the red zone (below 11 Vdc or above 30 Vdc) the alarm state
can display ‘ critical’as these values are the hardware limits of the radio (the radio may switch
off or self protect depending on the extremity of the critical value).

260 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

See:

· Alarm Specifications 261

· QB and Hot Standby Specific Alarm Specifications 265

· Alarm Subscription 266

· Alarm Output 268

· Hot Standby Alarm Status 268

8.4.5.1 Alarm Specifications

To perform alarm configuration, go to Setup -> Alarms.

Global Alarm

The global alarm reflects the highest severity state of all the alarm states being monitored.
This can allow a user to monitor the global alarm state, and if/when the alarm state changes,
a detailed review of the radio’
s operating condition can be performed.

Subscriptions available SNMP Notifications

Operational

The operational alarm will display a critical state during situations that cannot be resolved by
the user through factory default, configuration or firmware upgrade. While an operation
alarm is critical, the radio’
s transmitter may become disabled.

Subscriptions available SNMP Notifications, Alarm Output

02/2022 261
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Temperature

Units of measurement available Celsius, Fahrenheit

State Change Hysteresis 1 °C (1.8 °F)

Subscriptions available SNMP Notifications, Alarm Output

Critical Alarm

Upper Critical Alarm Threshold 81 °C (177.8 °F)

Lower Critical Alarm Threshold -40 °C (-40 °F)

Warning Alarm

Default Upper Warning Alarm Threshold 70 °C (158 °F)

Default Lower Warning Alarm Threshold -10 °C (14 °F)

Configurable Warning Alarm Threshold -40...70 °C (-40...158 °F)

Range

Frequency Offset

Units of measurement available Hz

State Change Hysteresis 5 Hz

Subscriptions available SNMP Notifications

Warning Alarm

Default Upper Warning Alarm Threshold 1000 Hz

Default Lower Warning Alarm Threshold -1000 Hz

Configurable Warning Alarm Threshold 3000...-3000 Hz

Range

262 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

RSSI

Units of measurement available dBm

State Change Hysteresis 1 dBm

Subscriptions available SNMP Notifications

Warning Alarm

Default Upper Warning Alarm Threshold 50 dBm

Default Lower Warning Alarm Threshold -120 dBm

Configurable Warning Alarm Threshold -140...0 dBm

Range

VSWR

Measurement taken Ratio

Subscriptions available SNMP Notifications, Alarm Output

Critical Alarm

Upper Critical Alarm limit 10:1

Warning Alarm

Default Warning Alarm Limit 3:1

Configurable Warning Alarm Limits 1.5:1, 2:1, or 3:1

02/2022 263
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

DC Supply

Units of measurement available DC Volts

State Change Hysteresis 0.3 Vdc

Subscriptions available SNMP Notifications, Alarm Output

Critical Alarm

Upper Critical Alarm Threshold 30 Vdc

Lower Critical Alarm Threshold 10 Vdc

Warning Alarm

Default Upper Warning Alarm Threshold 28 Vdc

Default Lower Warning Alarm Threshold 12 Vdc

Configurable Warning Alarm Threshold 10...30 Vdc

Range

Ethernet Link

The Ethernet link monitor will send pings to a user defined IP address. The radio can raise a
warning alarm, if a ping response is not received from the specified IP device.

Subscriptions available SNMP Notifications, Alarm Output

Warning Alarm

Primary IP The primary IP address to test

Secondary IP The secondary IP address to test

Fail Threshold The number of failed pings allowed before an

alarm is raised

Retry Interval The number of seconds to wait before

retrying a failed ping

264 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

TX Power

Units of measurement available dBm

State Change Hysteresis 2 dBm

Subscriptions available SNMP Notifications, Alarm Output (QB & QP

only)

Critical Alarm

A Critical alarm will be raised if the radio detects a Tx power level which is +/- 2 dBm of the
target Tx power.

PLL Lock

A critical alarm can be raised if a PLL has been detected out of lock.

Subscriptions available SNMP Notifications, Alarm Output

8.4.5.2 QB and Hot Standby Specific Alarm Specifications

Fan

A critical alarm can be raised if a fan alarm has been detected.

Subscriptions available SNMP Notifications, Alarm Output

Base Health

The base health alarm is a warning indicator (alarm state can be either normal or warning),
which is subscribed to the radio’ s alarm output. This can allow a user to monitor the base
health alarm state, and if/when the alarm state changes, a detailed review of the radio’s
operating condition can be performed.

Subscriptions available SNMP Notifications

The following hot standby specific alarms can only be configured once HSC mode has been
enabled within the radio. To enable HSC mode, go to Setup -> Basestation.

02/2022 265
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Rx Packet Comparison

A hot standby radio can compare the number of good packets received by radio A and radio
B.
A warning alarm can be raised if the differential between good packets received by the
configured radio and good packets received by the alternate radio is greater than the
specified differential. Primarily used in separate antenna arrangements.

Subscriptions available SNMP Notifications, Alarm Output

Warning Alarm

Default Differential Value (%) 20 %

RSSI Comparison

A hot standby radio can compare the level of RSSI received by radio A and radio B. A
warning alarm can be raised if the reported RSSI of the configured radio is lower than the
reported RSSI of the alternate radio by the specified margin (dB).
An offset should be used where the configured radio has an expected reduced RSSI,
compared to that of the alternate radio.
The offset can help detect RSSI compare alarms more accurately within a Hot standby
arrangement which uses separate antennas for each radio.
The Margin and Offset are configured as a negative number

Subscriptions available SNMP Notifications, Alarm Output

Warning Alarm

Default Margin Value (dB) -10 dB

Default Offset Value (dB) 0

8.4.5.3 Alarm Subscription

Services can be subscribed to alarm state changes for respective alarms. Depending on which
service is enabled, a state change can either raise an alarm output, or, send a notification.

The diagram below provides an example of a DC supply dropping and recovering over time.

266 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

SNMP

The SNMP notifications service can be subscribed to an alarm. This can cause an SNMP
notification to be sent to the configured SNMP NMS each time a subscribed alarm changes
state. Referring to the example above, an SNMP notification would be sent during each alarm
state change.

The SNMP agent and notifications section should be enabled and configured (Setup -> SNMP)
before the SNMP notification service can be subscribed to alarms (review the SNMP section for
information on the SNMP agent configuration).

To subscribe the SNMP notification service to an alarm, go to Setup -> Alarms, and enable
SNMP Notification for the respective alarm being subscribed to.

02/2022 267
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

8.4.5.4 Alarm Output

Available in QB & QP hardware only. The radio alarm output is an internal dual-state indicator
(ON/OFF) which can control the dynamic changeover mechanism within a QH (QB with HSC
mode enabled) and a QP.

By subscribing the alarm output service to an alarm, the alarm output will turn ON when any
subscribed alarm has reached the highest level of alarm severity and will turn OFF when no
subscribed alarms are in their highest level of alarm severity.

To subscribe the alarm output service to an alarm, go to Setup -> Alarms, and enable Alarm
Output for the respective alarm being subscribed to.

8.4.5.5 Hot Standby Alarm Status

The active condition of a hot standby can easily be reviewed via the hot standby status window.
To access this window, go to Monitoring -> Hot Standby Status.

Alarms for a particular radio can be reset, by clicking Reset at the bottom of the respective
radios' alarms column.

268 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Latched alarms

Once some alarms within a radio have been detected in their most severe state, the hot standby
will no longer dynamically switch over to that radio, to help prevent switching over to a non-
functional radio. These types of alarms are called ‘ Latching Alarms’ .

Latching alarms may be reported in a recovered state, but will prevent the hot standby from
dynamically changing over to the respective radio, until the alarms have been manually reset.

The list of latching alarms includes:

· Tx Power
· PLL Lock
· Operational

A Manual changeover on the front panel switch, or remotely forces change-over, can over-ride,
but not clear, a latched alarm.

02/2022 269
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

8.4.6 Events

The Trio Q Data Radios can log meaningful events that occur though out the operation of the
radio. These events are viewable within the monitoring section (Monitoring -> Alarms and
Events).

Each event that is recorded includes the following information:

· Time Stamp: The time stamp is only accurate, when the time configuration has been set
(Setup -> Network). If the time configuration has not been set, the default starting time for
the radio will be used.
· Event ID: Each type of event has a unique event identification number. The event IDs and
corresponding event descriptions are shown within tables on the following pages.
· Severity: There are different event severities depending on the respective event:
o EVENT: This is an indicative event to record behavior of the radio (i.e power up, firmware
update).
o NORMAL: This indicates that the recorded event is within acceptable operating conditions
o WARNING: This indicates that the recorded event is within configured warning conditions
o CRITICAL: This indicates that the recorded event may cause the radio to stop operating.
· Notes: Description of the event which has occurred.

The event log window can be cleared by clicking Clear Logs at the top corner of the event log
window.

Alarm events

Event ID Description Syslog Severity

50 Active warning alarm detected Warning

51 Active critical alarm detected Critical

52 Active critical alarm cleared Notice

270 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

53 Active warning alarm cleared Notice

60 Base health alarm detected Error

61 Base health alarm cleared Notice

100 Frequency offset warning detected Warning

101 Frequency offset warning alarm cleared Notice

110 Received signal level (RSSI) warning alarm detected Warning

111 Received signal level (RSSI) warning alarm cleared Notice

120 High VSWR warning alarm detected Warning

121 High VSWR critical alarm detected Critical

122 High VSWR critical alarm cleared Notice

123 High VSWR warning alarm cleared Notice

130 Transmit power target critical alarm detected Critical

131 Transmit power target critical alarm cleared Notice

140 DC supply warning alarm detected Warning

141 DC supply critical alarm detected Critical

142 DC supply critical alarm cleared Notice

143 DC supply warning alarm cleared Notice

150 Radio Temperature warning alarm detected Warning

151 Radio Temperature critical alarm detected Critical

152 Radio Temperature critical alarm cleared Notice

153 Radio Temperature warning alarm cleared Notice

160 Ethernet link warning alarm detected Warning

161 Ethernet link warning alarm cleared Notice

170 PLL Lock critical alarm detected Critical

171 PLL Lock critical alarm cleared Notice

02/2022 271
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

180 FAN critical alarm detected Critical

181 FAN critical alarm cleared Notice

190 Operational critical alarm detected Critical

191 Operational critical alarm cleared Notice

200 Hot Standby Pair warning detected Error

201 Hot Standby Pair warning cleared Notice

330 Received good data warning alarm detected Warning

331 Received good data warning alarm cleared Notice

340 Good RSSI comparison warning alarm detected Warning

341 Good RSSI comparison warning alarm cleared Notice

Hot standby specific events

Event ID Description Syslog Severity

300 Radio changed to online status Info

301 Radio changed to offline status Info

310 Radio forced to offline Info

311 Radio forced to online Info

320 Radio period change-over timer expired Info

Operational events

Event ID Description Syslog Severity

400 Radio power up Notice

401 User initiated radio reset Info

402 Watch dog initiated radio reset Error

403 NTP date/time locked Notice

272 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

404 PTT timeout timer activated Error

409 NTP synchronization in progress Info

610 Dynamic beacon locked Notice

611 Dynamic beacon synchronization in progress Info

620 Token grant beacon locked Notice

621 Token grant beacon synchronization in progress Info

02/2022 273
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Management events

Event ID Description Syslog Severity

405 Alarms cleared Info

406 Event log cleared Info

500 Radio firmware installation activated Info

501 Radio firmware installation successful Notice

502 Radio firmware installation unsuccessful Error

510 Factory default reset activated Info

511 Factory default reset successful Notice

512 Factory default reset unsuccessful Error

520 Radio configuration change activated Info

521 Radio configuration change successful Notice

522 Radio configuration change unsuccessful Error

523 USB configuration detected Notice

524 USB configuration failed Error

530 Automatic configuration backup activated Info

531 Automatic configuration backup successful Notice

532 Automatic configuration backup unsuccessful Error

600 User login successful Info

601 User logged out Info

602 User login unsuccessful Warning

800 Radio firmware unpack started Info

801 Radio firmware unpack successful Notice

802 Radio firmware unpack unsuccessful Error

274 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Authentication events

Event ID Description Syslog Severity

700 Supplicant radio authenticated and authorized Notice

701 Supplicant radio authenticated and rejected Notice

702 Supplicant radio authentication unsuccessful Error

703 Supplicant radio onboarding unsuccessful Error

704 Supplicant radio onboarding Info

705 Supplicant radio re-authenticating Info

706 Manual key rotation Info

707 Authenticator beacon received and network access Notice

granted

708 Authenticator beacon received and require re- Notice

authentication

709 Authentication in progress Info

710 Authentication successful and authorized Notice

711 Authentication successful and rejected Critical

712 Authenticator beacon synchronization in progress Info

713 No authorized certificate in access control list Critical

715 Radio authentication unsuccessful Critical

720 Radio access control list changed Info

721 Authenticator radio de-authorized Notice

02/2022 275
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Syslog events

Event ID Description Syslog Severity

750 Syslog Connection Initiated Info

751 Syslog Connection Successful Notice

755 Syslog Connection Error Error

756 Syslog Connection Interrupted Warning

8.4.7 SNMP

SNMP versions v1 and v2c 276 are available in all versions of firmware.

As of firmware version 2.2.0, SNMP v3 278 is available.

See:

· SNMP Configuration 276

· SNMP - Diagnostic Objects and Notifications 280

· SNMP - Critical Alarm Object Specifications 296

· SNMP - Notifications-Advanced 297

· SNMP - Remote Specific Notifications 303

· SNMP - QB, QP, & QH Specific Notifications 304

· Remote General Purpose Digital I/O (GPIO) 306

8.4.7.1 SNMP Configuration

· SNMP configuration will require a user with at least Read/Write/Security access or higher
when User Administration is enabled. A Read/Write user may enable v1 or v2c with default
community strings if SNMP was previously disabled.
· Configuration of SNMP Notification will require a user with at least Read/Write/Security
access or higher when User Administration is enabled. Subscription of alarms to SNMP
notifications is permissible by a user with Read/Write/Security access.
The following sections describe the configuration necessary for each SNMP version.

SNMP v1 and v2c

Agent configuration

When the SNMP agent is configured to support v1 and/or v2c, the Read and Read/Write
community strings need to be configured in the radio to facilitate the authentication of
connecting SNMP clients.

276 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

GET requests may be performed with either community string, while SET requests need to use
the Read/Write Community String.

Traps and Informs

When the Trio Q Data Radio’ s SNMP agent is configured to send v1 or v2c traps, the
Notification Community String and at least one Manager IP Address (receiving SNMP client)
needs to be configured.

When the Trio Q Data Radio’ s SNMP agent is configured to send v2c informs, the following
additional fields need to be configured:
· Inform Timeout
· Inform Retries

02/2022 277
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

SNMP v3

Agent configuration

When the SNMP agent is configured to support v3, the following needs to be configured in the
radio to facilitate the authentication of connecting SNMP clients:

· Engine ID Suffix
· At least one local SNMP user

The Engine ID is a unique identifier for an SNMP v3 engine comprised of:

Engine ID Prefix Engine ID Suffix

Enterprise ID (4 Octet) Type (1 Octet) String (up to 27 Octet)

The prefix contains the Enterprise ID and Engine ID Type and are formatted according to RFC
3411. The prefix cannot be modified.

User passwords are localized using the Engine ID and is applied to chronologically mark
requests such that they cannot be replayed. The Engine ID, therefore, needs to be unique
among all SNMP agents on the network. This means that for all devices using the Enterprise ID
of 33302, the suffix must be unique.

Tip: Radios with matching Engine IDs may result in SNMP manager software reporting a ‘ Not in
Time Window‘error for one or more affected radios. The solution is to configure the Engine ID
Suffix to be unique within the network.

If the Engine ID Suffix is modified, all previously localized passwords will be cleared from the
local SNMP users’table.

The default Engine ID Suffix is the radio’

s network MAC address. Care should be taken when
loading configurations to prevent Engine ID duplication.

The hex representation of the Engine ID is displayed on the Unit Information page and web user
interface, and should be verified that it is not the same as any other SNMP agents on the
network.

278 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

GET requests may be performed by any user while SET requests may be performed by a user
with Read/Write access privileges.

If a user’
s authentication method is changed, authentication and privacy passwords that were
provided in a previously activated configuration will be cleared for the respective user.

Traps and informs

SNMP v3 needs to be enabled for the SNMP agent to send SNMP v3 traps and information.

At least one Manager IP Address and Manager User needs to be specified. The Manager User
also needs to exist in the SNMP Local Users table.

The receiving SNMP client needs to be configured with the same user credentials and Engine
ID (shown on the Unit Information page).

02/2022 279
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

When the Trio Q Data Radio’ s SNMP agent is configured to send v3 informs, the user needs to
exist in the SNMP Remote Users table and, in addition to SNMP v3 traps, the following fields
need to be configured in the radio:
· Inform Timeout
· Inform Retries

The receiving SNMP client needs to be configured with the same user credentials and have its
own unique Engine ID. The agent will query the client for the Engine ID prior to sending the first
inform.

8.4.7.2 SNMP - Diagnostic Objects and Notifications

The Trio Q Data Radio’

s SNMP Interface supports:

· RFC1213 (Unit name, Unit Location, Firmware, Uptime, etc). Details about RFC1213 and the
SNMP parameters included in this standard can be found in this link:
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1213.txt
· Radio and Ethernet Diagnostics (as seen in the HTML Diagnostics overview)
· SNMP v1 & v2c
· SNMP notifications which include traps and informs

280 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

MIB files

Distributed with the Trio Q Data Radio firmware are two MIB files which provide structure
definitions for the SNMP objects. The MIB files are suitable for importation into most common
SNMP browsers. Definitions for each SNMP object are noted as comments in the MIB files.
Only a summary of each object is noted in this user manual.

SNMP user alarm detection

The Trio Q Data Radio range can detect a number of SNMP alarms which have been raised
due to varying radio diagnostic values. These diagnostic values include:
· VSWR
· Supply Voltage
· Temperature
· RSSI
· Transmit Power

Each SNMP alarm for the diagnostic values shown above, has a maximum of three alarm states.
Each one is also represented with a status number. The alarm states and corresponding
numbers are as follows:
· Normal state - 1: The ‘
Normal’state will be displayed within an alarm when a diagnostics
parameter is operating within normal limits.
· User alarm state - 2: A ‘
User alarm’state will be displayed when a diagnostics parameter
within the Trio Q Data Radio falls outside of the user defined alarm limits. User limits are
configurable within the Trio Q Data Radio.
· Critical alarm state- 3: A ‘
Critical alarm’state will be displayed when a diagnostics
parameter within the Trio Q Data Radio falls outside of the unit’
s hardware specification.

SNMP critical alarm detection

The Trio Q Data Radio range can detect a number of SNMP alarms which have been raised
due to the operational state of the radio. These operational states include:

· Transmitter PLL locked

· Receiver PLL locked
· Operational alarm detected
· Fan alarm detected (QB, QP & QH only)

Each SNMP alarm for the operational states shown above, has a maximum of two alarm states.
Each one is also represented with a status number. The alarm states and corresponding
numbers are as follows:

· Yes state - 1: The ‘

Yes’state will be displayed if the corresponding operational state is
active/true.

02/2022 281
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

· No state - 2: The ‘
No’state will be displayed if the corresponding operational state is
inactive/false.

Notifications

SNMP notifications are unsolicited SNMP messages designed to inform a user when an SNMP
alarm state change has been detected. The Trio Q Data Radio range supports two types of
notifications:

· Traps: are low bandwidth consuming UDP notifications that have no requirement for a
response. If the message is lost along the way to the destination IP address, the message will
be lost.
· Informs: are essentially traps, that require a response from the destination IP address once a
notification has been sent. This gives informs more reliability getting to a destination as the
Trio Q Data Radio range supports retries and time out periods.

Summary of SNMP MIB objects supported

Object name Object Identifier Synta Object description

(OID) x

General Group:

serialNumber .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 String Serial number of the Q Data Radio.

.1.1.0

modelNumber .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 String Model number of the Q Data Radio.

.1.2.0

hardwareRevision .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 String Hardware revision of the Q Data

.1.3.0 Radio.

firmwareRevision .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 String The firmware revision of the Q Data

.1.5.0 Radio.

date .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 String The date as reported by the Q Data

.1.6.0 Radio.

time .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 String The time as reported by the Q Data

.1.7.0 Radio.

utcTimeOffset .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 String Time offset from UTC for the Q Data
.1.8.0 Radio local time zone.

upTime .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 String The uptime of the Q Data Radio

.1.9.0

primaryNtpServer .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 String Primary Network Time Protocol (NTP)

.1.10.0 domain name.

282 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

cpuLoad .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Average CPU utilization (%) for the

.1.11.0 past 15 minutes.

supplyVoltage .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Supply Voltage of the Q Data Radio in

.1.12.0 mV.

temperatureTable .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Table Table of radio temperatures.

.1.13

temperatureName .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 String Temperature (row) name.

.1.13.1.2.x

temperatureC .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer The temperature in Celsius.

.1.13.1.3.x

temperatureF .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer The temperature in Fahrenheit.

.1.13.1.4.x

networkIpAddress .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 IP The IP address of the Q Data Radio.

.1.15.0 Addres
s

memoryFree .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer The percentage of memory free in the

.1.16.0 Q Data Radio.

ntpClientState .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer NTP Client State

.1.17.0

sysTime .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer The current time on the Q Data Radio

.1.18.0 in Unix time format (seconds elapsed
since Jan 1 1970 00:00:00).

Object name Object Identifier Synta Object description

(OID) x

Radio Group:

radioReceivedPac .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Counte Number of packets received from the

kets .2.3.0 r radio link.

radioTransmittedP .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Counte Number of packets transmitted over the

ackets .2.4.0 r radio link.

radioForwardPow .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Table Table of radio forward powers.

erTable .2.5

radioForwardPow .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Forward power (dBm)

er .2.5.1.2.x

02/2022 283
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

radioReversePow .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Table Table of radio Reverse powers.

erTable .2.6

radioReversePow .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Reverse power (dBm).

er .2.6.1.2.x

radioVswrTable .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Table Table of radio VSWR's.

.2.7

radioVswr .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 String VSWR

.2.7.1.2.x

radioRssiTable .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Table Table of RSSI values.

.2.8

radioRssiValue .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Radio RSSI value (dBm).

.2.8.1.2.x

radioDataRate .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer The over-the-air data rate of the Q

.2.15.0 Data Radio.

txFrequency .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Radio's transmit frequency (Hz).

.2.18.0

rxFrequency .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Radio's receive frequency (Hz).

.2.19.0

muteThreshold .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Radio's mute threshold (dBm).

.2.20.0

rxGoodFrameCou .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Counte Good frames received.

nt .2.23.0 r

rxGoodByteCount .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Counte Good bytes received.

.2.24.0 r

rxBadFrameCount .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Counte Bad frames received.

.2.25.0 r

rxAverageGoodFr .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Average received good frame size.

ameSize .2.26.0

rxAverageFrameR .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Average receive frame rate.

ate .2.27.0

rxChannelOccupa .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Receive channel occupancy.

ncy .2.28.0

rxSlidingChannel .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Sliding channel occupancy.

Occupancy .2.29.0

284 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

txByteCount .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Counte Transmit byte count.

.2.31.0 r

txFrameCount .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Counte Transmit frame count.

.2.32.0 r

txAverageFrameSi .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Transmit average frame size.

ze .2.33.0

txAverageFrameR .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Transmit average frame rate.

ate .2.34.0

radioFrequencyOf .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Radio frequency offset (Hz).

fset .2.36.0

radioCompressor .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Radio compressor rate (%).

Rate .2.37.0

radioDecompress .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Counte Radio decompressor dropped packet

orDroppedPacket .2.38.0 r count.
s

radioMaxSNR .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Max radio received Signal to Noise

.2.39.0 (dB).

radioQoSPriorityT .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Table Table of QoS Priority Queue statistics.

able .2.40

radioQoSPriorityT .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Counte QoS Priority Queue transmitted packet

xPacketCount .2.40.1.2.x r count.

radioQoSPriority .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Counte QoS Priority Queue dropped packet

DroppedPacketC .2.40.1.3.x r count.
ount

radioMinNoiseFlo .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Minimum radio noise floor (dBm).

or .2.41.0

radioFirewallTable .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Table Table of Firewall statistics.

.2.42

radioFirewallInterf .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 String Interface (row) name.

aceName .2.42.1.2.x

radioFirewallDrop .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Counte Firewall dropped packet count.

pedPacketCount .2.42.1.3.x r

radioFirewallDrop .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Counte Firewall dropped byte count.

pedByteCount .2.42.1.4.x r

02/2022 285
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

radioQamEvm .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer QAM EVM (%/10).

.2.43.0

radioRetransmitte .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Counte Radio retransmitted packet count due

dPacketCount .2.44.0 r to automatic retries.

radioDiscardedPa .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Counte Radio discarded packet count due to

cketCount .2.45.0 r automatic retries.

radioNetworkListT .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Table Table of radio network list.

able .2.46

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Remote radio serial

eSerialNumber .2.46.1.2.x number.

networkListRssi .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) received RSSI

.2.46.1.3.x (dBm).

networkListSnr .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) received SNR (dB).

.2.46.1.4.x

networkListEvm .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) received EVM

.2.46.1.5.x (%/10).

networkListTxPath .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) transmit path loss

Loss .2.46.1.6.x (dB).

networkListTxRetr .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) transmit retry rate

yRate .2.46.1.7.x (%/10).

networkListTxData .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) transmit speed (bps).

Rate .2.46.1.8.x

networkListRxData .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) receive speed (bps).

Rate .2.46.1.9.x

networkListTxDisc .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) transmit drop rate

ardedRate .2.46.1.10.x (%/10).

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 IP Network list (row) Remote radio IP

eIPAddress .2.46.1.11.x Addres address.
s

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Remote radio RSSI

eRSSI .2.46.1.12.x (dBm).

networkListAuthen .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Authentication

tication .2.46.1.13.x status.

networkListRxDupl .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) receive duplicate

icateRate .2.46.1.14.x rate (%/10).

286 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

networkListAverag .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) average RSSI

eRSSI .2.46.1.15.x (dBm).

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Remote radio

eAverageRSSI .2.46.1.16.x average RSSI (dBm).

networkListRxCha .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) RX channel

nnelOccupancy .2.46.1.17.x occupancy (%/10).

networkListTxThro .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) TX throughput

ughput .2.46.1.18.x (kB/Hr/10).

networkListRxThro .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) RX throughput

ughput .2.46.1.19.x (kB/Hr/10).

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Remote radio EVM

eEVM .2.46.1.20.x (%/10).

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Remote radio Supply

eSupplyVoltage .2.46.1.21.x Voltage (mV).

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Remote radio

eForwardPower .2.46.1.22.x Forward Power (dBm/10).

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Remote radio

eTemperatureCels .2.46.1.23.x Temperature in Celsius (C/10).
ius

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Remote radio

eTemperatureFah .2.46.1.24.x Temperature in Fahrenheit (F/10).
renheit

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Remote radio Global

eGlobalAlarm .2.46.1.25.x Alarm State.

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 String Network list (row) Remote radio name.

eRadioName .2.46.1.26.x

networkListLastPa .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Last packet received

cketReceivedTime .2.46.1.27.x time in Unix time format.

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Remote radio Retry

eRetryRate .2.46.1.28.x Rate (%/10).

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Remote radio

eDiscardRate .2.46.1.29.x Discard Rate (%/10).

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Remote radio SNR

eSNR .2.46.1.30.x (dB).

02/2022 287
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Remote radio

eFrequencyOffset .2.46.1.31.x Frequency Offset (Hz/10).

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Remote radio

eVSWR .2.46.1.32.x VSWR.

The VSWR is carried as a 2 digit

integer (range 11...99).

The value should be divided by 10. e.g.

13 ==> 1.3:1, 30 ==> 3.0:1.

A value of 99 should be regarded as

9.9:1 or higher.

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Remote radio Set

eSetPower .2.46.1.33.x Power (dBm/10).

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Remote radio

eCompression .2.46.1.34.x Compression (%).

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Remote radio Up

eUpTime .2.46.1.35.x Time (min).

networkListRemot .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Network list (row) Remote radio

eDynamicMuteLe .2.46.1.36.x Dynamic Mute Level (dBm).
vel

radioDesense .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Radio Desensitivity (dB).

.2.47.0

radioMute .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Radio current mute level (dBm).

.2.48.0

radioDynamicBea .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Radio Dynamic Beacon state.

conState .2.49.0

radioPeakRSSI .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Radio Peak RSSI (dBm).

.2.50.0

radioSetPower .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Radio Set Power (dBm).

.2.51.0

radioWaitTimeToT .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Average wait time to Transmit (mS).

ransmit .2.52.0

radioRandomAcc .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Random access contention (%).

essContention .2.53.0

radioTGCMBeaco .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Token Grant Beacon State.

nState .2.54.0

288 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

radioAuthorization .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Authentication Supplicant State.

State .2.55.0

radioDutyCycle .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Radio Duty Cycle (%/10).

.2.56.0

radioTxThroughpu .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Radio TX Throughput (kB p/Hr/10).

t .2.57.0

radioRxThroughpu .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Radio RX Throughput(kB p/Hr/10).

t .2.58.0

radioRetryRate .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Radio TX Retry Rate(%/10).

.2.59.0

radioDiscardRate .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Radio TX Discard Rate(%/10).

.2.60.0

radioRssiAvg .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Radio Average RSSI (dBm).

.2.61.0

radioRxDuplicate .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Counte Radio RX Duplicate Discarded Packet.

DiscardedPacket .2.62.0 r

radioRxDuplicate .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Radio RX Duplicate Discarded(%/10).

DiscardedRate .2.63.0

radioNetworkListC .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Table Table of the radio network list in csv

SVTable .2.64 format.

networkListCSVSt .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 String Network list csv (row) list of comma

ring .2.64.1.2.x seperated fields.

Object name Object Identifier Synta Object description

(OID) x

Security Group:

snmpVersion .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Default SNMP version.

.3.1.0

consoleLoginStatu .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Console login status for COM 1.

s1 .3.2.0

consoleLoginStatu .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Console login status for COM 2.

s2 .3.3.0

02/2022 289
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

numberOfActiveTe .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Number of active Telnet and Ssh

lnetSshSessions .3.4.0 sessions.

telnetSshSessionT .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Table Table of Telnet and Ssh sessions.

able .3.5

telnetSshSessionS .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Telnet or Ssh session status.

tatus .3.5.1.2.x

telnetSshSessionI .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 IP Telnet or Ssh session remote ip

p .3.5.1.3.x Addres address.
s

encryptionStatus .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 Integer Encryption status.

.3.11.0

Object name Object Identifier Synta Object description

(OID) x

ETH Group:

ethInterfaceTable .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Table Table of network interfaces.

4.1

interfaceName .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. String Network interface (row) name.

4.1.1.2.x

interfaceStatus .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Network interface status.

4.1.1.3.x

interfaceSpeed .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Network interface link speed.

4.1.1.4.x

interfaceMode .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Network interface link mode.

4.1.1.5.x

Object name Object Identifier Syntax Object description

(OID)

Alarm Group:

operationalAlarm .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Normal = Operating within normal

5.1.0 conditions,

CriticalAlarm = One or more

operational alarms detected,

290 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Recovered = Normal operating

conditions restored.

rxPllLocked .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Receiver PLL lock status.

5.2.0

radioVswrAlarmTa .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Table Table of radio Vswr alarms.

ble 5.10

radioVswrAlarmSt .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Normal = Operating within normal

ate 5.10.1.2.x conditions,

UserAlarm = Operating outside of

user specified limits,

CriticalAlarm = Operating outside of

specified operating limits,

Recovered = Normal operating

conditions restored.

externalSupplyVolt .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Normal = Operating within normal

ageAlarmState 5.11.0 conditions,

UserAlarm = Operating outside of

user specified limits,

CriticalAlarm = Operating outside of

factory specified operating limits,

Recovered = Normal operating

conditions restored.

temperatureAlarm .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Normal = Operating within normal

State 5.12.0 conditions,

UserAlarm = Operating outside of

user specified limits,

CriticalAlarm = Operating outside of

factory specified operating limits,

Recovered = Normal operating

conditions restored.

radioRssiAlarmTa .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Table Table of radio RSSI alarm states.

ble 5.13

radioRssiAlarmSta .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Normal = Operating within normal

te 5.13.1.2.x conditions,

UserAlarm = Operating outside of

02/2022 291
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

user specified limits,

Recovered = Normal operating

conditions restored.

radioTxPowerAlar .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Table Table of radio tx power alarms.

mTable 5.14

radioTxPowerAlar .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Normal = Operating within normal

mState 5.14.1.2.x conditions,

UserAlarm = Operating outside of

user specified limits,

Recovered = Normal operating

conditions restored.

globalAlarmState .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Normal = All monitored parameters

5.15.0 are operating within normal
conditions,

UserAlarm = One or more monitored

parameters are operating outside of
user specified limits,

CriticalAlarm = One or more

monitored parameters are operating
outside of factory specified operating
limits,

Recovered = One or more monitored

parameters had its normal operating
conditions restored.

txPllLocked .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Transmit PLL lock status.

5.17.0

radioFrequencyOf .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Normal = Operating within normal

fsetAlarmState 5.18.0 conditions,

UserAlarm = Receive frequency

offset out of user specified limits,

Recovered = Normal operating

conditions restored.

radioPllLockedAla .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Normal = Operating within normal

rmState 5.19.0 conditions,

CriticalAlarm = Tx/Rx PLL failed to

lock,

292 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Recovered = Normal operating

conditions restored.

radioRssiCompare .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Normal = Operating within normal

AlarmState 5.20.0 conditions,

UserAlarm = Rssi compared with

paired unit dropped below user
specified limits,

Recovered = Normal operating

conditions restored.

radioGoodRxPack .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Normal = Operating within normal

etAlarmState 5.21.0 conditions,

UserAlarm = Rx packet compared

with paired unit dropped below user
specified limits,

Recovered = Normal operating

conditions restored.

ethernetLinkAlarm .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Normal = Operating within normal

State 5.22.0 conditions,

UserAlarm = Ethernet link target

unreachable,

Recovered = Normal operating

conditions restored.

resetAlarms .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Reset alarms on current module.

5.100.0

Object name Object Identifier Synta Object description

(OID) x

Base Station Group:

digitalInputTable .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Table Table of base station digital inputs.

6.2

digitalInput .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Digital input value.

6.2.1.2.x

digitalOutputTable .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Table Table of base station digital outputs.

6.3

02/2022 293
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

digitalOutput .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Digital output value.

6.3.1.2.x

chassisFanStatusT .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Table Table of chassis fan status.

able 6.4

chassisFanName .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. String Chassis fan (row) name.

6.4.1.2.x

chassisFanStatus .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Chassis fan status.

6.4.1.3.x

internalOnlineMod .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Internal current online module.

ule 6.5.0
When operating in full duplex mode,
this is always the primary unit.

When operating in protected half

duplex mode, this is the unit that is
currently online.

When not operating in base station

mode, this object will return NA.

baseHealthStatus .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Base station health status.

6.8.0

baseHealthSupply .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer The state of the supply voltage alarm

Voltage 6.9.2.0 of current base.

baseHealthTemper .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer The state of the high temperature

ature 6.9.3.0 alarm of current base.

baseHealthVswr .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer The state of the Vswr alarm of

6.9.4.0 current base.

baseHealthEthLink .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer The state of the link test alarm of

6.9.5.0 current base.

baseHealthTxPowe .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer The state of the transmit power alarm

r 6.9.6.0 of current base.

baseHealthPllOutO .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer The state of the PLL Out of Lock

fLock 6.9.7.0 alarm of current base.

baseHealthFatal .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer The state of the Fatal alarm of

6.9.8.0 current base.

baseHealthFan .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer The state of the Fan alarm of current

6.9.9.0 base.

294 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

baseHealthRssiCo .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer The state of the RSSI compare alarm

mpare 6.9.10.0 of current base. This only applies to
hot standby configurations.

baseHealthRxPack .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer The state of the Radio Rx packet

et 6.9.11.0 alarm of current base. This only
applies to hot standby configurations.

Object name Object Identifier Syntax Object description

(OID)

Hot Standby Group:

hsSerialNumber .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. String Serial number of the hot standby

7.1.0 controller or protected base
controller.

hsFirmwareVersio .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. String Firmware version of the hot standby

n 7.2.0 controller or protected base
controller.

hsBaseSelectionM .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Selection mode of currently active

ode 7.3.0 base station or protected base
module.

hsOnlineBase .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Online base station or protected

7.4.0 base module.

hsBaseId .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Current base identifier.

7.5.0

hsChangeOverEve .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Change over event counter of the hot

ntCounter 7.6.0 standby controller, or protected base
controller.

hsHoldForceTimer .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Read/Write the hold force timer of

7.7.0 the hot standby controller, or
protected base controller.

hsForceOffline .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. Integer Attempt to force the current module

7.8.0 to go offline.

Object name Object Identifier (OID) Synta Object description

x

Remote Group:

02/2022 295
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

remoteDigitalIOTa .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.1 Table Table of remote digital IO ports.

ble 1.1

remoteDigitalIOna .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.1 String Remote digital IO port name.

me 1.1.1.2.x

remoteDigitalInput .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.1 Integer Remote digital Input value.

Value 1.1.1.3.x

remoteDigitalOutp .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.1 Integer Remote digital Output value.

utValue 1.1.1.4.x

8.4.7.3 SNMP - Critical Alarm Object Specifications

Operational Alarm Detection

Name operationalAlarm

Alarm states Yes (1), No (2)

Alarm limits No limits, if the radio go into a operational alarm state, the object
changes alarm state to Yes (1). During normal operation, this alarm
state in No (2)

Receiver PLL Lock Alarm Detection

Name rxPllLocked

Alarm states Yes (1), No (2)

Alarm limits No limits, if the radio detects the receiver PLL is no longer in lock, the
object changes alarm state to No (2). During normal operation, this
alarm state in Yes (1)

296 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Transmitter PLL Lock Alarm Detection

Name txPllLocked

Alarm states Yes (1), No (2)

Alarm limits No limits, if the radio detects the transmitter PLL is no longer in lock,
the object changes alarm state to No (2). During normal operation, this
alarm state in Yes (1)

8.4.7.4 SNMP - Notifications-Advanced

Customizations can be made on which SNMP alarms will be detected, along with the user alarm
limits which will trigger an alarm state change and can be sent as a notification.

To configure which alarms are to be detected or to configure the limits of a user alarm state
change, see the user alarm management section found within the SNMP page of the Trio Q
Data Radio web user interface. Specifications on alarms which can be sent as notifications,
can be found within the tables below.

Global alarm detection notification

The global alarm detection notification can be sent when the global alarm state is changed. The
global alarm state will change based on the highest active alarm state (1 Normal state, 2 User
alarm state, 3 Critical alarm state) of all of the alarm objects shown in the table below. When a
global alarm detection notification is sent, the notification will include all of the alarm objects and
their alarm states, shown in the table below.

Global Alarm Detection Notification

Notification Name notificationGlobalAlarmChanged

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.12

Global Alarm Detection Notification Objects

Name OID Positi Specific Description

on Code

globalAlarmState .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302. 0 12 Global alarm state

30.5.15.0

externalSupplyVoltage .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302. 1 12 Supply voltage alarm

AlarmState 30.5.11.0 state

temperatureAlarmStat .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302. 2 12 Temperature alarm state

e 30.5.12.0

02/2022 297
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

rxPllLocked .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302. 3 12 Receiver PLL lock alarm

30.5.2.0 state

txPllLocked .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302. 4 12 Transmit PLL lock alarm

30.5.17.0 state

radioFrequencyOffset .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302. 5 12 Radio frequency offset

AlarmState 30.5.18.0 alarm state

radioTxPowerAlarmSt .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302. 6 12 Radio Tx power alarm

ate 30.5.14.1.2.1 state

radioVswrAlarmState .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302. 7 12 VSWR alarm state

30.5.10.1.2.1

radioRssiAlarmState .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302. 8 12 Radio RSSI alarm state

30.5.13.1.2.1

Diagnostics heartbeat notification

The diagnostics heartbeat notification does not rely on a change of state in to send a
notification. Instead, the diagnostics heartbeat will send a notification periodically, based on a
time period, specified by the user. In each notification sent, the values for each of the
embedded objects (shown in the table below) will be sent.

Diagnostics Heartbeat Notification

Notification Name notificationDiagnostic

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.13

Diagnostics Heartbeat Notification Objects

Name OID Positi Specific Description

on Code

sysName .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5.0 0 13 System name

sysLocation .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.6.0 1 13 System location

serialNumber .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 2 13 Radio serial number

0.1.1.0

modelNumber .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 3 13 Radio model number

0.1.2.0

supplyVoltage .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 4 13 Supply voltage value

0.1.12.0

298 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

sysUpTime .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.0 5 13 System up time

globalAlarmState .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 6 13 Global alarm state

0.5.15.0

radioFrequencyOffs .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 7 13 Radio frequency offset

etAlarmState 0.2.36.0

radioMaxSNR .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 8 13 Max radio received Signal

0.2.39 to Noise.

radioMinNoiseFloor .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 9 13 Minimum radio noise

0.2.41 floor.

radioQamEvm .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 10 13 QAM EVM

0.2.43

temperatureC .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 11 13 Temperature value

0.1.13.1.3.1 (Celsius)

temperatureF .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 12 13 Temperature value

0.1.13.1.4.1 (Fahrenheit)

radioRssiValue .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 13 13 radio RSSI value

0.2.8.1.2.1

radioForwardPower .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 14 13 Radio Tx power value

0.2.5.1.2.1

radioVswr .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 15 13 VSWR value

0.2.7.1.2.1

Operational Alarm Detection Notification

Notification Name notificationOperationalAlarm

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.1

Operational Alarm Detection Notification Objects

Name OID Positio Specific Description

n Code

operationalAlarm .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 0 1 Operational alarm state

0.5.1.0

02/2022 299
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

PLL Lock Alarm Detection Notification

Notification Name notificationPllLock

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.2

PLL Lock Notification Objects

Name OID Positio Specific Description

n Code

radioPllLockedAlar .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 0 2 Rx/Tx PLL lock alarm

mState 0.5.19 state

rxPllLocked .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 1 2 Receiver PLL lock alarm

0.5.2.0 state

txPllLocked .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 2 2 Transmit PLL lock alarm

0.5.17.0 state

VSWR Alarm Detection Notification

Notification Name notificationVswr

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.4

VSWR Notification Objects

Name OID Positio Specific Description

n Code

radioVswrAlarmStat .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 0 4 VSWR alarm state

e 0.5.10.1.2.1

radioVswr .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 1 4 VSWR value

0.2.7.1.2.1

300 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Temperature Alarm Detection Notification

Notification Name notificationTemperature

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.5

Temperature Notification Objects

Name OID Positio Specific Description

n Code

temperatureAlarmS .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 0 5 Temperature alarm state

tate 0.5.12.0

temperatureC .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 1 5 Temperature value

0.1.13.1.3.1 (Celsius)

temperatureF .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 2 5 Temperature value

0.1.13.1.4.1 (Fahrenheit)

Supply Voltage Alarm Detection Notification

Notification Name notificationSupplyVoltage

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.6

Supply Voltage Notification Objects

Name OID Positio Specific Description

n Code

externalSupplyVolta .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 0 6 Supply voltage alarm state

geAlarmState 0.5.11.0

supplyVoltage .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 1 6 Supply voltage value

0.1.12.0

02/2022 301
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

RSSI Alarm Detection Notification

Notification Name notificationRssi

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.7

RSSI Alarm Detection Notification Objects

Name OID Positio Specific Description

n Code

radioRssiAlarmStat .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 0 7 Radio RSSI alarm state

e 0.5.13.1.2.1

radioRssiValue .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 1 7 Radio RSSI value

0.2.8.1.2.1

Transmit Power Alarm Detection Notification

Notification Name notificationTxPower

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.8

Transmit Power Alarm Detection Notification Objects

Name OID Positio Specific Description

n Code

radioTxPowerAlarm .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 0 8 Radio Tx power alarm

State 0.5.14.1.2.1 state

radioForwardPowe .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 1 8 Radio Tx power value

r 0.2.5.1.2.1

302 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Frequency Offset Alarm Detection Notification

Notification Name notificationFrequencyOffsetAlarmChanged

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.14

Frequency Offset Alarm Detection Notification Objects

Name OID Positio Specific Description

n Code

radioFrequencyOff .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 0 14 Radio frequency offset

setAlarmState 0.5.18.0 alarm state

radioFrequencyOff .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 1 14 Radio frequency offset

set 0.2.36.0 value

8.4.7.5 SNMP - Remote Specific Notifications

Remote IO-1 Notification

Notification Name notificationRemoteDigitalIO1

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.40

Remote IO 1 Notification Objects

Name OID Position Specific Descriptio

Code n

remoteDigitalInputVal .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.11.1.1.3. 0 40 IO-1 input

ue 1 state

02/2022 303
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Remote IO-2 Notification

Notification Name notificationRemoteDigitalIO2

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.41

Remote IO 2 Notification Objects

Name OID Position Specific Description

Code

remoteDigitalInputVa .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.11.1.1.3. 0 41 IO-2 input

lue 2 state

8.4.7.6 SNMP - QB, QP, & QH Specific Notifications

Ethernet Link Alarm Notification

Notification Name notificationEthernetLinkAlarmChanged

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.15

Ethernet Link Notification Objects

Name OID Positio Specific Description

n Code

ethernetLinkAlarmS .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 0 15 Ethernet link monitoring

tate 0.5.22 alarm state

Digital Input 1 Notification

Notification Name notificationDigitalInput1Notification

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.20

Digital Input 1 Notification Objects

Name OID Positio Specific Description

n Code

digitalInput .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 0 20 Digital input 1 value

0.6.2.1.2.1

304 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Digital Input 2 Notification

Notification Name notificationDigitalInput2Notification

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.21

Digital Input 2 Notification Objects

Name OID Positio Specific Description

n Code

digitalInput .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 0 21 Digital input 2 value

0.6.2.1.2.2

Digital Input 3 Notification

Notification Name notificationDigitalInput3Notification

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.22

Digital Input 3 Notification Objects

Name OID Positio Specific Description

n Code

digitalInput .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 0 22 Digital input 3 value

0.6.2.1.2.3

Fan Alarm Detection Notification

Notification Name notificationFanAlarmChanged

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.23

Fan Alarm Detection Notification Objects

Name OID Positio Specific Description

n Code

chassisFanStatus .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 0 23 Fan 1 Status

.6.4.1.3.1

chassisFanStatus .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30 1 23 Fan 2 Status

.6.4.1.3.2

02/2022 305
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

RSSI Comparison Alarm Notification

Notification Name notificationRssiCompareAlarmChanged

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.24

Ethernet Link Notification Objects

Name OID Positio Specific Description

n Code

radioRssiCompare .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.3 0 24 RSSI comparison alarm

AlarmState 0.5.22 state

Good Packet Received Comparison Alarm Notification

Notification Name notificationRxPacketCompareAlarmChanged

Notification OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30.10.25

Ethernet Link Notification Objects

Name OID Positio Specific Description

n Code

digitalInputradioGo .1.3.6.1.4.1.33302.30. 0 25 Good packet received

odRxPacketAlarmS 5.21 comparison alarm state
tate

8.4.7.7 Remote General Purpose Digital I/O (GPIO)

SNMP notifications

By enabling SNMP notification on an input, the radio will send an SNMP notification to the NMS
specified in the configured SNMP section (to access SNMP, go to Setup -> SNMP), when the
respective digital input state changes.

Remote input SNMP notification configuration is found at SNMP -> Notifications (Notifications
must first be enabled).

306 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

8.4.8 Network Time

The Network Time service can be configured under Network -> Time Configuration.

· NTP Server: Allows other clients to synchronize their time with this radio
· NTP Client: Allows this radio to synchronize its time with another time server
· Sync Period: The interval at which the radio will attempt to synchronize its time with a time
server. If the primary NTP server is reachable, the radio will attempt to retrieve and set the
time during start up, and after a configuration is applied. The time service will require at least
three further sync periods before the time will be synchronized and updated on subsequent
successful sync requests.
· Primary NTP Server: The server to synchronize to. This can be a network IP address, or a
DNS address provided a DNS server is also configured.
· Time Zone: Specifies the appropriate time zone offset to apply to the system UTC time
· Daylight Saving Offset: Specifies the offset to apply due to daylight savings
· Set new time: If the NTP client is not enabled, a time can be manually set in Set new time.
The time will take effect after the configuration but will not persist between reboots. If the new
configuration causes a reboot, the time will need to be set again.
The current statistics for the specified time server can be viewed under Monitoring -> NTP.

When the time service starts, the syncing event will be raised and can be seen in the Events
log. A second synchronized event is raised once the time service has synchronized with the
time server.

02/2022 307
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

8.4.9 Base Station Advanced Configuration

Base station hardware (QP and QB) have specific configuration parameters for hardware
specific features. To access these configuration parameters go to Setup -> Basestation.

HSC (Hot standby controller) mode

Only configurable within a QB (a QP always has this enabled), this should be enabled when a
QB is operating within a hot standby arrangement.

Shared IP address

Radio A and Radio B within a hot standby arrangement can be configured to ‘ share’an IP
address. This is a separate IP address from each radio’s unique IP address. The shared IP
address can be used to access the current ‘online’radio.

The shared IP address should be configured in radio A & B as the same IP address.

The shared IP address is only available once HSC mode is enabled (a QP always has HSC
mode enabled).

General purpose digital I/O (GPIO)

The digital outputs can be configured to reflect the status of different operating conditions. By
disabling either of the following parameters, the respective digital output can be set manually by
the user (TVIEW+ Diagnostics or SNMP can be used to set the digital output).

Output 1 Alternate Function - When enabled, digital output 1 will subscribe to the base health
status (the base health alarm can reflect the status of the alarm output. See the alarms section
for further detail). If the output is active, the base health alarm is in warning state.

308 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Output 2 Alternate Function - When enabled, digital output 2 will reflect which radio of a hot
standby arrangement is online.

· When the output is inactive: Base A is online

· When the output is active: Base B is online

SNMP notifications

Configure the radio to send SNMP notifications when a respective event occurs.

GPIO Inputs - By enabling SNMP notification on a GPIO input, the radio will send an SNMP
notification to the NMS specified in the configured SNMP section (to access SNMP, go to
Setup -> SNMP), when the respective digital input state changes.

Base Station Health - By enabling the Base Station Health SNMP notification, the radio will send
an SNMP notification to the NMS specified in the configured SNMP section (to access SNMP,
go to Setup -> SNMP), when a change in alarm state for the base health alarm occurs.

Base change over - By enabling the Base change over SNMP notification, the radio will send an
SNMP notification to the NMS specified in the configured SNMP section (to access SNMP, go
to Setup -> SNMP), when a hot standby base change over occurs.

Advanced

Periodic Switch Over Period - The period, in hours, after which the online base station will
initiate an automatic switch over.

This can be useful, to exercise each radio within a hot standby arrangement, to validate
redundant link availability.

Setting a value of zero will disable this feature.

02/2022 309
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

8.4.10 Trio E-Series Emulation Mode

Trio Q Data Radios can be configured to operate in E-Series mode. This can help a user to
determine the length of time a full system upgrade will take. See the examples below.

Typical E-Series system - Stage 1

The diagram below shows a typical E-Series system.

E-Series system upgrade - Stage 2

New installations or replacements of E-Series radios can be performed with Q data radios
operating in E-Series compatibility mode. This allows for a controlled and steady system
upgrade. The diagram below shows Trio Q Data Radios operating within an E-Series system.

310 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Switch system to Q mode - Stage 3

Once all E-Series have been replaced, the Trio Q Data Radios may be re-configured to operate
in Q mode, to provide the advanced features and functionality of the Trio Q Data Radios.

8.5 Security

· Centralized User Access Control 312

· Radio Access Control 316

· USB Port 332

· Secure Shell (SSH) 332

02/2022 311
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

· HTTP Secure (HTTPS) 333

· Packet Filtering Firewall 334

· Virtual LAN (VLAN) 351

8.5.1 Centralized User Access Control

Available as of firmware version 1.5.0.

User administration allows an administrator to create individual local users with associated levels
of radio access privileges.

Available as of firmware version 2.2.2, RADIUS user authentication allows an administrator to

create users with associated levels of radio access privileges at a central location for use by
multiple radios.

User administration can be accessed by browsing to Setup -> Security.

Enable Security for the access control table to become visible (Security is enabled by default).

Authentication Type configures the authentication methods allowed for the radio:
· Local Only: Authenticate users from the local user table only. (Default).
· RADIUS Only: Authenticate users from the specified RADIUS server(s) only.
· Local then RADIUS: Authenticate users first from the local user table, then from the
specified RADIUS server(s).
· RADIUS then Local: Authenticate users first from the specified RADIUS server(s), then from
the local user table.
To add a new local user, ensure Authentication Type is not RADIUS Only and click the ‘
+’
button at the bottom of the Users table.

NOTICE
POTENTIAL SECURITY RISK
When configuring confidential information such as usernames and passwords, use a secure
connection to the configuration page such as HTTPS or SSH.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in cyber security vulnerabilities.

312 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

An empty row will be added to the table, with five configurable fields.

· Enabled: Check box to enable/disable a user account (without removing it from the table)
· Username: The username can only consist of letters and/or numbers and can be 1 to 30
characters long. (No two users can have the same username).
· Password: The password can be between 6 and 30 characters long.

o When the password field is selected, a password window will appear.

o The password window prompts for the password to be populated twice, to help ensure that
the characters entered are as expected (if the passwords do not match, a message will
appear).
o For security purposes, the password characters are always hidden behind black dots.
· Access: Defines the access privilege level for the user being created.
There are four access privilege levels to select from:

Access Privileges

Unrestricted No restrictions to user access

Read/Write/Sec Allows configuration of all items except for user administration

Read/Write Allows configuration of all items except for SNMP, user

administration and security.

Read Only Read only

· Comment: An optional field for a profile description.

To configure authentication via RADIUS, ensure Authentication Type is not Local Only. The
RADIUS configuration will be displayed:

02/2022 313
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

To add a RADIUS server, click the '+' button at the bottom of the Servers table.

An empty row will be added to the table with three configurable fields.

· IP Address: The IP address of the RADIUS server to use.

· Port: The port of the RADIUS service running on the server.
· Secret: The shared secret of the RADIUS server. This is a password field that can be
between 1 and 256 characters long.
Authentication will be attempted against each RADIUS server from the top to bottom of the table.
The configured retries and timeout will apply to each server before attempting the next server.

The RADIUS server's dictionary must be configured with the following object definition:
VENDOR TRIO 33302
BEGIN-VENDOR TRIO
· ATTRIBUTE TRIO-UserAuth-Group 1 integer
· VALUE TRIO-UserAuth-Group Unrestricted 0
· VALUE TRIO-UserAuth-Group Security 1
· VALUE TRIO-UserAuth-Group Readwrite 2
· VALUE TRIO-UserAuth-Group Readonly 3
END-VENDOR TRIO
Every configured user must contain a value for 'TRIO-UserAuth-Group' which is sent along with
a successful authorization message.

This is used to determine the authorized-user's access level.

Local User Administration configuration example

The following user administration table shows four users configured, one for each priority
access level:

314 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Logging in

Once the configuration is activated, the configuration page will prompt for log in credentials to
allow access to the radio:

Enter the log in credentials and click Login.

If entered correctly, the Home page of the radio will be displayed along with the username and
access level shown within the page banner (Circled in RED below):

Without log in credentials, users will have access to the radio’

s monitoring page, where the
radio’
s diagnostic information and basic unit information is available.

Successful and unsuccessful logins are shown on the Monitoring -> Alarms and Events
page. The events table shows the name of the logged in user, and the authentication method
used. An unsuccessful login is recorded when a user is locked out after 5 unsuccessful login
attempts. A user is locked out for 2 minutes.

02/2022 315
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

8.5.2 Radio Access Control

· Operation 316

· Configuration 320

· Diagnostics 324

Operation

Available as of firmware version 2.4.0

See the following topics:

· Introduction 316

· Encryption 317

· Replay Protection 317

· Onboarding 317

· Suspension 318

· Hot Standby Operation 319

· Recovery Password 319

· Radio Access Control List 319

Introduction

The Radio Access Control feature allows the administrator to manage which radios are
authorized to access the radio network. Radios which are authorized to access the radio
network protect user data with 256-bit AES-GCM encryption and 64-bit authentication tags.

One radio in the network is designated the role of Authenticator while all other radios are
designated the role of Supplicant. The Authenticator (i.e. Entry Point) and Supplicants (i.e.
Remotes) mutually authenticate each other via a secure DTLS communications protocol using
X509 certificates. Before a supplicant can communicate with an authenticator, the X509
certificates must be shared using a secure process. This process is known as onboarding and
there are several methods of onboarding available depending on the scenario.

The administrator manages a Radio Access Control List (RACL) within the Authenticator and
Supplicants to control which radios are authorized to access the radio network. The RACL
allows the administrator to change the type of authorization of any radio.

316 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Encryption

User data sent over the air is encrypted using 256-bit AES-GCM. User data is encrypted with a
random network and root keys. The encryption keys rotate every 24 hours or on demand. Keys
are automatically updated in all authorized radios. There is no requirement for a pre-shared key
to be configured. This method of encryption is compliant to NIST SP800-38D and has a similar
overhead compared to legacy 256-bit AES pre-shared key encryption (as available in firmware
2.3.0 or earlier). 256-bit AES-GCM encryption cannot be enabled by itself, and is only available
in conjunction with radio access control (authentication).

In addition to 256-bit AES-GCM encryption, legacy 256-bit AES pre-shared key encryption is
available, where all data transmitted over the air is encrypted with a pre-shared key. This option
allows the user to configure a radio for compatibility with legacy encryption systems (2.2.x or
earlier firmware systems). It is possible to migrate a system already operating with legacy 256-
AES pre-shared key encryption or systems with no encryption, to 256-bit AES-GCM
authenticated encryption.

The Authenticator is responsible for generating and securely distributing secret keys to the
authorized radios. There are 2 types of secret keys, the Root Secret Key and the Network
Encryption Key, both of which are 256 bits. The Root Secret Key is distributed securely over a
DTLS channel to each authorized radio. The Network Encryption Key is distributed to all radios
with an authentication beacon, which is broadcast by the Authenticator to all Supplicants. The
Network Encryption Key is encrypted using the Root Secret Key and the AES Key Wrapping
Algorithm (RFC3394) such that only radios with the Root Secret Key can obtain the Network
Encryption Key from the authentication beacon.

Replay Protection

Replay protection is facilitated by the Network Encryption Key which contains a replay counter
so that each transmitted packet is unique and has a defined authenticated sequence. Rotation
of the Network Encryption Key every 24 hours prevents the replay counter exhaustion and
meets NIST SP 800 38D requirements of assurance of authenticity of each packet. The
Authentication Beacon is digitally signed using the Authenticator's certificate key.

Onboarding

Onboarding is a process which facilitates the mutual exchange of certificates between an

authenticator and supplicant so that the supplicant can be easily and quickly authorized.

There are three methods of onboarding.

02/2022 317
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Method Operation Use Case

Zero Touch An invitation file is generated on the Onboarding of supplicant from

authenticator that includes a radio factory default configuration
configuration. state. (i.e. Installation of new
radio)

Invitation Only An invitation file is generated on the Onboarding of supplicant with an

authenticator without a radio existing configured state (i.e.
configuration included. Migration of existing radio to
enable Authentication)

Manual Certificates of the authenticator and Loading of additional certificates

certificate supplicant are manually exchanged by after initial onboarding of
exchange a trusted administrator. supplicant has been completed.

Invitations for supplicant onboarding are generated on the authenticator. Invitations are unique
to both the supplicant and the authenticator and contain a One Time Password (OTP) which is
derived from the authenticators certificate and serial number of the supplicant to be onboarded.
Invitations also include the Public Key of the Authenticator. The OTP is unique (i.e. locked) to
the authenticator and supplicant and shall expire once the onboarding completes successfully.
Zero Touch combines an invitation with a Configuration (in a single common file) for the radio to
be onboarded and configured at the same time.

A supplicant may only be onboarded to an authenticator if that same authenticator generated

the invitation. During the generation of the invitation, the authenticator adds the supplicant to its
RACL as Invited, as well as generating an invitation file (either a Zero Touch or OTP).

The invitation cannot be applied for onboarding of another supplicant. Invitations are not time or
use limited (despite the naming convention of One Time Password), providing the supplicant is
not deleted from the authenticators RACL. The reference to “One Time”, refers to the process
of the authenticator adding the supplicant to its RACL “One Time”, after which the invitation
generated during this process, may be applied multiple times to the same supplicant radio. This
would normally only occur if the supplicant radio was returned to factory configuration state.

During onboarding, the supplicant and authenticator communicate using DTLS, authenticate
using OTP and exchange certificates, and after authorization is granted by the authenticator the
supplicant is provided the Root Secret Key.

Suspension

Network access can be by deleting, disabling, or suspending an authorized supplicant from the
authenticator’s RACL. If any of these 3 actions are initiated by the administrator on the
authenticator, the authenticator will rotate both the Root Secret Key and Network Encryption
Key. The administrator can choose two types of key rotation to enforce suspension, Immediate
or Background. Immediate results in faster key rotation but results in data outage (approx.
20secs of outage x number of authorized supplicants remaining on authenticator). Background
key rotation takes more time to enforce suspension, but occurs without causing data outage.

318 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Hot Standby Operation

Hot Standby Radios (QP or QH) can also be configured as an Authenticator or Supplicant. The
Hot Standby needs to be paired with the “Pairing Key”enabled so that supplicant certificates
can be securely transferred between them. Before generating invitations for supplicants, radios
in a Hot Standby should first be paired. A supplicant can be onboarded using an invitation from
either radio in a Hot Standby Pair.

Recovery Password

The recovery password is used in conjunction with the saved RACL to restore communication to
supplicant radios when the authenticator radio is replaced with another radio (and new
certificates). The recovery password is chosen by the Administrator when configuring the
original Authenticator. The Authenticator stores a hash of the password and distributes it to all
Supplicants. The complete RACL of the Authenticator should be saved and kept with the
recovery password.

CAUTION
POTENTIAL SECURITY RISK
This password must be stored securely by the Administrator for use in the future. This
password may be used to assume the role of Authenticator to all Supplicants.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in cyber security vulnerabilities.

When the Administrator loads the saved RACL and inputs the recovery password into the
replacement Authenticator, the Authenticator will use the password to authenticate itself to each
Supplicant. Each Supplicant will copy the new Authenticator's certificate into its RACL. Initiating
the recovery after changing the hardware on an Authenticator will cause a data outage until the
recover process is complete. The process takes approximately 5 minutes + (20 seconds of
outage x number of authorized supplicants remaining on authenticator).

Once the previous recovery password has been used to onboard a new Authenticator with a
network of Supplicants, the Administrator should then configure a new recovery password into
the Authenticator for use in the future. The recovery password should be used as a last resort
when communication to supplicants has been lost due to unplanned or unexpected replacement
of the authenticator radio is required.

For planned changes, such as planned maintenance or if the type of radio hardware needs to
be changed (i.e. Changing a QR to a QP type), it is recommended to save the replacement
authenticators certificates and manually load them into the supplicants, before changing the
authenticator radio hardware.

Radio Access Control List

Access control in an authenticator or supplicant is managed through the Radio Access Control
List (RACL). The RACL is accessed in WUI/TUI via Maintenance -> Radio Access Control
and an example of an authenticator with two supplicants in its RACL is shown below.

02/2022 319
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

There are different levels of authorization available in the RACL, as shown in the table below:

Authorization Operation Use Case

Level

Authorized The radio is authorized to Radios that have been

communicate commissioned, installed and are
currently operating with remote
devices.

Invited The radio is authorized to Radios that will be commissioned

communicate but has not yet been and installed in the future.
onboarded

Suspended The radio is not authorized to Radios that are not currently
communicate. installed, stored in spares
warehouse or have been
decommissioned.

Disable The radio is not authorized to Radios that have been lost or stolen.
communicate and will be
commanded by the Authenticator
to return to factory default state the
next time the radio attempts to
authenticate.

Configuration

Configuration of the Radio Access Control Feature is accessed via Setup -> Security. If
Encryption = AES-GCM then the Radio Access Control role must be configured to
Authenticator or Supplicant.

See the following topics:

· Authenticator configuration 321

· Supplicant configuration 321

· Encryption configuration 322

· Maintenance 323

320 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Authenticator configuration

When configuring the authenticator, a recovery password should be defined as shown in the
image below. The recovery password is required if future maintenance requirements require the
authenticator radio to be changed.

For more details, see Recovery Password 319 .

Encryption should be configured to AES-GCM unless migrating from a legacy system operating
with Encryption = None (No Encryption) or Encryption = AES (256-bit AES with pre-shared
key). If migrating, see the example in Part G – Quick Start Guide – Radio Access Control –
Migration 140 .

Supplicant configuration

When configuring the supplicant, the Authenticator IP address needs to be configured, as

shown below.

02/2022 321
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

The following rules apply to the configuration of the Authenticators IP:

Mode Type of Radio Configuration of Authenticator

IP

Bridge QR or QB Authenticator LAN IP

Bridge Hot Standby QP or QH Authenticator Shared IP

IP Routing QR or QB Authenticator WAN IP

IP Routing Hot Standby QP or QH Authenticator WAN IP

If a radio is acting as a repeater in Layer 3 (IP Routing) mode, the Forward Broadcast option in
IP Routing -> Advanced needs to be enabled to ensure authentication packets are propagated
through the repeater.

Encryption configuration

Encryption should be configured to match the configuration of the authenticator unless

migrating from a legacy system operating with Encryption = None (No Encryption) or
Encryption = AES (256-bit AES with pre-shared key).

If migrating, see the example in Part G – Quick Start Guide – Radio Access Control –
Migration 140 .

If legacy 256-bit AES pre-shared encryption is required, the pre-shared key must be
configured as shown below.

The Shared Key can be a String or Hexadecimal number

Encryption key: String

For a string type of key, length must be between 6 and 32 characters. Observe that the key is
case sensitive.

Some examples are:

· TRIO2012
· Murray River Region

Encryption key: Hexadecimal number

322 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Hexadecimal numbers can have a value of 0 to 15 and are represented by 0-9 and A, B, C, D,
E or F. A hexadecimal key begins with 0x and has up to 64 digits following. Use an even
number of hexadecimal digits.

Some examples are:

· 0x1234
· 0x123456789ABCDE
· 0x11111111222222223333333344444444 up to 64 digits

Maintenance

The Radio Access Control List and onboarding process is managed via the Maintenance ->
Radio Access Control page, which is shown in the image below.

02/2022 323
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Save/Load of Radio Access Control List and Certificates

The Radio Access Control List (RACL) of an authenticator or supplicant may be saved for
backup or transfer to another radio. The RACL is saved in a single .tar file. The saved RACL list
contains the serial number, certificate, state, and authorization of all radios in the RACL.

Save/Load Radio Certificate

The certificate of any supplicant or authenticator may be saved for transfer to another radio.
Certificates are saved in a single .crt file. A single certificate from any other supplicant or
authenticator may be loaded into the radio.

Radio Access Control List (RACL) of an authenticator or supplicant may be saved for backup or
transfer to another radio. The RACL is saved in a single .tar file. The saved RACL list contains
the serial number, certificate, state, and authorization of all radios in the RACL.

Invitation

Zero Touch or One Time Password invitations can be generated using the invitation generator
as found in Maintenance -> Radio Access Control. For more information, see the example in
Part G – Quick Start Guide – Radio Access Control – Migration 140 .

Diagnostics

· Radio Access Control List (RACL) 324

· Event Log 326

Radio Access Control List (RACL)

The RACL provides management controls and diagnostic status (State). It is accessed via
Maintenance -> Radio Access Control. Note that if Authentication is enabled, and the radio
hears a serial number that is not in the RACL, it will appear in the Network List (Monitoring ->
Network List) as “Unknown”. An example of a typical Authenticator’ s RACL with two
Supplicants is shown below.

The State column displays the current state of the radio with respect to the authentication
process. There are different states, as shown in the table below.

324 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

States Operation

Pending The radio has not completed the onboarding process.

Synced The radio has completed the authentication process.

Syncing The radio is in the process of authenticating.

Error The authentication process could not complete due to an error

02/2022 325
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Event Log

Event Record Logged In Notes

ID# SEVER EVENT EVENT Auth Supp

ITY DESC DETAIL

702 EVENT Supplicant Recovery X This authenticator failed to

radio password authenticate to the supplicant
authentication required by because recovery password is
error. Radio <serial not configured on the
number>. authenticator.

1. The supplicant may have

been returned to factory
default state and then
configuration loaded without
loading the RACL containing
the Authenticator’ s
certificate.
2. The authenticator was
replaced but recovery
password was not configured
in the Radio Access Control
Page.

To recover from 1, re-onboard

the Supplicant with new One-
Time Password.
To recover from 2, input the
recovery password in Radio
Access Control Page.
On Supplicant you will see 715
event.

702 EVENT Supplicant Radio <serial X This Authenticator failed to

radio number> authenticate to the supplicant
authentication rejected using the recovery password
error. recovery because the password did not
password. match the hash stored in
Supplicant.
The replaced authenticator was
configured with incorrect
recovery password in the RAC.
On Supplicant you will see 715
event.

326 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

702 EVENT Supplicant No entry for X This Authenticator could not

radio Radio <serial authenticate the Supplicant with
authentication number> in given serial number because no
error. Radio Access certificate or invitation is
Control List. registered in the RACL.
On Supplicant you will see 715
event

700 EVENT Supplicant Radio <serial X This Authenticator has

radio number> authenticated the Supplicant with
authenticated authenticated the given serial number which is
. and authorized to access the
authorized. network.
On Supplicant you will see 710
event.

701 EVENT Supplicant Radio <serial X This Authenticator has

radio number> authenticated the Supplicant with
authenticated authenticated the given serial number and has
. and rejected commanded the Supplicant to
(disabled). reset to a factory default state,
rendering it disabled.
On Supplicant you will see 711
event.

701 Radio <serial X This Authenticator has

number> authenticated the Supplicant with
authenticated the given serial number which is
and rejected not authorized to access the
(suspended). network.
On Supplicant you will see 711
event.

703 EVENT Supplicant Radio <serial X The Authenticator could not

radio number> has authenticate the Supplicant
onboarding no invitation because it returned an empty
error. loaded. OTP response.
The Supplicant is invited,
Supplicant has the
Authenticator’
s certificate but
does not have the invitation.
To recover, load the invite from
Authenticator to the Supplicant.
On Supplicant you will see 715
event.

02/2022 327
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

703 EVENT Supplicant Radio <serial X The Authenticator could not

radio number> has authenticate the Supplicant
onboarding incorrect because it returned incorrect
error. invitation OTP response.
loaded.
Supplicant may have been
loaded with incorrect invitation.
On Supplicant you will see 715
event.

704 EVENT Supplicant Radio <serial X The Authenticator successfully

radio number> authenticated the Supplicant with
onboarding. authenticated OTP.
using
invitation. On the Supplicant you will see
710 event.

704 EVENT Supplicant Applying X The Authenticator has applied

radio security security settings during a Zero-
onboarding. settings to Touch onboarding process.
radio <serial
number>.

705 EVENT Supplicant Requesting X The Authenticator is inviting a

radio re- <serial radio to join because the RACL
authentication number> to was changed. The Authenticator
. re- attempts 3 times to invite a radio
authenticate. before skipping it.
Attempt 1 of
3. On Supplicant you will see 709
event.

705 EVENT Supplicant Radio <serial X The Authenticator invited the

radio re- number> not Supplicant 3 times but the
authentication responding, Supplicant did not respond.
. skipping. Skipping to next supplicant in the
list.

706 EVENT Manual key Key rotation X Authenticator has attempted to

rotation. completed. exchange keys with all
Supplicants and has transitioned
to new keys, if key rotation was
started in background.

706 EVENT Manual key Deferred for X The new request to rotate keys
rotation. <minutes> in the background has been
mins, deferred for xx minutes because
transition a transition period was in
progress.

328 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

period is in
progress.

706 EVENT Manual key Deferred for X The new request to rotate keys
rotation. <seconds> in the background has been
secs, deferred for xx seconds because
transition a transition period was in
period is in progress.
progress.

706 EVENT Manual key Started X Authenticator detected that at

rotation. immediate least one Supplicant was de-
key rotation. authorized in the RACL and user
selected to rotate key
immediately.

706 EVENT Manual key Started X Authenticator detected that

rotation. background either at least one Supplicant
key rotation. was de-authorized in the RACL
and user selected to rotate key
in the background or the
Recovery password was
changed in the configuration.

706 EVENT Manual key Key transition X Authenticator has started the
rotation. period transition period from old keys to
started. new keys after exchanging new
keys with the Supplicants.

709 EVENT Attempting to Authenticator X The Supplicant is attempting to

authenticate. address authenticate with the
<authenticator Authenticator because either the
ip address>. Supplicant has been invited to
re-authenticate or the Supplicant
needs to re-authenticate.
On Authenticator you will see
700 event and if Authenticator
invited to re-authenticate you will
see 705 event also.

710 EVENT Radio Authorized. X The Supplicant was successfully

authentication authenticated by the
completed Authenticator and was
successfully. authorized to join the network.
On Authenticator you will see
700 event.

02/2022 329
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

711 EVENT Radio Rejected X The Supplicant was successfully

authentication (disabled). authenticated by the
completed Authenticator and was not
successfully. authorized to join the network
and was instructed to factory
default.
The Supplicant was marked as
Disabled in the Authenticator’
s
RACL.
On Authenticator you will see
701 event.

711 Radio Rejected X The Supplicant was successfully

authentication (suspended). authenticated by the
completed Authenticator and was not
successfully. authorized to join the network.
The Supplicant was marked as
Suspended in the
Authenticator’
s RACL.
On Authenticator you will see
701 event.

712 EVENT Authenticator No beacon X The Supplicant has not received

beacon received for 5 the Authenticator’
s beacon for 5
search. mins, min.
searching.
The Rx LED will start flashing
Red.

707 EVENT Authenticator Key X The Supplicant successfully

beacon confirmed, authenticated to the
received. starting data Authenticator and has been
service. granted permission to access
the network.
The Supplicant has powered up
and received an authentication
beacon confirming it is
authorized.
The Supplicant will allow user
data over the air.

708 EVENT Authenticator Key unknown, X The Supplicant has detected a

beacon stopping data new root secret key is in use.
received. service. Re- The Supplicant must re-
authentication authenticate, and if authorized to
required. access the network will be
provided the new root secret key
by the Authenticator. Caused by

330 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

immediate key rotation selected

by Administrator when de-
authorizing a radio.

712 EVENT Authenticator Waiting for X The Supplicant has started and
beacon beacon. is waiting for the first beacon
search. from the Authenticator.

713 EVENT No authorized X The supplicant has no

certificate in authorized certificate or invite in
access its RACL, the Supplicant will not
control list. be able to authenticate with the
Authenticator.
Load an invite or a certificate of
the Authenticator in the RACL.

715 EVENT Radio No invitation X Supplicant was challenged for

authentication OTP by the Authenticator but an
error. invitation has not been loaded
into the Supplicant
On Authenticator you will see
703 event.

715 EVENT Radio Incorrect X Authenticator rejected to

authentication invitation onboard the Supplicant because
error. the Supplicant was loaded with
an incorrect invitation.
On Authenticator you will see
703 event.

715 EVENT Radio Radio X The Supplicant is not registered

authentication unknown to in the Authenticator’
s RACL.
error. Authenticator
On Authenticator you will see
702 event.

715 EVENT Radio Incorrect X The Authenticator failed the

authentication recovery recovery password challenge.
error. password
On Authenticator you will see
702 event.
To recover, input the correct
recovery password in the
Authenticator or re-onboard the
Supplicant using OTP.

02/2022 331
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

720 EVENT Radio Access [action] The action was performed on the
Control List Radio Access Control List.
Changed.

721 EVENT Authenticator Stopping data X The Authenticator was

radio service. Re- suspended on the supplicant.
deauthorized. authentication Supplicant radio needs to be
required. onboarded again.

8.5.3 USB Port

The radio is supplemented with a USB port, which is currently used to automatically configure
the radio using an appropriately named configuration file located on a USB memory device.
See USB Automatic Configuration Activation 130 in Part G – Quick Start Guide. To support this
feature, the USB port is enabled when the radio is in a factory default state.

The USB port can be disabled during the initial and subsequent configuration to prevent it from
being used for malicious intents. This is configured in Security -> Administration.

8.5.4 Secure Shell (SSH)

SSH provides a secure and authenticated method for remotely accessing the Trio Q Data
Radios text terminal for configuration and diagnostics.

To access Trio Q Data Radios via SSH, the network management PC requires an SSH-capable
program (i.e. PuTTY).

Traffic over the SSH connection is encrypted.

During the first connection to the SSH terminal software, a ‘

fingerprint‘of the remote device is
taken and stored on the Network Management PC. This allows for authentication in the future.

The SSH session also requires the user to enter a username and password for authorized
access to the text terminal.

332 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

SSH example

Network Management PC Remote Devices

· Running SSH client software (i.e. PuTTY) · Embedded Secure Shell (SSH) server
which authenticates with the SSH server provides access to the text user interface.
(i.e. remote radio).

· Authentication occurs by comparing · Encryption will be used to communicate with

device fingerprint with fingerprint stored an SSH client during a configuration
in client’
s register. session.

· Once the SSH server is authenticated, · Once an SSH client has established a
the SSH client will establish an encrypted session to the SSH server, the client will not
terminal session with the text terminal that be granted access to the configuration until
allows for configuration and diagnostics. the pre-configured username and password
has been entered.

8.5.5 HTTP Secure (HTTPS)

HTTPS provides a secure and authenticated method for remotely accessing the Trio Q Data
Radios Web User Interface (WUI) for configuration and diagnostics.

To access the Trio Q Data Radios via HTTPS, use a web browser that has HTTPS capabilities.
Common web browsers which provide HTTPS capabilities include: IE11, Edge, and Chrome.

The HTTPS client (web browser) will request a digitally-signed certificate from the HTTPS server
(Trio Q Data Radios) to help ensure that the target device is authentic.

Traffic over the HTTPS connection is encrypted.

Two methods of certificate management are available: Self-signed certificates generated by the
radio itself or the use of certificates generated by external certificate servers.

02/2022 333
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Network Management Server Remote Devices

· Using HTTPS Protocol, the web browser · Remote devices can be configured to
connects to the target remote radio web enable HTTP and HTTPS separately.
server.

· The web browser uses digitally-signed · Certificates can be self-signed (generated

certificates to confirm the identity of the by the Trio Q Data Radios radio itself) or
remote device. 3rd-party certificates can be used.

· The web browser will have a list of trusted

Certification Authorities. If the Certificate
is not signed from a trusted CA, a
message will be displayed.

· Remote certificate is compared with local

copy (or with copy on certificate server).

· If certificates don’
t match (or don’
t exist)
a message is displayed.

· If certificates match then messages are

not displayed.

8.5.6 Packet Filtering Firewall

· Operation 334

· Configuration 340

Operation

As of firmware version 2.2.0 the Advanced Packet Filtering Firewall is available.

334 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

The Packet Filtering Firewall provides an easy-to-configure filtering mechanism that can help to
prevent unwanted Ethernet traffic from loading the wireless channel. It can also be employed as
a security measure by restricting the traffic accepted or forwarded by the radio.

The Packet Filtering Firewall has two modes:

· Basic 335

· Advanced 336

Basic packet filtering firewall

Basic mode helps to protect the wireless channel from unwanted traffic entering the Ethernet
ports. Access to services on the local radio is always permitted from the Ethernet and Radio
ports.

The following diagram shows how traffic flows between the Ethernet and Radio ports.

Pre-defined filters based on common services, protocols, and addressing types are available.
Each of these filters may be set to Drop or Allow.

The available pre-defined filters are:

· ARP + Unicast + Multicast
· ARP + Unicast
· Unicast
· HTTP
· HTTPS
· ICMP

02/2022 335
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

· Telnet
· UDP eDiags
· SNMP
· SSH/SCP
· NetBios
· VLAN

In basic mode, you can also define filters of permitted UDP/TCP ports, IP source address and
MAC source address.

The following diagram shows the order in which filtering is applied in basic mode according to
each packet's attributes.

A packet needs to satisfy all filters before it is allowed for transmission over the radio channel.

The MAC Address, IP Address, and TCP/UDP Port filters permit all packets through when their
list is empty. If all lists are empty, then only those protocols from the pre-defined list set to drop
will be blocked. When one or more entries are present in the IP Address, MAC Address, or
TCP/UDP Port filters, the filter will drop all packets not matching an entry within its list unless
explicitly allowed within the pre-defined filter.

Advanced packet filtering firewall

Advanced mode allows you to help protect both the wireless channel and the wired network from
unwanted traffic forwarding through the radio. It is also possible to help restrict traffic from
accessing the radio’ s services.

The diagram below shows how traffic passes through various filters in the local radio.

336 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

The diagram below shows how incoming packets are processed. Outgoing packets not
generated by the local radio pass through their respective Forwarding Filter, while packets
generated by the local radio do not.

02/2022 337
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Radio Services Filter

Pre-defined filters are available that restrict the access to the radio’
s services based on the
ingress port: Radio or Ethernet. In addition, custom filters may be defined to provide further
restrictions based on source IP Address and MAC Address to each of the radio’ s service.

The available radio service filters are:

· HTTP
· HTTPS
· Telnet
· SSH/SCP
· Serial Device Server
· TCP/UDP Gateway
· eDiags
· SNMP
· NTP
· ICMP
· Custom

Interface Filters

The Radio and Ethernet interfaces are each configured with a filter to restrict the packet flowing
in or out of the interface. The 2 Ethernet ports are treated as one interface and share the same
filter.

A filter is a series of rules, where if a packet matches the criteria of a rule, the packet is either
dropped or allowed depending on the action defined in the rule.

Default Action may be configured to Drop or Allow, which is the action applied to packets that
do not meet any rule in the applicable filter.

Bridge Mode

The following are fields that can be matched by Bridging filters:

· Source and destination MAC addresses
· Ethernet protocol
· VLAN ID and PCP
· VLAN Encapsulated Ethernet protocol
· Source and destination IP addresses
· IP protocol
· TCP and UDP source and destination ports

IPv4 fields can only be matched when the Ethernet protocol is IPv4.

338 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

IP Route Mode

The following are fields that can be matched by the Routing filters:

· Source MAC addresses (for ingress traffic)

· Connection state
· IP protocol
· Source and destination IP addresses
· TCP and UDP source and destination ports
· ICMP type and code

The connection state does not correlate to a field in the IP nor Ethernet header, but is a state
assigned by the radio to the packet relating to historical packets. The following are the possible
states of a packet:

Packet State Description

New This state is assigned to the first packet of a connection. This could be a
new connection, or a connection that has timed out, but has not yet been
closed.

Established A packet is assigned the Established state when traffic has been observed
in both directions matching the source and destination IP addresses and
ports of the packet. This also applies to a packet that is in response to a
request packet that has already been observed.

Related A packet is assigned the Related state when it is related to an established

packet for an application protocol understood by the radio. Current
protocols supported are TFTP and FTP.

Invalid This state is assigned to a packet that cannot be identified due to system
errors such as out of memory conditions, or ICMP error messages not in
response to any known connections.

The default behavior for each filter can be collectively configured to Allow, or Drop packets not
matching any rules in the filter. The administrator may choose Allow as the default action when
not all the wanted traffic can be entirely defined by a set of rules. Instead, rules are defined to
match and drop the unwanted traffic. Allow is the default action and it is only applied as a rule
when Allow rule is defined.

Rules are evaluated from top to bottom. Change the order of rules using the up and down
arrows.

From firmware version 2.5.0, the advanced firewall will allow up to five non-contiguous ports
and/or contiguous port ranges to be specified in a single rule by using the comma delimiter.
The matching behavior depends on whether the radio is in Bridge or IP Route mode.

When in Bridge mode, if either the source or destination port fields contain multiple port
definitions, the rule will match if the packet contains a source and destination port matching the
index in the port definitions. If the number of port definitions in the source and destination port
fields do not match, the definitions without a matching pair will apply independently.

02/2022 339
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

When in IP Route mode, the rule will match if the packet contains a port in any of the port
definitions. If both source and destination port fields contain multiple port definitions, then the
rule will match if the packet contains a source port and a destination port listed in its respective
port fields.

For both modes, if the common port match is selected, the rule will match if the packet contains
a source or destination port listed in the common port field.

The following example will match if:

· Bridge mode: The source and destination ports are 100 and 1000, 200...210 and 2000, or
300, and 3000 respectively.
· IP Route mode: The source port is 100, 200...210, or 300 and the destination port is 1000,
2000, or 3000.

The following example will match if:

· Bridge mode: The source and destination ports are 100 and 1000 respectively, or the source
port is 200 or 300.
· IP Route mode: The source port is100, 200, or 300 and the destination port is 1000.

Configuration

For more detail on the Packet Filtering Firewall, see Packet Filtering Firewall 334 in Part D -
Feature Overview.

The following examples demonstrate how the filters are configured using the Basic and
Advanced modes.
· Basic mode 340

· Advanced Mode - allow by default 342

· Advanced Mode - drop by default 345

Basic mode

In this example, the Radio is operating in Transparent Bridge mode while the Packet Filtering
Firewall will be operating in Basic mode. The Packet Filtering Firewall will be configured to block
all traffic forwarded from the Ethernet interface to the Radio interface except for ARP, ICMP,
SNMP, and DNP over UDP on port 20000. The allowed traffic needs to be sourced from either
of the two devices connected to the radio with address 192.168.2.17 or 192.168.2.18. Basic
mode does not restrict traffic between the radio’ s services (SSH, HTTPS, etc) and the Ethernet

340 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

or Radio interfaces, therefore the services of the radio will remain reachable from both the
Radio and Ethernet interfaces.

Step 1 - Enable Basic Mode

Step 2 - Select Ethernet Filter Type and Filters

From the Ethernet Filter Type, select Allow ARP + Unicast + Multicast.

Set HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, UDP eDiags, SSH/SCP, NetBios, and VLAN to Drop.

Step 3 - Allow DNP traffic

02/2022 341
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

To allow DNP traffic, add Port 20000 to the Port Filtering table. The port filter will now drop all
other traffic not listed in the user-defined port filtering table or explicitly allowed in the
predefined table.

Step 4 - Allow permitted IP addresses

To allow only the hosts with IP Address 192.168.2.17 or 192.168.2.18 to send traffic from the
Ethernet interface onto the Radio interface, add the permitted IP Address to the table, as
shown below.

Advanced Mode - allow by default

In this example, the Radio is operating in Transparent Bridge mode while the Packet Filtering
Firewall will be operating in Advanced mode with default action of Allow applied to packets not
matching any rule when transiting through the radio. With Allow as the default action, rules are
defined to match the unwanted traffic to be dropped. In this example, the unwanted traffic to be
dropped is:
· HTTP traffic accessing the radio’
s server via the radio interface
· HTTP traffic forwarded through the radio from Ethernet or radio interfaces
· Broadcast traffic forwarded from Ethernet to the radio interface save for ARP traffic

Step 1 – Enable Advanced Mode

Step 2 – Block access to the radio's HTTP service

From the Radio Services list, uncheck Radio from HTTP to block access to the radio’
s HTTP
service from the radio interface.

342 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Step 3 – Configure Bridging Filters or Routing Filters

Configure the Bridging Filters (Transparent Bridge mode) or Routing Filters (IP Routing
mode) to drop unwanted traffic transiting through the radio. Because the radio is operating in
Transparent Bridge mode in this example, the Bridging Filters are available for configuration.
Set the Type to Allow, which is the default action chosen in this example.

Step 4 – Define a rule to Drop broadcast traffic

Define a rule to Drop broadcast traffic transiting through the radio out of the radio interface.
Click the + symbol in Bridging Filters -> Radio to add the rule as shown below and click
Confirm.

Step 5 – Define a rule to Allow ARP traffic

Define a rule to Allow ARP traffic transiting through the radio out of the radio interface. Click
the + symbol in Bridging Filters -> Radio to add the rule as shown below and click Confirm.

02/2022 343
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Step 6 – Define a rule to Drop HTTP traffic

Define a rule to Drop HTTP traffic transiting through the radio in or out of the radio interface.
Click the + symbol in Bridging Filters -> Radio to add the rule as shown below and click
Confirm.

Step 7 – Review the order of rules within each Bridging Filter

344 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Rules are evaluated from the top down. The goal is to drop broadcast traffic except for ARP
traffic, which is one class of broadcast traffic generally needed to be allowed when operating in
Transparent Bridge mode. It is therefore, necessary to ensure the rule to allow ARP traffic is
above the rule to drop all broadcast traffic. Use the arrows to the right of the rules to rearrange
their order, as shown below.

Advanced Mode - drop by default

In this example, the Remote Radio is operating in IP Routing mode while the Packet Filtering
Firewall will be operating in Advanced mode with the default action of Drop applied to packets
not matching any rule when transiting through the radio. With Drop as the default action, rules
must be defined to match the wanted traffic to be allowed. In this example, the wanted traffic is
limited to:
· Access to the radio’
s ICMP, SSH & HTTPS services by any host from any interface
· Access to the radio’
s SNMP and Serial Device services by specific hosts from the radio
interface
· Routed traffic associated with a connection established by the SCADA Manager to the
Ethernet connected RTU

This configuration example refers to Remote Radio 1 in the diagram.

This example achieves the following outcomes:

a) Protects the RF channel from unnecessary traffic.

b) Restricts access to specific radio services.

c) Restricts access to the Ethernet connected RTU to a single host, the SCADA Manager.

02/2022 345
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

d) Restricts the access of Ethernet connected devices to hosts reachable via the RF channel.

Step 1 – Enable Advanced Mode

Step 2 – Disable the access interface for all radio services except ICMP, HTTPS, and SSH

From the Radio Services list, disable the access interface for all radio services except ICMP,
HTTPS, and SSH. Access to SNMP and Serial Device services will be granted in the next steps
using custom rules.

Step 3 – Define a custom rule to allow access to SNMP Service

Define a custom Radio Services rule to allow the SNMP Manager (10.176.60.110) only to
access the SNMP Service from the radio interface. Click the + symbol in Radio Services ->
Custom to add the rule as shown below and click Confirm.

346 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Step 4 – Define a custom rule to allow access to the Serial Device Service

Define a custom Radio Services rule to allow the SCADA Manager (10.176.40.100) to access
only the Serial Device Service from the radio interface. Click the + symbol in Radio Services
-> Custom to add the rule as shown below and click Confirm.

02/2022 347
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Step 5 – Configure the Bridging Filters or Routing Filters

Configure the Bridging Filters (Transparent Bridge mode) or Routing Filters (IP Routing
mode) to drop unwanted traffic transiting through the radio. Because the radio is operating in IP
Routing mode in this example, the Routing Filters are available for configuration. Change the
Type from Allow, which is the default action chosen in this example, to Drop by default.

Step 6 – Define a rule to allow routed traffic in or out of the radio interface - existing
connection

Define a rule to allow routed traffic in or out of the radio interface provided it is associated with
an existing connection. Click the + symbol in Bridging Filters -> Radio to add the rule as
shown below and click Confirm.

348 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Step 7 – Define a rule to allow routed traffic in the radio interface - new connection

Define a rule to allow routed traffic in the radio interface provided it is opening a new
connection from the SCADA Manager (10.176.40.100) destined to the common DNP port
(20000). Click the + symbol in Bridging Filters -> Radio to add the rule as shown below and
click Confirm.

02/2022 349
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Step 8 – Define a rule to allow all packets through the Ethernet filter

Since filtering, in this example, is performed in the radio filter, no filtering is required in the
Ethernet filter. Since the default action is to Drop, one rule is required to allow all packets
through the Ethernet filter. Click the + symbol in Bridging Filters -> Radio to add the rule as
shown below and click Confirm.

350 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Step 9 – Review the order of the rules within each Routing Filter

Rules are evaluated from the top down. In this example, the order of the rules will not change the
operation.

8.5.7 Virtual LAN (VLAN)

As of firmware version 1.5.0, VLAN is available (in Transparent Bridge mode only).

VLAN can help provide isolation between separate entities who share a single network.

For example, Department A may require access to the radios configuration/Diagnostics, while
Department B may only require access to SCADA information. By implementing VLAN, a virtual
network segregation can be implemented to help isolate each of the departments from one
another.

02/2022 351
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

VLAN configuration

To access the VLAN configuration section, navigate to Setup -> VLAN.

By default, VLAN is disabled. To enable VLAN, click Enabled. The configurable range of each
VLAN is 1...4094.

Radio services VLAN

Management VLAN ID

Defines the VLAN ID for access to radio management services. Management services include
HTTP/S, Telnet, SSH, SNMP and eDiags. A minimum of one Ethernet interface must be a
member of this VLAN to ensure that radio management services can be accessed. (Default =
1).

SCADA VLAN

Enables a separate VLAN for radio SCADA services. SCADA services include serial device
server and Modbus gateway. Allows external serial devices to be connected to COM1/2 and
belong to a separate SCADA VLAN. Once enabled, additional configuration options become
available:
· SCADA VLAN ID: SCADA VLAN ID is normally the same VLAN ID defined for SCADA traffic
on the Ethernet interface.
o Default value is 2.
· SCADA VLAN IP Address: Defines the unique IP address for the Serial Device
Server/Modbus Gateway when they belong to the SCADA VLAN.
· SCADA VLAN Subnet Mask: Defines the subnet mask for the SCADA VLAN. This
determines which IP addresses are local to the device, and which should be reached through
a gateway or router
· SCADA VLAN Default Gateway: A gateway forwards IP messages between devices on
different subnets in an IP network. For services running on the SCADA VLAN, messages not
belonging to the SCADA subnet will be forwarded to the specified gateway.
· COM1 VLAN: Defines the VLAN that the serial device server/Modbus Gateway using COM1
belongs to. (If SCADA VLAN is disabled, this defaults to Management)
o Management: Service on serial port COM1 will be assigned to the management VLAN
o SCADA: Service on serial port COM1 will be assigned to the SCADA VLAN.
· COM2 VLAN: Defines the VLAN that the serial device server/Modbus Gateway using COM2
belongs to. (If SCADA VLAN is disabled, this defaults to Management)
o Management: Service on serial port COM2 will be assigned to the management VLAN.

352 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

o SCADA: Service on serial port COM2 will be assigned to the SCADA VLAN.

Ethernet ports (VLAN)

Each Ethernet port can be independently configured to operate in one of two modes: Access or
Trunk.

Access: A port in access mode will process un-tagged packets from the Ethernet interface,
append the corresponding Port VLAN ID (PVID) and send the packets over the radio channel.
When a packet is received on the radio channel, the packet’s VLAN tag will be examined, and if
it matches the user configured PVID for any Ethernet port on the radio, the tag will be removed
and sent out the corresponding port.

A port configured in access mode, requires a Port VLAN ID (PVID).

Access ports configured with a PVID which match the management services VLAN will provide
access to internal radio management services.

Trunk: A port in trunk mode will transmit tagged VLAN packets from the Ethernet interface over
the radio channel. If an untagged packed is received on the port, it will be discarded.

Filtering can be applied to a trunk port, to allow only select VLAN IDs to pass through the port.

Ingress Filtering, when enabled, applies filtering on VLAN packets processed on any Ethernet
port configured as a trunk port. The filter will discard all VLAN tagged packets which are not
found within the membership table (for the corresponding port) while, allowing VLAN tagged
packets within the membership table to be sent over the radio channel. When Disabled, the
Ethernet interface will pass all tagged VLAN packets over the radio channel.

Membership

VLAN membership

For trunked ports with ingress filtering enabled, VLAN IDs not defined in the table are
discarded.
· State: [Enable] or [Disable] the VLAN
· VID: VLAN ID (1...4094)
· ETH1: Include ETH1 in this VLAN. Cannot be enabled if ETH1 is an access port
· ETH2: Include ETH2 in this VLAN. Cannot be enabled if ETH2 is an access port
· Description: Description of the VLAN (128 Characters Max)

VLAN - PTMP via repeater

The following Diagrams are designed to provide VLAN configuration information on typical
topologies. The channel bandwidth and Tx/Rx frequencies are not shown within the diagrams, as
they depend on the user’s license.

The following examples require a prerequisite understanding of VLAN functionality.

02/2022 353
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Example 1: Access port

The following example shows the configuration of VLAN required to isolate different hosts
residing on the same network.

The Network Management Host is connected to the ETH1 interface of the Entry Point radio. Via
this interface, the Network Management Host will reside on VLAN 1 (over the radio network). As
the Management VLAN ID of each radio is a member of VLAN 1, the Network Management Host
will have access to radio services including: HTTP/S, Telnet, SSH, SNMP & eDiags.

The SCADA Control Host is connected to the ETH2 interface of the Entry Point radio. Via this
interface, the SCADA Control Host will reside on VLAN 2 (over the radio network). As the
remote radio’ s ETH2 interface is a member of VLAN 2, the SCADA Control Host will have
access to the SCADA devices connected to the ETH2 interface of the remote radios.

In this example, the Network Management Host does not have access to the SCADA devices (as
they are connected to the ETH2 interface of the remote radios, which is a member of VLAN 2),
while the SCADA Control Host does not have access to radio services, as they reside on VLAN
1.

Example 2: Trunk port

The following example shows the configuration of VLAN required to allow pre-tagged VLAN
packets, to be sent over the radio network.

354 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part H - Feature Detail

Pre-tagged VLAN packets are sent into each port of the entry point radio. This example shows
managed Ethernet switches performing the VLAN tagging.

The entry point radio is configured to trunk VLAN 1 & VLAN 2 on the ETH1 interface.

As packets from the Network Management Host are being tagged on VLAN 1 (by the managed
switch) and the Management VLAN ID of each radio is a member of VLAN 1, the Network
Management Host will have access to radio services including:

HTTP/S, Telnet, SSH, SNMP & eDiags.

As packets from the SCADA Control Host are being tagged on VLAN 2 (by the managed
switch) and the remote radio’
s ETH2 interface is a member of VLAN 2, the SCADA Control Host
will have access to the SCADA devices connected to the ETH2 interface of the remote radios.

In this example, the Network Management Host does not have access to the SCADA devices (as
they are connected to the ETH2 interface of the remote radios, which is a member of VLAN 2),
while the SCADA Control Host does not have access to radio services, as the managed switch
has tagged them on VLAN 1.

Example 3: Trunk port and access port

A mixture of the preceding examples can be implemented on the radio network. In this
circumstance, the trunk port will not allow the VLAN which the Access port is a member of,
unless specified in the membership table.

8.6 Low Power Mode

Low Power Mode allows an external device to put the Trio Q Series Data Radio into a low power
mode by pulling pin 9 of the COM1/2 connector to Gnd.

There are several qualifications:

· If an HTTP (GUI) session is current, then Low Power Mode is deferred until the session is
closed or times out. Note that HTTP sessions without security time out one hour after the last
activity on the GUI. A GUI session started with User Security (password entry) will terminate
when the user logs out.

02/2022 355
Part H - Feature Detail Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

· If a Telnet or SSH (TUI) session is current, then Low Power Mode is deferred until the
session is closed or times out.
· If the radio is configured as a Dynamic Beacon Remote, then the radio will wake up
periodically around the expected time of the next beacon, wait for the beacon, and then
resume sleep.
· If at the time the pin assertion occurs the Dynamic Beacon has not yet been received, then
the radio's sleep is deferred until it has received the beacon for the first time (thus it now
knows the beacon timing).
· Radios configured as TGCM Manager or Repeater, or as Dynamic Beacon Manager in non
TGCM modes, do not support Low Power Mode. The user configuration interface does not
allow the enabling of Low Power Mode.
· If the Sleep input is active when the radio is powered up, normal boot-up is completed before
entering Low Power Mode (contingent on it not expecting the Dynamic Beacon for the first
time).
An additional qualification can be configured to prevent entering low power mode if either
Ethernet port is in a link-active state. If the Ethernet option is enabled, the radio will be
awakened to check for a link-active port the earlier of every 30 seconds, or when the radio is
expected to receive the Dynamic Beacon.

All LEDs will extinguish while the radio is asleep in Low Power Mode.

356 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part I - Installation and Commissioning

9 Part I - Installation and Commissioning

All Trio Q Data Radios need to be properly installed and commissioned to function reliably.
Installers should be familiar with RF products / installations and are equipped with appropriate
tools necessary to help ensure the ongoing reliability of a communications system.

This is a short form guide to assist with the correct installation and commissioning of Trio Q
Data Radios and help ensure that useful tests are made and recorded at each site for future
reference should an issue arise.

Installers should check that each Trio Q Data Radio has been programmed to suit their
requirements before installation.

Installations play a role in network performance. The installation should be performed in a

professional manner with careful consideration to the following items:
· Adequate primary power cable - relative to the length of cable to minimize voltage drop.
· Shielded CAT-5 or CAT-6 Ethernet patch cable between the Trio Q Data Radio and any
external Ethernet equipment.
· Shielded RS-232 data cable between the Trio Q Data Radio and any external RS-232
equipment.
· Low loss coax used for antenna feed line.
· Careful termination of RF connectors.
· A suitable antenna for the requirement.
· Suitable placement of the antenna.
· Adequate signal strength from the manager radio.

Typical installation overview

The following information should assist when installing and commissioning a Trio Q Data Radio
Ethernet system.

Data connection

In industrial environments, connection to any external device should be by shielded CAT-5 or

CAT-6 patch cable. All cables should be routed with strain relief.

Mounting

The radio modem should be mounted in a cool, dry, and vibration free environment. Mounting of
the unit should be in a location providing easy access to mounting screws and all connections.
Trio Q Data Radios can operate within a -40...70 °C (-40...158 °F) ambient environment.

Power supply requirements (QR)

Rated Operating Voltage: 12...24 Vdc

Maximum Operating Voltage: 10...30 Vdc

02/2022 357
Part I - Installation and Commissioning Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Input Power (Rx typical): 5 Watts

Input Power (Tx typical): See the table below

Typical Input Power (Watts)

Tx Power (dBm)
QR150 QR450

30 18 24

37 28 37

40 39 52

The QR is supplied with a lock-in mating DC power connector, which should be installed with the
locking screws tightened to 0.5...0.6 N•m (4.4...5.3 lb-in) torque.

The radio is designed to limit damage if the voltage exceeds 30 Vdc or if reverse polarity is
applied. The field replaceable internal fuse has a 7 Amp rating.

Power supply requirements (QB)

Operating Voltage: 11...30 Vdc (Dual Input)

Input Power (Rx typical): 14 Watts

Input Power (Tx typical): See the table below

Typical Input Power (Watts)

Tx Power (dBm)
QB150 QB450

30 26 34

37 38 46

40 46 59

In high ambient temperature situations, the internal fans may operate, resulting in an increase
of input power of up to 28 Watts.

Typical receive/standby input power is 14 Watts. The input power will vary in transmit mode
according to RF output power level.

The QB is supplied with a lock-in mating DC power connector which should be installed with the
locking screws done up tightly (0.5...0.6 Nm / 4.42...5.31 lb-in).

The radio is designed to limit damage if the voltage exceeds the operating voltage or if reverse
polarity is applied. The field replaceable internal fuse has a 12 Amp rating.

Before proceeding with any wiring to the radio, refer to the wiring safety notices within the
preface of this document.

358 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part I - Installation and Commissioning

Connect and secure the Antenna, Ethernet and Serial plugs BEFORE applying power to the
unit. Lastly, before inserting the power plug, re-check that the terminals being used, polarity and
voltage on the DC power plug is correct using a multimeter and check the power cable against
the +/- label on the power input socket.

COAX cable connection

Select the appropriate cable and connectors for each application; selection can impact on the
performance of the system.

As an example, for each 3 dB of cable and connector loss, half the transmitter power is lost and
twice the receiver signal power is required to produce the same RF link performance.

In some installations where strong signals are present, a compromise of cable and connector
cost may be acceptable.

All connector terminations should be performed as per the manufacturer’s specifications; and if
connectors are to be used outside, use a sealant such as amalgamating tape to seal
connectors. Acetic cure silicon to seal the connectors is not advised.

Coax cables should not be stressed by tight bends, kinking or excessive flexing. Ensure that
coax cables have sufficient strain relief and are secure. If large-diameter rigid or semi rigid
cable is used, it is recommended to use a short length of high quality RG223, or similar, cable
between the unit and main cable feed.

See the following topics:

· Antenna Installation 359

· Optimizing the Antenna for Rx Signal 362

· Commissioning 363

· WUI Diagnostics 363

9.1 Antenna Installation

The selection of antennas and their placement can influence RF link quality.

Antennas are generally mounted to a vertical pole with either vertical or horizontal polarization
as per the license requirement.

Antennas should be mounted as high as practical and away from metal surfaces which can
cause reflections.

As a typical generic example for selecting the suitable antenna type, Point to Multipoint (PTMP)
systems generally employ high gain (3, 6, or 9 dB gain) omni directional antennas at the Entry
Point/Repeater sites and either omni directional whips (unity gain) or preferably high-gain
directional Yagi antennas (9 or 14 dB gain) at the remote sites.

Yagi antennas

Yagi antennas not only provide signal gain and directivity, but also provides protection from
interfering signals which are outside the beam width of the antenna. Yagi antennas help provide
optimum performance when communicating over very long distances.

02/2022 359
Part I - Installation and Commissioning Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Yagi antennas are polarized and need to be mounted either vertically (elements pointing from
the ground to the sky) or horizontally (elements in parallel with the horizon).

When mounting Yagi antennas with vertical polarization, it should be noted that some antennas
have a drain hole in the dipole (loop section of antenna). The small drain hole on one end of the
dipole must be pointed towards the ground so that water will drain out of the antenna. Also,
when horizontal the drain hole must be below the terminating stub for the same reason.

Omni directional antennas

Omni directional antennas provide a radiation pattern of equal strength through 360°in the
horizontal plane. This makes them ideal for Entry Point /Repeater radio antennas in point to
multipoint systems because they can reach a large populous of remote sites.

Omni directional antennas are also used at remote sites (although Yagi antennas are preferred)
and are typically ground independent whip type antennas. The main reason for using whips at
remote sites is for aesthetics as they are far less obtrusive than a Yagi.

Regardless of the type, antennas need to be mounted properly and in a suitable location as
covered below.

Antenna placement

Antenna placement is of paramount importance and plays a big part of the antennas and in turn
systems performance.

When choosing antenna locations the aim is to find the largest path of unobstructed space and
locate the antennas within that space. Locate the antennas as high as possible and clear of any
obstructions.

Where possible, avoid mounting antennas:

· Against or adjacent to steel structures.
· In an area which will have intermittent obstructions, such as, people walking past, vehicles
driving past etc. That is, mount antennas well above such moving obstructions.
· Near any electrical equipment.
· Near metal beams, structures etc.
· Inside any metal enclosures, tin sheds / warehouses etc. Some meshed wire fences act like a
‘
brick wall‘to RF transmissions.
· Away from guard rails or support beams.
· Above any pipe work or corrugated iron roofs.

Sometimes installations in such environments are unavoidable and where this is the case,
certain care can be taken to help ensure a reliable installation.

If tests indicate poor signal strength then the antennas at one or both ends of the link should be
raised, and/or moved clear of obstructing objects, or if directional antennas are employed they
should be checked for correct directional orientation and polarization (horizontal or vertical
signal orientation).

360 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part I - Installation and Commissioning

LED indicators

See LED Indicators 100 in Part F - Quick Reference Guide. During the installation process,
check that the LED indicators are operating correctly.

DC power

If all the LEDs are off, no DC power is reaching the radio modem or the fuse is open.
Successful power-up is indicated by the ‘ Pwr/Tx‘LED showing a continuous GREEN state.

When the transmitter is active the ‘

Pwr/Tx‘LED turns RED.

Sync/RxSig LED indicator

The Sync/RxSig LED is used to indicate the state of the receiver.

A solid or regular flashing GREEN LED shows that the modem is receiving decodable data.

A solid or flashing RED LED indicates the modem is receiving un-decodable data, this is
typically from an unwanted source.

A flashing Sync/RxSig LEDA also indicates a dynamic beacon alarm. This alarm indicates that
the radio has not received the dynamic beacon from a manager radio for at least 100s. The
alarm also indicates that the TGCM is not locked and the radio authentication is not
authenticated.

ETH port LED indicators

See the table below for Ethernet port LED indicators.

ETH1/2 LEDs

Ethernet port inactive, no cable connected

Ethernet port active @ 10Mbps

Ethernet port active @ 100Mbps

02/2022 361
Part I - Installation and Commissioning Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

9.2 Optimizing the Antenna for Rx Signal

When using a directional antenna, it will be necessary to align the antenna to achieve optimal
received signal. This can be done using TVIEW+ Diagnostics (measured RSSI) or by
measuring the RSSI output on Pin 9 of the serial COM port.

This can be done by using the (0...5 Vdc) output on Pin 9 of the serial COM port to indicate
signal strength (RSSI). This voltage can be converted to dBm using the chart below.

The RSSI output will peak latch for 3 seconds.

Chart is approximate only.

362 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part I - Installation and Commissioning

9.3 Commissioning

When commissioning an Ethernet radio network, ensure that the incoming received signal
strength (RSSI) is adequate to provide reliable communications.

For a system to operate reliably, an ‘

adequate‘signal level needs to be present which allows for
fading and interference.

An adequate level is typically 20 to 30 dB above the minimum threshold of the receiving device.
Using the dynamic RF data rate can allow the minimum threshold specification to be taken from
the lowest available data rate of the bandwidth being used.

Should this level not be achieved, then either:

· Find a more suitable location to mount the antenna.
· Mount the antenna higher in a more prominent location to achieve as close as possible to
clear line of site.

9.4 WUI Diagnostics

After the Trio Q Data Radios have been configured and installed, the next step in the
commissioning process is to review the WUI diagnostics available in every radio. Some of the
diagnostic parameters available are shown in the image below:

02/2022 363
Part I - Installation and Commissioning Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

364 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part I - Installation and Commissioning

Unit specific

Date: Specifies the current date and time. For the date and time to be correct, the radio
needs to be configured to synchronize with an NTP Time Server or manually set (does not
survive a power cycle).

Up Time (mins): Specifies the number of minutes the system has been running since boot
time.

CPU Load (%): Specifies the amount of CPU load the Linux based kernel is experiencing.

Memory Free (%): Specifies the amount of free system memory.

Supply Voltage (V): The DC supply voltage measured in V.

Radio Temperature (C): The internal radio temperature measured in degrees Celsius.

Radio Temperature (F): The internal radio temperature measured in degrees Fahrenheit.

Network specific

NTP Client State: Specifies whether the clock has synchronized to an NTP clock source.

Authorization State: Specifies the radios current state if Radio Access Control is enabled.

Dynamic Beacon State: Specifies the radios current state if Dynamic Beacon is enabled.

TGCM Sync State: Specifies whether the radio has acquired the TGCM beacon.

Network specific

ETH 1 Rx Packets: The number of Ethernet packets received on ETH1.

ETH 1 Rx Bytes: The number of bytes received on ETH1.

ETH 1 Tx Packets: The number of Ethernet packets transmitted on ETH1.

ETH 1 Tx Bytes: The number of Ethernet packets received on ETH1.

(The same applies for ETH2 and ETH3)

Radio specific

Tx Data Rate: The average data rate of packets transmitted to remote radios.

Tx Pathloss (dB): The average pathloss of packets transmitted to remote radios. The
difference between the transmit power and the signal strength received at the destination.

Tx Retry Rate: The average rate of Transmit Retried (ARQ) packets.

Tx Discard Rate: The average rate of Transmit Discarded packets.

Tx Duty Cycle: The average duty cycle of the Transmitter.

02/2022 365
Part I - Installation and Commissioning Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

RSSI (dBm): The receive signal strength of the last packet received.

RSSI avg. (dBm): The average RSSI of the last twenty (20) packets received.

Radio SNR (dBm): The difference between the signal strength of the last good packet and
the Noise Floor

Radio Rx Packets: The number of packets received by the radio.

Radio Rx KBytes: The number of bytes received by the radio measured in KB.

Radio Tx Packets: The number of packets transmitted by the radio.

Radio Tx KBytes: The number of bytes transmitted by the radio measured in KB.

Radio ARQ Retries: The number of packets that have been re-transmitted.

Radio ARQ Discarded: The number of packets that have been discarded after retries have
been exhausted.

Radio Data Rate (Kbps): The transmitted data rate.

Radio Rx Frequency Offset (Hz): The difference between the received and configured
receive frequencies.

Radio QAM Error Vector Magnitude (%): The Error Vector Magnitude of the last packet
received from the neighboring radio as calculated from QAM decoding information.

Radio Rx Frequency Offset (Hz): The difference between the received and configured
receive frequencies.

Radio RSSI (dBm): The RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) measured in dBm.

Noise Floor (dBm): The signal strength measured just before the last good packet.

Radio SNR (dBm): The difference between the signal strength of the last good packet and
the Noise Floor

Radio Peak RSSI (dBm): The signal strength of the last good packet received.

Radio Dynamic Mute Level (dBm): The current receiver Mute level.

Radio De-sense (dB): The nominal rise in the Noise Floor relative to a normal value for the
current bandwidth.

Dynamic Beacon State: Specifies whether the dynamic beacon has been received and is
current.

Tx Pathloss (dB): The difference between the transmit power and the signal strength
received at the destination.

TGCM Sync State: Specifies whether the TGCM beacon has been received and is current.

Wait Time To Transmit (ms): The average delay time between a packet being ready to
transmit and the actual time of transmit begin.

Authorization State: Specifies whether the radio is currently Authorized to an authenticator.

Radio Forward Power (dBm): TX Forward power measured in dBm.

366 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part I - Installation and Commissioning

Radio Reverse Power (dBm): TX Reverse power measured in dBm.

Radio VSWR: Voltage Standing Wave Ratio is a measure of the impedance matching of the
Antenna to the Radio.

Radio Set Power (dBm): Specifies the configured transmit power in dBm.

Wait Time To Transmit (ms): The average delay time between a packet being ready to
transmit and the actual time of transmit begin.

Random Access Contention (%): The success rate of a remote obtaining a transmit token,
or the proportion of contention slots generated by a manager being used for requests from
remotes in TGCM.

Quality of Service specific

QoS 1 Tx Packets: The number of packets transmitted with priority 1.

QoS 1 Dropped Packets: The number of packets dropped from priority 1 due to insufficient
transmit buffer.

(The same applies to QoS 2 to 7)

Compression specific

Compression (%): The amount of header and payload compression applied to transmitted
packets.

Decompressor Dropped Packets: The number of packets dropped due to decompression

errors.

Firewall specific

Radio Transmit: The number of packets and bytes (measured in KB) dropped from the radio
interface in the outbound direction.

Radio Receive: The number of packets and bytes (measured in KB) dropped from the radio
interface in the inbound direction.

(The same applies to Ethernet Transmit and Ethernet Receive)

02/2022 367
Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

10 Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance

· Firmware Updating 368

· Firmware Updating and Factory Default Information LEDs 369

· Global Firmware Updating 372

· Packet Capture Session 383

· Fuse Replacement - QR 388

10.1 Firmware Updating

Schneider Electric works towards providing enhancements and improvements to the firmware
for the Trio Q Data Radios. It is recommended that you keep the Trio Q Data Radios up to date
with the latest firmware releases.

The following instructions can be used to upgrade firmware in any Trio Q Data Radio. Using a
standard web browser, you can connect to a Trio Q Data Radio and inspect the current
firmware version which is displayed on the home page of the Web User Interface.

For new firmware updates which may be beneficial to your system, check the Schneider
Electric web site: http://www.se.com/ or directly from here:
https://www.se.com/ww/en/download/document/TrioQFirmware

To access the Trio radio section of the website, navigate to Products -> Industrial
Automation and Control -> Telemetry and Remote SCADA Systems -> Trio Licensed
Radios -> Software and Firmware -> See More Software.

Download the firmware pack from the website and store it on your PC or in a location on your
computer network which can be accessed during the firmware update process.

Firmware updates can be performed on a unit connected locally to the PC or remotely via an
operational radio link. For a local upgrade, it is recommended that all other cabling to the unit be
disconnected prior to commencing the firmware update to minimize any interruption to the
process or disturbances of signals on cables still connected.

For remote upgrades, it is advised to use the global firmware update tool.

The firmware update process is in two parts. First, the firmware is transferred from the PC to
the Trio Q Data Radio alternate firmware image via the HTML browser. This is called ‘ uploading
and unpacking‘the firmware. This typically takes several minutes. The second process involves
the user activating the alternate firmware pack, which causes the radio to swap current
firmware with the alternate, and re-boot. This typically takes between 5 to 6 minutes, depending
on how much firmware needs to be updated.

Firmware is distributed inside a ZIP file that contains a full firmware image as well as patch files.
Patch files contain only the differential set of changes based between two specific firmware
versions, hence they are smaller and take less time to transmit over the air than a full firmware
file.

Full firmware images should be applied when locally firmware upgrading the radio. Patch files
are designed for use with the global firmware upgrade software tool (see below), which
automatically inspects the target radios current firmware version and chooses the correct patch
file to send. Patch files can also be loaded manually via the firmware upgrade page in the web
browser, however the correct patch file needs to be manually selected. The patch file is the one

368 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance

that matches the current (working) firmware and then creates the latest in the Alternate
Firmware area.

Both full and patch file methods only apply changes to the alternate firmware pack. Once the
changes are applied, a separate user initiated process will activate the alternate firmware pack.
This activation can be done both via the web page interface and via the global firmware upgrade
software tool.

10.2 Firmware Updating and Factory Default Information LEDs

In some circumstances a firmware update or factory default might be required. A special LED
sequence is shown during this phase.

COM 1 RxD / TxD COM 2 RxD / TxD Sync / RxSig Pwr / Tx

Firmware Amber Amber Amber Amber

upgrade

Factory Green Green Green Green

Defaults

Firmware Upgrade: All LEDs flash AMBER (as shown in table above) - 1 second ON and 1
second OFF

Factory Default: (as shown in table above) will first illuminate all LEDs to a solid green state to
indicate a factory default process has been initiated. Once the factory default process has
begun, the LEDs will begin a sequence of flashing green LEDs until the process has been
completed.

Firmware update procedure QR/QB radios

Ensure that an Ethernet cable is connected from the PC’ s LAN port to an Ethernet port of the
Trio Q Data Radio, and the unit’s IP address is entered into the web browser. Check the serial
number displayed in the HTML page against the Trio Q Data Radio that you are about to update.
The serial number can be found in center of the home page as shown below.

02/2022 369
Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

1. Click Maintenance located along the top of the page.

2. Click Firmware Management along the left-hand side of the page. The firmware upload
page will now be displayed, as shown below.

3. To select the new firmware pack you wish to upload, click Browse/Choose File.

4. Locate the .tpk file which contains the new firmware. Select the file and click Open. The
page should now display the name of the tpk file chosen in the upload firmware pack
section.

5. Click Upload Firmware. If there is an existing firmware pack located in the Alternate
Firmware section, the radio will display a message, indicating that the alternate pack is
about to be overwritten by the new firmware pack. Click OK to continue.

This process can take up to 10 minutes, wait until the new firmware pack is displayed within
the Alternate Firmware section.

6. Once the firmware has successfully uploaded and unpacked into the alternate firmware
location, click Activate Alternate.

During this phase, 4 LED indicators will flash amber simultaneously. The alarm LED on a QB
will remain static. After 4 to 5 minutes the Trio Q Data Radio will re-boot and the new
firmware will be activated.

370 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance

After a successful activation, the new firmware pack should be displayed within the Current
Firmware section.

Firmware update procedure QP/QH radios

This procedure demonstrates how to update the firmware in BOTH radios of a Hot Standby
QP/QH. The offline radio will be updated first and then verified, and then it will be switched to
online, so that the second radio can be firmware updated.

Ensure that an Ethernet cable is connected from the PC’ s LAN port to an Ethernet port of the
Trio Q Data Radio, and the unit’s IP address is entered into the web browser. Check the serial
number displayed in the HTML page against the Trio Q Data Radio that you are about to update.
The serial number can be found in center of the home page as shown below. Ensure that the
communicating radio is forced online (via Radio Select Switch or TVIEW+ Diagnostics or Geo
SCADA Expert) and apply the firmware update procedure on the offline radio first.

1. Click Maintenance located along the top of the page.

2. Click Firmware Management along the left-hand side of the page. The firmware upload
page will now be displayed as shown below.

3. To select the new firmware pack you wish to upload, click Browse/Choose File.

02/2022 371
Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

4. Locate the .tpk file which contains the new firmware. Select the file and click Open. The
page should now display the name of the tpk file chosen in the upload firmware pack
section.

5. Click Upload Firmware. If there is an existing firmware pack located in the Alternate
Firmware section, the radio will display a message, indicating that the alternate pack is
about to be overwritten by the new firmware pack. Click OK to continue.

This process can take up to 10 minutes, wait until the new firmware pack is displayed within
the Alternate Firmware section.

6. Once the firmware has successfully uploaded and unpacked into the alternate firmware
location, click Activate Alternate.

During this phase, 4 LED indicators will flash amber simultaneously. The alarm LED will
remain static and indicate red during an activation. After 4 to 5 minutes the Trio Q Data
Radio will re-boot and the new firmware will be activated.

Note: While activating the QPs offline unit, the front panel LEDs do not flash amber.

After a successful activation, the new firmware pack should be displayed within the Current
Firmware section.

Before changing the front panel Select switch to auto or forcing the newly upgraded radio
online (via the front panel Select switch or TVIEW+ Diagnostics or Geo SCADA Expert) ensure
the upgraded radio is checked for operational health.

Verify that the front panel LEDs, alarm table, and event log do not indicate an active alarm. If an
active alarm is detected in the newly upgraded radio, the online radio should not be upgraded
until the alarm has been resolved.

10.3 Global Firmware Updating

The TVIEW+ Management Suite software provides a facility to perform Global firmware updates
to every Trio Q Data Radio within a network over the RF channel. The Global firmware update
facility uses two techniques to limit the impact on user data. For instructions on installing
TVIEW+ Management Suite, refer to the TVIEW+ Diagnostics User Manual.
· User selectable (Slow, Normal, Fast, Fastest) rate-limiting to trickle data onto the RF channel.
· Differential firmware packs (patch files) dramatically reduce the size of the file needed to be
sent over the RF channel.
The combination of these two features allows seamless operation of SCADA traffic while the
update is in progress.

The firmware upgrading tool is rate-limited to minimize impact on user data. The uploading
process will take some time. Allow up to 24 hours to complete.

Minimum programmer requirements

TVIEW+ Programming software Version 3.25.0 (Build 19) onwards.

(It is recommended to upgrade to the latest version of TVIEW+ Programming software).

372 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance

Connection

Ethernet connection between the PC and the ETH port of the entry point radio. This tool
distributes firmware to the broadcast address of a subnet. If network routers/layer 3
switches/Firewalls or MAC layer filters are located on the Ethernet connection between the PC
and the entry point radio, ensure that broadcast packets are not being blocked/prevented to
allow the tool to work.

IP routing mode

When targeting the network address of the radio network while in IP routing mode, the radio
WAN subnet is used.

As the entry point radio is operating as an IP router, a configuration to allow broadcast packets
to pass is required.

Within Setup -> IP Routing -> Advanced, enable the parameter Directed Broadcast. This will
allow directed broadcasts between LAN/WAN.

Repeating broadcast messages

Within an IP Routing mode radio topology which includes a repeater, a configuration to repeat
broadcast messages is required.

Within Setup -> IP Routing -> Advanced, enable the parameter Forward Broadcast. This will
allow forwarding of broadcasts received on the WAN back on to the WAN.

Ethernet filtering

As the global firmware upgrade tool sends broadcast packets as a means of reaching each
remote radio, ensure that Ethernet filtering is not enabled within the entry point radio, which
would prevent the firmware upgrade broadcasts from being sent on to the radio channel.

See the following topics:

· Global Firmware Update Procedure 373

10.3.1 Global Firmware Update Procedure

To update the firmware

1. Radio Pre-Configuration: Before performing a global firmware upgrade, ensure that each
radio being upgraded has been preconfigured with the following common settings:

· SNMP: The firmware upgrade tool uses the SNMP protocol, therefore, each radio requires
the following pre-configuration:

o SNMP Enabled:

o SNMP Version: v1, v2c, or v3

02/2022 373
Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

o Read/Write Community String: For v1 and v2c, the read/write community string is
used to authorize a firmware upgrade

o Local User: For v3, a local user with read/write privileges is required to authorize a
firmware upgrade

· Mask: The firmware upgrade tool will address packets to the radio network’
s broadcast
address. The broadcast address of a radio is defined by the subnet mask.

2. Open the Firmware Upgrade Tool: Open TVIEW+ Management Suit, click Firmware
Update. The Firmware upgrade page opens. Once open, click Q-Series Firmware
Upgrade. The Global Firmware Upgrade tool for Q-Series opens.

The Global firmware upgrade tool opens.

374 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance

3. Configure the Firmware Upgrade Tool: The firmware upgrade tool requires the following
parameters to allow communication with each of the radios being upgraded.

· Network Address: This parameter defines the base (beginning) IP Address of the
subnet. Otherwise known as Subnet IP, Base Address or Subnet ID.

· Mask: The mask is used to define the range of the subnet. Used in conjunction with the
Network Address, the firmware upgrade tool can determine:

o Where the subnet starts

o How many IP addresses are within it

o Where the Subnet ends (The last address within a subnet is always allocated as the
broadcast address)

· Read/Write Community String (v1 and v2c): Set the same Read/Write Community
String within all of the target radios.

· SNMP v3 Credentials (v3): Username, authentication type and password, and privacy
type and password must match an existing local user on the target radio.

Example - Configuring the Firmware Upgrade Auto Discovery tool: The diagram below
shows a typical PTMP system along with the configuration parameter values required by the
Firmware Upgrade Auto Discovery tool.

02/2022 375
Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

The Network Address, Mask, and Read/Write Community String have been configured to reflect
the radio diagram above.

To perform discovery using SNMP v3, the radio needs to be configured for SNMP v3 with a
Read/Write local user. The matching user credentials are entered by clicking Edit Credentials
located on the SNMP Version 3 tab.

376 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance

4. Radio Discovery: Once the firmware upgrade tool has been configured with the Network
Address, Mask and SNMP Read/Write Community string (for v1 and v2c) or v3 credentials
of the radio network, the radios can be discovered, and can be populated into the table.
There are two methods for radio discovery:

· Auto Discovery: By clicking Discover, the tool will automatically interrogate each IP
address within the Subnet range defined by the mask. If any devices are discovered
during this process, the table will be automatically populated upon discovery completion.
Depending on how big the sub net is (how many IP address the tool needs to interrogate)
this can take a long period of time to complete. During this time, the progress is shown at
the bottom of the window.

Repeating the discovery will append any units previously not discovered into the list.

Using this process, it is also possible to perform discovery on a network consisting of

SNMP v1/2c and v3 radios by performing the discovery first for one, and again for the
other version. It is recommended to perform SNMP v1/2c discovery before v3 as the latter
would replace any units that were discovered during the initial discovery.

· Manual Population: When a small number of remotes have known IP addresses, it can
be time efficient to manually populate the table (rather than waiting for the tool to
interrogate an entire subnet). To perform a manual table entry:

a. Within the Unit List, click inside the white blank box underneath ‘
IP’
.

b. Enter the IP address of a radio, along with the Mask and Community String.

A new row will appear for an additional unit (if required). This will continue to happen
after every IP address added to the list.

02/2022 377
Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

All units entered are required to conform to the network address implied by the IP
address and Mask of the first entry in the unit list.

For SNMP v1/2c, the private community string is entered into the Authentication cell,
while SNMP v3 requires authentication credentials to be entered by clicking on the
matching Authentication cell to display the Credentials window.

It is permissible to mix SNMP v1/2c and v3 units in the list.

378 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance

5. Radio Verification: Once the unit list table has been populated (automatically or manually)
select the radios which are to be included in the firmware upgrade by clicking the checkbox
at the end of the corresponding radios table entry row.

The rate at which the firmware upgrade will take place is determined by the Transfer Speed
option in the Configuration tab.

To avoid saturating the radio bandwidth, it is recommended that a speed lower than the
lowest air speed on the radio network be used.

The trap target option allows firmware fragments to be sent to a unicast target instead of
being broadcast in cases where broadcast packets are not permitted on the LAN network.
The unicast target would be responsible for forwarding the packet as broadcast to the
listening radios. This can be achieved using the TCP/UDP Gateway feature on an access
point radio.

Example - Configuring a Trap Target: The diagram below shows a typical PTMP system in
Layer 3 (IP Routing) configured to send unicast traps to the Entry Point radio on port 10001,
which will then be forwarded as broadcasts onto the WAN and received by remote radios.

Once the required radios are selected, click Verify Selected. This begins an SNMP polling
cycle to each of the selected radios. The polling interval is dependent on the selected speed
on the Configuration tab.

The default Transfer Speed (Slow) will poll every 15 minutes, with 4 seconds between each
selected radio. This will verify that each of the selected radios are still present and are able
to receive the firmware upgrade broadcasts. To stop the polling or to select a different group
of radios, click Cancel.

02/2022 379
Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

If a radio needs to be removed from the Unit List table, select the radio in the table and click
Delete Selected. This button is not available during the verification process.

6. Open Firmware: Once the verification process is complete, open the new firmware pack
into the firmware update tool.

During a firmware update, only a small patch file is applied to each radio. These patch files
only contain the differences between current operating firmware and the new firmware being
upgraded to.

This provides the benefit of only sending small amounts of data over the radio channel,
rather than an entire firmware pack. As it is possible to have radios within the same network
operating on different firmware packs, a number of different patch files may be required to
be sent over the radio channel.

This means, during a global firmware update, the firmware update tool requires all firmware
update patches at once. This is done by providing the tool with the global firmware zip
package (contains all firmware update patches). Alternatively, if the radio system has more
than 2 or 3 older firmware versions or the firmware is < R1.0.39 then the full firmware pack
tpk file should be used and all radios will be upgraded in one step.

The global firmware zip package is contained within the standard Trio Q Data Radio
firmware zip, which can be downloaded from the Schneider Electric website:
http://www.se.com/ or directly from
https://www.se.com/ww/en/download/document/TrioQFirmware.

To access the Trio radio section of the website, navigate to Products -> Automation and
Control -> Telemetry and Remote SCADA Systems.

To open the global firmware zip file within the tool, click Browse and select the firmware
upgrade zip package. The global firmware update tool will then select the appropriate patch
within the zip file for each radio within the unit list based on each current firmware pack.

380 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance

7. Upload Firmware: Once the Firmware Pack is selected, the firmware can be uploaded to
the selected radios.

Click Upload Firmware. As the uploading is rate-limited to minimize impact on user data,
the uploading process will take some time. Allow up to 24 hours, per patch file being
broadcast, to complete.

8. Activate Firmware: After the Upload process is complete, the new firmware will be loaded
into each selected radio's alternate firmware location.

02/2022 381
Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

To activate the alternate firmware (which will switch the current and alternate firmware)
select the radios requiring an alternate firmware activation, and click Activate Alternate.
The status column of the radios selected will display an active alternate firmware activation.

It is important that you do not do all of the network at once. Do one tier at a time. For
example, all the remotes off of the repeater or the repeater by itself.

Once completed, the new firmware will be shown in the current firmware column as shown
below.

382 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance

Before changing the front panel Select switch to auto or forcing the newly upgraded radio
online (via the front panel Select switch or TVIEW+ Diagnostics or Geo SCADA Expert),
ensure the upgraded radio is checked for operational health.

Verify that the front panel LEDs, alarm table, and event log do not indicate an active alarm. If
an active alarm is detected in the newly upgraded radio, the online radio should not be
upgraded until the alarm has been resolved.

10.4 Packet Capture Session

The packet capture session provides a way to capture the packets on radio. This tool can be
accessed in the WUI by browsing to Maintenance -> Advanced.

In the Advanced page, there are two selection options as shown in image below. The option
Ethernet and radios packets is for customer use and Over-the-air packets is only for
technical support. These options are explained below this section.

02/2022 383
Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

To start the packet capture process, select the desired option from above and then click Start.
A new packet capture session will commence. Any old logs from a previous session will be
cleared. The packet capture session will continue until you click Stop or after 15 minutes.

To stop the running packet capture session anytime, click Stop. Once the session has been
stopped, the captured log files will be displayed on the WUI. The log files are date and time
stamped and can be downloaded by clicking on the file name link.

A log file’
s size is limited to 1 MB each, and a maximum of ten Logs can be stored per session.
Once the maximum number of logs has been reached, the oldest log will be removed, and the
capture session will continue writing new logs.

The two selection options available in the WUI are explained below with more details for user
insights.

1. Ethernet and radios packets (Customer Use)

Captured packets are saved in PCAPNG files and can be opened by a PCAPNG analysis tool,
like Wireshark™ .

The packets in the PCAPNG file will be marked as below:

a) Radio Interface: The packets captured on the Radio Interface will be marked with interface
“radio”(example, see red circle below).

b) Ethernet Interface: The packets captured on the Ethernet Ports will be marked as below:

i. Base station: All ports on the base stations will be marked with interface eth.

ii. Remote radio: Ports on a remote radio will be marked as interface eth1 and interface
eth2 for ports ETH1 and ETH2 respectively.

384 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance

Note: In the capture tool, the packets are captured as they enter and exit each interface. Due
to this, packets, which are forwarded from one interface to another interface, will appear twice
in the capture file. This is necessary to verify routing or firewall settings. However, as a result of
this, you might see warnings in Wireshark™ for duplicated packets. To remove these warnings
and allow Wireshark to analyze only the required interface, apply a filter on the selected
interface (such as ‘ eth1’or ‘radio’
) and then export and save the filtered packets to a new file.
To do this, please follow the following three steps:

Step 1

Apply the filter on the required interface. For example, as in the image below, to acquire eth1
(Interface id 1), you need to apply filter frame.interface_name == "radio", where the interface
name is as seen in image below.

Note: The interface name will be different for different models.

02/2022 385
Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Step 2

Once the id is entered correctly, the capture can be saved in separate file. Select Export
Specified Packets as below to save.

386 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance

Step 3

Open the saved file and you will see a capture on the selected interface.

2. Over-the-air Packet (SE Technical Support Use Only)

For SE Technical Support Use Only. The use of this tool will generally be requested from the
technical support team.

To assist with support, the radio can capture and record data packets being
transmitted/received over the radio channel.

Reviewing this capture can help determine whether there is unwanted traffic being sent over the
radio channel.

02/2022 387
Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

10.5 Fuse Replacement - QR

WARNING
HAZARD OF FIRE
Where an internal fuse is to be replaced, the replacement fuse must be of the specified type
and current rating. Refer to fuse replacement instructions within the product user manual
before servicing.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Remove power before replacing the fuse.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

QR fuse specification

Schneider Electric part number: TBUMPWR-FUSE-QR

Specified type fuses are: Littelfuse part numbers 0453007.MR, 0453007.NR, 0453007.MRSN
and 0453007.NRSN.

Current rating: 7A

Fuse type: Fast Acting

These fuses can be obtained from the following suppliers.

Supplier Part Number

Farnell 1677444

Element 14 1677444

Digikey F3140TR-ND

Mouser 576-0453007.MR

Newark 20C2978

To access the internal fuse of the QR

1. Remove power from the unit.

2. Remove the lid by removing the single 2.5 mm hex head screw from underneath the unit.

388 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance

The fuse in a QR in not soldered into place. Instead it is mounted within a fixed fuse holder.

To replace the fuse

1. Remove the blown fuse using a pair of pliers and lifting upwards.

02/2022 389
Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

2. Fit the new fuse using a pair of pliers and sit the fuse straight across the top of the fuse
holder.

390 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance

3. Push down on to the center of the fuse until it clicks down into place within the fuse holder.

4. Replace the lid and secure with the hex head screw.

5. Connect the power supply and test the Base for normal operation.

10.6 Fuse Replacement - QP and QB

WARNING
HAZARD OF FIRE
Where an internal fuse is to be replaced, the replacement fuse must be of the specified type
and current rating. Refer to fuse replacement instructions within the product user manual
before servicing.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Remove power before replacing the fuse.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

02/2022 391
Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

QP and QB fuse specification

Schneider Electric part number: TBUMPWR-FUSE-QB

Specified type fuse is: Littelfuse part number 0314012.MXP

Current rating: 12 A, 250 Vdc

Fuse type: Cartridge, Fast Acting

Size: 6.3mm x 32mm, 1/4" x 1-1/4"

This fuse can be obtained from the following suppliers.

Supplier Part Number

Element 14 0314012.MXP

To access the internal fuse of the QP and QB

1. Remove the power supply from the unit.

2. Remove the lid by removing the 14 countersunk lid screws (5 on each side and 4 at top of
back).

The main fuse in a QB or QP is not soldered into place. Instead it is mounted within a fixed fuse
holder “F1”.

392 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part J - Firmware Updating and Maintenance

To replace the main fuse

1. Gently remove the blown fuse using your fingers by lifting one end at a time upwards.

2. Fit the new fuse to sit across the top of the fuse holder.

3. Gently push down on the center of the fuse until it clicks down into place within the fuse
holder at both ends.

4. Replace the lid and secure with the 14 countersunk screws.

5. Connect the power supply and test the Base for normal operation.

02/2022 393
Part K - Open Source License Acknowledgements Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

11 Part K - Open Source License Acknowledgements

CGIC, copyright 1996-2011 by Thomas Boutell and Boutell.Com, Inc. Permission is granted to
use CGIC in any application, commercial or noncommercial, at no cost. HOWEVER, this
copyright paragraph must appear on a ‘
credits‘page accessible in the public online and offline
documentation of the program.

Modified versions of the CGIC library should not be distributed without the attachment of a clear
statement regarding the author of the modifications, and this notification may in no case be
removed.

Modifications may also be submitted to the author for inclusion in the main CGIC distribution.

Componen Version License Website

t

arping 2.09 http://www.habets.pp.se/synscan/programs.php?

GPLv2
prog=arping

avahi 0.6.29 LGPL http://avahi.org/

bash 4.2 GPLv2 https://www.gnu.org/software/bash/

bridge-utils 1.4 GPLv2 http://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/

networking/bridge

bsdiff 4.3 BSD http://www.daemonology.net/bsdiff/

busybox 1.20.2 GPLv2 http://www.busybox.net/

bzip2 1.0.6 BSD http://www.bzip.org/

curl 7.21.7 MIT http://curl.haxx.se/

dropbear 0.53.1 MIT https://matt.ucc.asn.au/dropbear/dropbear.html

ethtool 2.6.37 GPLv2 https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/

expat 2.0.1 BSD http://expat.sourceforge.net/

gettext 0.16 GPLv2 https://www.gnu.org/software/gettext/

and
LGPLv2+

hostapd 0.7.3 GPLv2 http://w1.fi/hostapd/

IBMTSS 1470 BSD https://sourceforge.net/projects/ibmtpm20tss/

License

iptables 1.4.11.1 GPLv2 http://www.netfilter.org/projects/iptables/index.html

394 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part K - Open Source License Acknowledgements

klish 2.1.4 BSD http://libcode.org/projects/klish

libcgic 205 CGIC http://github.com/boutell/cgic

Basic
License

LibCoAP 4.2.0 Simplified https://libcoap.net/

BSD
License

libdaemon 0.14 GPLv2 http://0pointer.de/lennart/projects/libdaemon/

libffi 3.0.9 BSD https://sourceware.org/libffi/

libiconv 1.13.1 LGPL https://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv/

libnet 1.1.2.1 BSD http://libnet.sourceforge.net/

lighttpd 1.4.29 BSD http://www.lighttpd.net/

Linux 2.6.38 GPLv2 https://www.kernel.org/

Kernel

lzo 2.05 GPLv2 http://www.oberhumer.com/opensource/lzo/

makepassw 0.5.1 GPL https://github.com/khorben/makepasswd

d

NanoPb 0.3.9.4 Zlib https://jpa.kapsi.fi/nanopb/

License

net-snmp 5.7.1 BSD http://www.net-snmp.org/

ncurses 5.9 MIT https://invisible-island.net/ncurses/announce.html

ntp 4.2.8 MIT / BSD http://www.ntp.org/

openssl 0.9.8za OpenSSL https://www.openssl.org/

OpenSSL 1.1.1d OpenSSL https://www.openssl.org/

and
SSLeay
License

OpenSSL 2.3.0 GNU https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jejb/open

TPM2 LGPL v ssl_tpm2_engine.git/
Engine 2.1

pcre 8.13 BSD http://www.pcre.org/

python 2.7.2 PSF https://www.python.org/

02/2022 395
Part K - Open Source License Acknowledgements Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

pyserial 2.5 PSF https://github.com/pyserial/pyserial

socat 1.7.1.3 GPLv2 http://www.dest-unreach.org/socat/

tablefilter 0.7.3 MIT https://www.tablefilter.com/

TPM 2.0 2.1.2 GPL https://lkml.org/lkml/2011/7/22/137

I2C driver

u-boot 2011-12 GPLv2+ http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot/WebHome

uClibc 0.9.31 LGPL http://www.uclibc.org/

wpa_suppli 0.6.10 GPLv2 http://w1.fi/wpa_supplicant/

cant

zlib 1.2.5 BSD http://www.zlib.net/

zstd 1.1.1 BSD https://github.com/facebook/zstd

396 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Part L - Support Options

12 Part L - Support Options

When e-mailing questions to our support staff, make sure you tell us the exact model number
(and serial number if possible) of the Trio equipment you are working with. Include as much
detail as possible about the situation including radio configuration files and system diagrams,
also any tests that you have done which may help us to better understand the issue.

If possible, include your telephone contact information should we need to further clarify any
issues. See Technical Support 11 .

02/2022 397
Appendix - Specifications Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

13 Appendix - Specifications
· Radio Specifications 398

· Transmitter Specifications 399

· Receiver Specifications 399

· Connections Specifications 402

· Ethernet Specifications 403

· Modem Specifications 403

· Security Specifications 407

· Diagnostics Specifications 408

· General Specifications 408

· Compliance Specifications 410

· Footnotes 410

13.1 Radio Specifications

· QB/QH/QP/QR150: 135...175 MHz

Frequency Range · QB/QH/QP/QR450: 400...450 MHz (L-Band) or 450...518
MHz (H-Band)

Frequency Splits Various Tx/Rx frequency splits - configurable

Channel Selection · QB/QH/QP/QR150: 3.125 kHz or 1.25 kHz channel steps

· QB/QH/QP/QR450: 3.125 kHz channel steps

Channel Spacing 12.5 and 25 kHz (software selectable)

Frequency Accuracy ±0.8 ppm, -40...70 °C (-40...158 °F) ambient

Aging <= 1 ppm/year

Radio Modes1 Simplex, Half Duplex & Full Duplex (model code dependent)

Duplexer2 QB/QH: External duplexer filter may be required (not included)

Tx/Rx Port Isolation · QB/QH150: >75 dB (Typical)

Requirements · QB/QH450: >70 dB (Typical)

1, 2 - See Footnotes 410

398 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Appendix - Specifications

13.2 Transmitter Specifications

Tx Power1 · CPM: 0.05...10 W (+17...+40 dBm)

· QAM QPSK: 0.05...5 W (+17...+37 dBm)
· QAM 16-QAM: 0.05...3.2 W (+17...+35 dBm)
· QAM 64-QAM: 0.05...2.5 W (+17...+34 dBm)
· QAM 256-QAM: 0.05...2.2 W (+17...+33.5 dBm)
· 0.1 dB resolution, user-configurable

Modulation1 Narrow band 2, 4, 8 and 16-level continuous phase modulation

(CPM)
QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM and 256-QAM quadrature amplitude
modulation (QAM)

Emission Designator Region Channel CPM QAM

Bandwidth

ACMA/ETSI 12.5 kHz 11K2F1D 12K0D1D

25 kHz 20K1F1D 23K6D1D

FCC/ISED 12.5 kHz 11K2F1D 11K2D1D

25 kHz N/A 16K0D1D

Tx Keyup Time <1 ms

Timeout Timer Configurable 0...255 seconds

Tx Spurious <= -36 dBm

PTT Control Auto (Data) / RTS line on Data Port

1 - See Footnotes 410

13.3 Receiver Specifications

See Footnotes 410 1 and 3.

Topology Hybrid single conversion / SDR

Frequency Error Digital receiver frequency tracking up to +/- 2000 Hz

Compensation

Maximum RF Level (Decoding) -10 dBm

02/2022 399
Appendix - Specifications Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

Absolute Relative
Channel Rejection Rejection
Region FEC Mode
Bandwidth (dBm) (dB)

QPSK -44 52
16-QAM -42 48
Adjacent ACMA/ETSI 12.5 kHz None
Channel 64-QAM -47 44
Rejection Ratio
256-QAM -52 38
(Selectivity)
QPSK -37 58
16-QAM -34 56
ACMA/ETSI 25 kHz None
64-QAM -41 49
256-QAM -66 24

Absolute Relative
Channel
Region FEC Mode Rejection Rejection
Bandwidth
(dBm) (dB)

QPSK -102 -7
16-QAM -103 -13
ACMA/ETSI 12.5 kHz None
Co-Channel 64-QAM -110 -20
Rejection Ratio
256-QAM -119 -29

QPSK -108 -13

16-QAM -103 -13
ACMA/ETSI 25 kHz None
64-QAM -112 -22
256-QAM -122 -32

Absolute Relative
Channel
Region FEC Mode Rejection Rejection
Bandwidth
(dBm) (dB)

QPSK -33 62
16-QAM -33 57
ACMA/ETSI 12.5 kHz None
Intermodulation 64-QAM -36 57
Rejection
256-QAM -41 49

QPSK -35 60
16-QAM -36 54
ACMA/ETSI 25 kHz None
64-QAM -40 50
256-QAM -47 43

400 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Appendix - Specifications

Absolute Relative
Channel
Region FEC Mode Rejection Rejection
Bandwidth
(dBm) (dB)
Spurious
Response QPSK -19 76
Rejection 16-QAM -26 64
ACMA/ETSI 12.5 kHz None
64-QAM -26 64
256-QAM -42 47

Absolute Relative
Channel
Region FEC Mode Rejection Rejection
Bandwidth
(dBm) (dB)

QPSK -4 91
16-QAM -6 84
ACMA/ETSI 12.5 kHz None
Blocking or 64-QAM -13 77
Desensitization
256-QAM -20 84

QPSK -8 87
16-QAM -11 79
ACMA/ETSI 25 kHz None
64-QAM -21 69
256-QAM -29 77

02/2022 401
Appendix - Specifications Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

13.4 Connections Specifications

Serial Interface 1 / 2 1 x DB9 socket connector providing 2 x RS-232 3-wire serial

ports or 1 x RS-485 serial port (shared connector)

Serial Interface Data 300...115,200 bps

Rates

Serial Interface Flow Configurable hardware / 3-wire interface

Control

Serial Interface DCD Configurable DCD operation: activated on RF carrier or from

Control user-data output

Ethernet Port 2 x RJ45: 10/100 Mbps (auto-MDIX sensing) compliant with

IEEE 802.3

USB Port USB Type A Host supporting Zero-Touch Configuration

Antenna 1 x TNC socket [Tx/Rx]

1 x SMA socket [optional user configurable Rx-only port]

Power QB/QH/QP: 10-pin locking, mating connector (11...30 Vdc)

QR: 4-pin locking, mating connector supplied (shared
connector, x2 pins for power, x2 pins for digital I/O)

Digital I/O QB/QH/QP: Optional 3 x digital inputs / 3 x digital outputs,

which can be monitored or controlled by TVIEW+TM
Diagnostics Software, EcoStruxureTM Geo SCADA Expert or
SNMP
QR: Optional 2 x user-configurable digital Inputs/Outputs,
which can be monitored or controlled by TVIEW+TM
Diagnostics Software, EcoStruxureTM Geo SCADA Expert or
SNMP

LED Display Multimode Indicators for DC Power, Transmit, Receive,

Synchronized Data, Serial Interface 1 & 2 Transmit & Receive
Data, Ethernet 1 & 2 Transmit & Receive Data

402 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Appendix - Specifications

13.5 Ethernet Specifications

Ethernet (including UDP, TCP, DHCP, ARP, ICMP, STP,

Supported Protocols
IGMP, NTP, and TFPT)

Ethernet Repeating Automatic Peer-to-Peer repeating

Operating Modes Layer-2 Ethernet Bridge mode / Layer-3 IP Router mode /

Mixed Layer-2 Layer-3 modes

Network Address
Static NAT Port forwarding and 1:1 Destination NAT
Translation

VLAN 802.1Q VLAN

Eight priority lanes / Min-Max bandwidth / Flexible user-defined

Quality of Service (QoS)
matches

Ethernet/IP/TCP/UDP/ESP Header (ROHC RFC-3095) and

Compression
Advanced Payload Compression

Legacy RS-232/RS-485 serial support via embedded terminal

Terminal Server
server (UDP/TCP)

TCP <-> UDP and UDP <-> TCP Protocol Gateway with
Protocol Gateway
Unicast/Multicast Support

IP Configuration Auto (DHCP) and Manual

SNMP v1, v2c, and v3, RFC 1213-compliant and radio

SNMP
diagnostics parameters (with notifications)

Modbus Gateway Configurable Modbus/TCP-to-Modbus/RTU Gateway

Time Server NTP Client / Server / Client-Server / Manual modes

13.6 Modem Specifications

See Footnotes 410 1 and 5.

Regulatory Bandwidth Forward Modulation RF Data Rate RF 1x10-6 BER

Region Error (Kbps) Sensitivity
(kHz) Correctio (dBm)
n (FEC)

256-QAM 80.0 -92

ACMA/ETSI 12.5 None
64-QAM 60.0 -100
(QAM)

02/2022 403
Appendix - Specifications Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

16-QAM 40.0 -107

QPSK 20.0 -113

256-QAM4 66.4 [76.8] -98 [-92]

Min FEC
64-QAM 49.8 -105
FEC 0.83
[FEC 0.96] 16-QAM 33.2 -111

QPSK 16.6 -113

256-QAM 57.6 -99

Max FEC
64-QAM 43.2 -106

16-QAM 20.8 -112

QPSK 10.4 -113

256-QAM 160.0 -84

ACMA/ETSI 25 None
64-QAM 120.0 -96
(QAM)
16-QAM 80.0 -104

QPSK 40.0 -112

256-QAM4 132.8 [153.6] -94 [-84]

Min FEC
64-QAM 99.6 -101
FEC 0.83
[FEC 0.96] 16-QAM 66.4 -108

QPSK 33.2 -112

256-QAM 115.2 -95

Max FEC
64-QAM 86.4 -102

16-QAM 41.6 -109

QPSK 20.8 -112

256-QAM 73.8 -92

FCC/ISED 12.5 None
64-QAM 55.4 -100
(QAM)
16-QAM 36.9 -107

404 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Appendix - Specifications

QPSK 18.5 -113

256-QAM4 61.3 [70.8] -98 [-92]

Min FEC
64-QAM 46.0 -105
FEC 0.83
[FEC 0.96] 16-QAM 30.6 -111

QPSK 15.4 -113

256-QAM 53.1 -99

Max FEC
64-QAM 39.9 -106

16-QAM 19.2 -112

QPSK 9.6 -113

256-QAM 120.0 -86

FCC/ISED 25.0 None
64-QAM 90.0 -98
(QAM)
16-QAM 60.0 -105

QPSK 30.0 -110

256-QAM4 99.6 [115.2] -94 [-86]

Min FEC
64-QAM 74.7 -102
FEC 0.83
[FEC 0.96] 16-QAM 49.8 -108

QPSK 24.9 -114

256-QAM 86.4 -95

Max FEC
64-QAM 64.8 -103

64-QAM 31.2 -109

QPSK 15.6 -114

ACMA/ETSI 12.5 None 2-CPM 8.0 -113

(CPM)
4-CPM 16.0 -110
8-CPM 24.0 -107
16-CPM 32.0 -100

02/2022 405
Appendix - Specifications Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

ACMA/ETSI 25 None 2-CPM 14.0 -111

(CPM)
4-CPM 28.0 -109
8-CPM 42.0 -106
16-CPM 56.0 -99

FCC/ISED 12.5 None 2-CPM 8.0 -113

(CPM)
4-CPM 16.0 -110
8-CPM 24.0 -107
16-CPM 32.0 -100

User-configurable packet error rate / SNR / RSSI based algorithm for

Dynamic Speed automatic data rate selection
Selection User-configurable minimum and maximum data rates, FEC and fixed
data rate modes

FEC Sensitivity Gain

Forward Error
(dB) with 10%
Modulation Correction (FEC)
Packet Error Rate
Level
due to Impulse Noise

Min FEC (0.83) 5

QPSK
Max FEC (0.52) 6

Min FEC (0.83) 13

16-QAM
Max FEC (0.52) 15
Forward Error
Correction
Min FEC (0.83) 17
64-QAM
Max FEC (0.72) 22

Min FEC (0.83) 21

256-QAM
Max FEC (0.72) 26

Truncated interleaved BCH encoding with .52/0.72/0.83/0.963 coding

rates

Operating Modes Base, remote, repeater or store-and-forward

Channelshare+ 256-QAM

406 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Appendix - Specifications

E/M-Series
Over-the-air compatibility with Trio E/M-Series radios
Compatibility6

Local and over-the-air, flash-based, firmware - upgradable patches with

Firmware
support for broadcast updates

3, 4, 6 - See Footnotes 410

13.7 Security Specifications

256-bit AES / AES-GCM with automatic rotating keys as per

Encryption7 NIST SP 800-38D

Password-protected HTTP and HTTPS configuration and

HTML Interface
management interface

Console Interface Password-protected Telnet, SSHv2 and Serial console interface

Multi-User password-protected access control [read only,

User access control read/write, read/write with security, unrestricted] - 256 max
users

Centralized user access RADIUS (RFC2865) based user authentication for remote or
control local logins with local user access control fallback

Authentication Certificate-based radio authentication using DTLS and X509

Advanced and basic mode packet-filtering firewall with user

Packet-Filtering Firewall configurable Layer 2 and Layer 3 rules for radio and Ethernet
ports

Non-volatile time-stamped event log with support for integration

Event Logging
into SYSLOG servers

7 - See Footnotes 410

02/2022 407
Appendix - Specifications Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

13.8 Diagnostics Specifications

Local (HTTP/HTTPS/Telnet/SSH/Console) or remote

(Serial/TCP/UDP) access
Compatible with TVIEW+ and EcoStruxure Geo SCADA Expert
Network-wide access
Non-intrusive protocol – runs simultaneously with the application
Diagnostics Embedded history of diagnostics parameters and data statistics
Embedded network list of peer radios
Embedded error rate testing capabilities
Many diagnostics parameters available including Tx Power,
RSSI, Supply Voltage, Temperature and VSWR
Embedded WiresharkTM packet capture tool

Embedded event and performance logs including time-stamped

Logging
data statistics and channel occupancy

Configuration Manual Configuration via embedded HTTP, HTTPS web

interface and or Telnet/SSH/Serial console with optional
TFTP/SCP
Command line interface
Automatic Zero-Touch configuration load via USB
Automatic configuration save via TFTP/SCP server

Ping Tester Embedded ping test facility

Manufacturing Embedded manufacturing test report (PDF)

13.9 General Specifications

Operating Temperature
-40...70 °C (-40...158 °F) ambient
Range

Relative Humidity Up to 95% at 40 °C (104 °F) ambient

Altitude 0...3000 m (0...9843 ft.) above mean sea level

Barometric Pressure 75...106 kPa (0.75...1.06 Bar)

Cooling QB/QH/QP: Built-in temperature controlled fan

Input Voltage 10...30 Vdc

408 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Appendix - Specifications

Input Power (Tx typical) · QB150: 26 W @ 30 dBm, 38 W @ 37 dBm, 46 W @ 40 dBm

· QB450: 34 W @ 30 dBm, 46 W @ 37 dBm, 59 W @ 40 dBm
· QH150: 48 W @ 30 dBm, 59 W @ 37 dBm, 68 W @ 40 dBm
· QH450: 55 W @ 30 dBm, 67 W @ 37 dBm, 80 W @ 40 dBm
· QP150: 12.5 kHz: -44 dBm / 52 dB
· QP450: 25 kHz: -37 dBm / 58 dB
· QR150: 18 W @ 30 dBm, 28 W @ 37 dBm, 39 W @ 40
dBm
· QR450: 24 W @ 30 dBm, 35 W @ 37 dBm, 52 W @ 40
dBm

Input Power (Rx typical) QB: 14 W

QH: 35 W
QP: 14 W
QR: 5 W / 1 W Low Power Mode

Protection Mode QH: Automatic or manual changeover between QB450 units

Housing & Dimensions QB: 483 mm (19 in.) 1 RU rack mount (Brackets adjustable for
front, centre or proud mount). Without mounting brackets: 424 x
44.45 x 436.5 mm (16.7 in. x 1.75 in. x 17.18 in.)
QH: Hot Standby is configured using 2 x QB450 + 1 x Hot
Standby Controller (19 in. 1 RU each) for a total of 19 in. (483
mm) 3 RU rack mount. (Brackets adjustable for front, center or
proud mount) Without mounting brackets, 42 x 133.3 x 436.5
mm (16.7 x 5.25 x 17.18 in.))
QP: 483 mm (19 in.) 1 RU rack mount (Brackets adjustable for
front, centre or proud mount). Without mounting brackets: 424
mm x 44.45 mm x 436.5 mm (16.7 in. x 1.75 in. x 17.18 in.)
QR: Rugged die-cast, 115 x 56 x 164 mm (4.52 x 2.2 x 6.45 in.)

Mounting QR: Integrated Mounting Holes or DIN Rail mounting (optional)

Weight QB: 5 kg (11 lbs.)

QH: 15 kg (33 lbs) excluding option duplexer
QP: 5 kg (11 lbs.)
QR: 0.95 kg (2.1 lbs.)

02/2022 409
Appendix - Specifications Trio Q Data Radio User Manual

13.10 Compliance Specifications

See Footnotes 410 1 and 5.

ETSI EN 300 113 V2.2.1 RED, ETSI EN 302 561, EN 301 489,
Europe (ETSI)
EN 62638-1, EN 50385, EN 50383 and EN 300 019-2-3

United States (FCC) 47CFR PART 2, PART 15 A & B, PART 90, IEC 60950-14

Canada (ISED) RSS-Gen, RSS-102, RSS-119, IEC 60950-14

Australia (ACMA) AS/NZS 4295-2004, AS/NZS 60950.1

CSA Class I, Division II, Groups (A,B,C,D) for Hazardous

Hazardous Locations
Locations ANSI/UL equivalent

Substation Substation hardened to IEEE 1613 Class 2 and IEC-61850-3

13.11 Footnotes

1. Availability of radio models is dependent on country of deployment. Local and regulatory

conditions may determine the performance and suitability of the radio in different countries.
It is the responsibility of the buyer to ensure the radio model meets the regulatory conditions
required. Some parameters depend on model type and/or mode of operation. Contact your
local Schneider Electric sales office for more details.

2. The QB is a full duplex radio and needs to be deployed with suitable isolation between
transmitter and receiver. Isolation may be achieved by the use of band pass duplexer,
external filters or suitably spaced separate antennas. Internal duplexers and filters are not
available. Suitable duplexers include TBUMDUPLXBPXXXCOA. For information regarding
duplexers, contact your local sales office or refer to the Wireless Accessories data sheet.

3. Typical figures shown based on QPSK modulation in 12.5 kHz ETSI channel without
Forward Error Correction unless otherwise specified.

4. 256-QAM full data rate (without FEC) may not be obtainable under all hardware operating
conditions. For this reason, dynamic speed selection may select 256 QAM with [FEC 0.96]
providing close to full data rate with minimal overhead in conjunction with FEC 0.83 to
achieve improved sensitivity.

5. Other country and radio regulatory regional approvals are available upon request. Contact
your local Schneider Electric sales office for more details.

6. Backward-compatibility is not available for all types & models of Trio E radio. Not all features
are available when operating in backward-compatible mode. The following modulations are
supported in E/M compatibility mode (as of Firmware Version 1.3.6.3674):

410 02/2022
Trio Q Data Radio User Manual Appendix - Specifications

E-Series M-Series

9600 12.5 kHz ACA 4 Level 9600 25.0kHz ACA M-Series

19200 25.0 kHz ACA 4 Level 4800 12.5kHz ACA M-Series

9600 12.5 kHz FCC 4 Level 4800 25.0kHz ACA M-Series

19200 12.5 kHz FCC 4 Level 2400 12.5kHz ACA M-Series

19200 25.0 kHz FCC 2 Level 9600 12.5kHz FCC M-Series

9600 12.5 kHz ETSI 4 Level 4800 12.5kHz ETSI M-Series

For BER specifications and/or sensitivities, refer to the corresponding E or M Series

datasheet.

7. Export and import restrictions may apply.

02/2022 411
Schneider Electric Systems USA
Process Automation, Remote Operations
38 Neponset Avenue, Foxboro, Massachusetts 02035 USA

Email: [email protected]

www.se.com

© 2014 - 2022 Schneider Electric Systems USA Inc.

All Rights Reserved.